United States
 Environmental Protection
 Agency
Office of Water
Regulations and Standards
Washington, DC 20460
November 1983
Water
Technical Support Manual:
Waterbody Surveys and
Assessments for Conducting
Use Attainability Analyses
                           440486037
 U.S. Environmental Protection Agwd
 Region 5, Library (PL-12J)
 77 West Jackson Boulevard,
 Chicago, IL 60604-3590

-------
U.S.

-------
                                 Foreword

     The Technical Support Manual: Water Body  Surveys  and Assessments  for
Conducting Use Attainability Analyses contains  technical guidance  prepared
by EPA to assist States in implementing the  revised Water Duality  Standards
Regulation (4R FR 51400, November 8, 1983).  EPA  prepared this  document
in response to requests by several States for  additional guidance  and
detail on conducting use attainability analyses beyond  that which  is
contained in Chapter 3 of the Water Quality  Standards  Handbook  (December,
1983).

     Consideration of the suitability of a water  body  for attaining a  given
use is an integral part of the water quality standards  review and  revision
process.  This guidance is intended to assist  States in  answering  three
central questions:

(1) What are the aquatic protection uses currently being achieved  in the
    water body?
(2) What are the potential uses that can be  attained based on the  physical,
    chemical  and biological  characteristics  of  the water body7; and,
(3) What are the causes of any impairment of the  uses?

     EPA will continue providing guidance and  technical  assistance to  the
States in order to improve the scientific and  technical  basis of water
quality standards decisions.  States are encouraged to  consult with EPA at
the beginning of any standards revision project to agree on appropriate
methods before the analyses are initiated, and  frequently as they  are
conducted.

     Any questions on this guidance may be directed to  the water quality
standards coordinators located in each of the  EPA Regional Offices or  to:

            Elliot Lomnitz
            Criteria and Standards Division  (WH-585)
            401 M Street, S.W.
            Washington, D.C.  20460
                              Steven Schatzow, Director
                              Office of Water Regulations and Standards

-------
                       TECHNICAL SUPPORT MANUAL:
                  WATER BODY SURVEYS AND ASSESSMENTS
                           TABLE OF CONTENTS
°Foreword
°Section I:  Introduction
°Section II:  Physical Evaluations
   Chapter II-l
   Chapter II-2
   Chapter II-3
   Chapter II-4

   Chapter II-5
   Chapter II-6
     El ow
     Suspended Solids and Sedimentation
     Pools, Riffles and Substrate Composition
     Channel Characteristics and Effects of
     Channeli zation
     Temperature
     Riparian  Evaluations
"Section III:  Chemical Evaluations
   Chapter III-l   Water Duality Indices
   Chapter III-?   Hardness, Alkalinity, pH and Salinity
°Section IV:
   Chapter IV
   Chapter IV

   Chapter IV-
   Chapter IV-
   Chapter IV-
   Chapter IV-
 Biological Evaluations
 1    Habitat Suitability Indices
-2    Diversity Indices and Measures of
      Community Structure
 3    Recovery Index
 4    Intolerant Species Analysis
 5    Omnivore-Carnivore Analysis
 fi    Reference Reach Comparison
°Section V:  Interpretation

°Section VI:  References
°Appendix A-l:
°Appendix R-l:
°Appendix B-2:
°Appendix C:
   Sample Habitat Suitability Index
   List of Resident Omnivores Nationally
   List of Resident Carnivores Nationally
   List of Intolerant Species Nationally
                                                  Page
                                                    i

                                                    1-1
II-l-l
II-2-1
II-3-1
II-4-1

II-5-1
II-6-1
                                                  III-l-l
                                                  III-2-1
IV-1-1
IV-2-1

IV-3-1
IV-4-1
IV-5-1
IV-6-1

 V-l

VI-1

-------
SECTION I:  INTRODUCTION

-------
One  of the  major  pieces  of  guidance  discussed  within  the  Water  Quality
Standards   Handbook   (November,   1983)  is  the  "Water  Body   Survey   and
Assessment   Guidance  for   Conducting   Use  Attainability  Analyses"  which
discusses  the  framework for determining  the attainable  aquatic  protection
use.   This  guidance  describes the  framework and  suggests  parameters  to  be
examined in  order to determine:
(1) What are the aquatic use(s)  currently being achieved  in the  water body?
(2) What are the potential  uses  that  can  be  attained  based  on  the physical,
    chemical and biological characteristics  of  the  water  body?;  and,
(3) What are the causes  of  any impairment of the  uses?
The  purpose of the technical  support  manual  is  to  highlight methods  and
approaches  which can  be used  to address  these  questions  as related  to  the
aquatic  life  protection use.   This  document specifically  addresses  stream
and river  systems.  EPA is presently developing  guidance for  estuarine  and
marine systems and plans to issue  such  guidance in  1984.

Several case studies were  performed to  test  the applicability  of the "Water
Body Survey  and Assessment" guidance.   These case studies demonstrated  that
the  guidance could  successfully  be  applied to determine  attainable  uses.
Several of  the States involved  in  these studies  suggested  that  it  would  be
helpful if  EPA could  provide  a  more  detailed  and technical explanation  of
the  procedures mentioned in the  guidance.  In response,  EPA has  prepared
this technical support  manual.   The methods and  procedures offered  in  this
manual are  optional  and  States may  apply  them selectively.  States  may  also
use  their  own  techniques  or  methods  for  conducting  use   attainability
analyses.

A State that  intends  to conduct  a use  attainability  analysis  is  encouraged
to  consult  with  EPA before the analyses  are initiated  and  frequently  as
they are  carried  out.    EPA is  striving to  develop  a partnership with  the
States to  improve the  scientific and  technical bases of the water  quality
standards  decision-making  process.    This  consultation  will   allow  for
greater  scientific  discussion   and   better  planning  to  ensure  that  the
analyses are technically valid.

Consideration of the suitability  of  a water body  for attaining  a  given  use
is  an  integral  part  of the  water quality  standards  review  and  revision
process.   The data  and  information  collected  from  the  water body  survey
provide a  basis  for evaluating  whether  the water  body  is suitable for  a
particular  use.     It   is  not  envisioned  that  each   water   body  would
necessarily  have  a   unique  set  of  uses.     Rather  the  characteristics
necessary to support a  use  could be identified  so that water  bodies  having
those  characteristics  might  be  grouped  together  as  likely  to  support
particular  uses.

Since the complexity of  an  aquatic ecosystem does not lend  itself to simple
evaluations, there is no single  formula or model  that will  provide  all  the
answers.   Thus,  the  professional judgment  of  the evaluator  is  key to  the
interpretation of data which is  gathered.
                                     1-1

-------
SECTION II:  PHYSICAL EVALUATIONS

-------
OVERVIEW
The physical characteristics of a water body greatly  influence  its  reaction
to  pollution  and  its  natural   purification   processess.    The   physical
characteristics  also  play  a great-  role  in  the  availability  of  suitable
habitat  for aquatic  species.    An  understanding  of  the  nature  of  these
characteristics and  influences is important to  the intelligent  planning  and
execution of a water body survey.  Important physical  factors include  flow,
temperature, substrate composition,  suspended  solids,  depth,  velocity  and
modifications made to  the water body.  Effects  of  some  of these  factors  are
so interrelated that  it  is  difficult  or even  impossible  to  assign more  or
less  importance  to  one  or  the  other  of  them.   For example,  slope  and
roughness  of channel  influence  both  depth  and  velocity  of  flow,  which
together control  turbulence.  Turbulence,  in  turn, affects rates of mixing
of wastes  and  tributary streams,  reaeration,  sedimentation  or  scour  of
solids,  growths  of  attached biological  forms  and   rates  of   purification
(FWPCA, 1969).   Thus  evaluating the factors  which constitute the  physical
environment  cannot  be done  by  just  assessing  one parameter but  rather  a
broader assessment and view  is needed.

The  purpose of  this  section  is  to  amplify  the  methods  and  types   of
assessments  discussed  in Chapter  3  of  the  Water Quality Standards  Handbook
for evaluating the physical  characteristics  of a water body.   The  analyses
proposed in  this  section,  as well  as the other sections  of this document,
do  not  constitute  required  analyses   nor   are  these  all  the   analyses
available  or  acceptable  for  conducting  a   use  attainability analysis.
States  should  design  and  choose assessment  methodologies  based  on  the
site-specific considerations  of  the  study area.   The degree  of complexity
of the water body  in question will  usually dictate  the amount  of data  and
analysis needed.   States should  consult with EPA prior  to  conducting  the
survey to  facilitate greater scientific discussion  and better   planning  of
the study.

                               CHAPTER  II-l
                             FLOW ASSESSMENTS
The  instream  flow  requirement  for fish  and wildlife  is the  flow  regime
necessary  to  maintain  levels  of  fish,   wildlife  and  other   dependent
organisms.  Numerous methodological approaches  for  quantifying  the instream
flow  requirements  of fish, wildlife,  recreation,  and  other instream  uses
exist.   Each method  has inherent  limitations  which  must  be  examined  to
determine appropriate methods  for  recommending  stream flow  quantities  on  a
site-specific basis.  The following describes in  detail  several of the  more
commonly used and accepted methods.

TENNANT METHOD

One of the widely known  examples of  an  instream flow method is the Tennant
method  (1976).    Based   on  analyses  conducted  on  11  streams  in  Montana,
Wyoming and Nebraska, Tennant determined the following:

(1)  Changes in aquatic  habitat are remarkably  similar among streams  having
similar average flow regimes.
(2)  An average stream depth of 0.3 meters and  an average  water velocity  of
0.75  ft/sec were   the   critical  minimum  physical   requirements   for  most
aquatic organisms.

                                   II-l-l

-------
 (3)   Ten  percent  of the  average  annual  flow  would  sustain  short-term
 survival for most fish species.
 (4)  To  sustain good  survival  habitat, thirty  percent  of  the  average  annual
 flow was adequate since the depth  and  velocities  generally  would  allow fish
migration.
 (5)  Sixty percent  of flow provides  outstanding  habitat.

 Using the above information, Tennant proposed  a  range  of  percentages  of the
 average  annual flow  regime  needed  to maintain desired flow conditions  on  a
 semi-annual basis.  These ranges are summarized  by  the following:
                         Recommended  flow  regime
 Flow Description  	October-March	April-September
 Flushing                    200% of the  average  annual  flow
 Optimum range               60%-100% of  the  average  annual  flow
 Outstanding                      40%               60%
 Excellent                        30%               50%
 Good                             20%               40%
 Fair, Degrading                  10%               30%
 Poor, Minimum                    10%               10%
 Severe Degradation	<10%	<10%	
The determination  of  average annual  flow  was conducted  by  Tennant by  the
summation of the average monthly flow  for  a ten year  period.   After average
annual   flows   are  determined,  recommendations   can   be  calculated   by
multiplying the average  annual  flow by the percentages in the  above table.

INSTREAM FLOW  INCREMENTAL METHODOLOGY  (IFIM)

The IFIM is a  computerized water  management tool  developed  by  the  U.S.
Fish  and  Wildlife Service  for  evaluating  changes  on  aquatic  life  and
recreational activities  resulting   from  alterations  in  channel  monphology,
water  quality  and  hydraulic  components.    Bovee  (1982)   outlined  the
underlying  principles  of IFIM  as:   (1) each  species exhibits  preferences
within a range of  habitat conditions that  it  can tolerate; (2)  these  ranges
can be defined for each  species; and  (3) the  area  of  stream  providing  these
conditions  can  be  quantified  as  a  function  of  discharge  and  channel
structure.   IFIM  is  designed to simulate  hydraulic conditions  and  habitat
availability for a particular species  and  size class  or usable  waters  for a
particular   recreational    activity.       The   hydraulic   and    channel
characteristics  are  simulated  for  IFIM  by  use  of  the  Physical  Habitat
Simulation Model (PHABSIM).

PHABSIM  is  a series  of  computer programs  which  relate  changes  in  flow  and
channel  structure  to changes  in  physical  habitat availability.    Hilgart
(1982)  summarized  the  PHABSIM  model  as  comprised  of  two  parts:    (1)  a
hydraulic  simulation  program which will  predict  the values  of  hydraulic
                                  II-1-2

-------
parameters for a range of flows  from either  a  single  measured  flow  (WSP)  or
two  or  more  measured  flows  (IFG4), and  (2)  a  habitat  assessment  program
called  HABTAT,  which  rates  the predicted  hydraulic  conditions  for  their
relative  fisheries  values.   Rather  than  describing  the  stream  reach as  a
series  of depth,   velocity  and  substrate  contours, PHABSIM  is  used   ro
describe the reach  as  a  series  of  small cells  (Figure II-l-l).
Figure II-l-1
Conceptualization of Simulated Stream Reach.  Shad;
Subsections Have Similar Depth and Velocity Ranges.
Instead  of summarizing  average depth  and  velocity  for  a  cross
PHABSIM  is  used  to predict the  average  depth and  velocity  for each  cei'.
Using curves  showing  the  relative  suitability of various  stream  attributes
by species and life stage,  a  weighting factor for the depth, velocity,  ind
substrate  in  each  cell   is   determined.     These   weighting   factors   are
multiplied  together   to   estimate   the   composite   suitability  for   that
combination  of  variables,  and  this  composite  index is  multiplied by  t >e
surfdce  area  of  the cell.   This process is  repeated  for each  cell  and  the
results  are summed  to calculate the  total  weighted  usable area.   Computer
simulations   are  then  produced  for  the  distribution  of  rmcrohabi tat
variables for existing  and  alternate flows, e.g., flows for a proposed  and
alternative actions which could  affect flow regime.

     The basic steps  to IFIM can be  summarized by the following:

     STEP  1:   Project  Scoping  - Scoping  involves  defining  objectives  for
              tTie  delineation  of  study area  boundaries,  determining  the
              stability of  the microhabitat  variables,  selecting  evaluation
              species,  and  defining their  life  history,  food  types,  water
              quality  tolerances and  microhabitat.

     STEP  2:   Study  Reach  and  Site  Selection  -  Involves identifying  and
              del ineating  critical  reaches  to" be sampled,  delineation of
              major changes and transition  zones and  the distribution of
              the evaluation species.
                                  II-1-3

-------
     STEP  3:    Data  Collection  -  Transects  are  selected  to  adequately
              characterize the  hydraulic  and instream  habitat  conditions.
              Data gathering must be compatible to IFIH computer models.

     STEP  4:    Computer  Simulation -  Involves  reducing  field  data  and
              entering into programs described above.

     STEP  5:   Interpretation  of Results -  The  output  from the  computer
              programTsexpressedasthe  Weighted  Usable  Area  (WUA),  a
              discrete  value  for each  representative  and  critical  study
              reach,  for  each  life  stage  and  species,  and for  each  flow
              regime.

For  further  information  on   IFIM  and  PHABSIM  the   following  publication
should  be  consulted:  "A  Guidance  to  Stream Habitat  Analysis Using  the
Instream Flow Incremental Methodology" U.S.  FWS/OBS-82/26, June, 1982.
                                  II-1-4

-------
                                CHAPTER  11-2
                    SUSPENDED  SOLIDS  AND  SEDIMENTATION
The  consideration  of  the   potential   effects   of   suspended   solids   and
sedimentation   on   aquatic   organisms   may   reveal   important  data   and
information  pertinent  to a  use  attainability analysis.   Suspended  solids
generally may affect fish populations and  fish in several  major ways:

(1)  "By acting directly on  the  fish  swimming  in  water  in  which solids  are
     suspended, and either killing  them  or reducing  their  growth rates,
     resistence to disease,  etc.;

(2)  By preventing the  successful development  of  fish  eggs and  larvae;

(3)  By modifying natural movements and  migrations  of  fish;  and

(4)  By reducing the abundance of food available  to  the  fish"  (EIFAC,
     1964).
(5)  By hindering  the  foraging  and mating abilities of visual  feeders  and
     those with visual  mating  displays.

The  effects  of sedimentation   on  aquatic  organisms  were  summarized  by
Iwamoto et al.  (1978).  These  effects include:

(1)  clogging and abrasion of  respiratory  surfaces,  especially  gills;

(2)  adhering to the chorion  of  eggs;

(3)  providing  conditions conducive to the entry  and persistence of
     disease-related organisms;

(4)  inducing behavioral modifications;

(5)  entomb different life stages;

(6)  altering water chemistry  by the  absorption and/or  adsorption of
     chemicals;

(7)  affecting  utilizable habitat by  the scouring and  filling  of pools  and
     riffles and changing bedload composition;

(8)  reducing photosynthetic  growth and  primary production,  and;

(9)  affecting  intragravel permeability  and  dissolved  oxygen  levels.

This chapter  of the  manual  will   explore  these effects  in   detail.    An
excellent   review of  the effects of suspended  solids  and  sedimentation  on
warmwater  fishes  was  conducted  by   EPA   in   1979   entitled   "Effects  of
Suspended Solids and  Sediment on Reproduction  and  Early Life  of Warmwater
Fishes" (EPA-600-3-79-042) and should be consulted.

GENERAL ECOSYSTEM EFFECTS

Suspended   solids and  sedimentation may  affect several  trophic levels  and
components of  the  ecosystem.   The  interactions  between  components  of  the


                                  II-2-1

-------
ecosystem are closely  linked  thus  changes  in one component can  reverberate
throughout  the  system.  The  following  examines changes  in  each component
resulting from suspended solids and sedimentation:

Influences on Primary  Productivity

Increases  in  suspended  solids   can  greatly   alter  primary  productivity
because  of  decreasing  light  penetration   and  subsequently  decreasing
photosynthetic  activity.    Cairns  (1968)  reviewed the  literature  on the
effects on primary producers.  The decrease  in  Mght penetration can affect
the  depth  distribution  of  vascular  aquatic  plants  and  algae.   Greatly
reduced  light  penetration  may   shift   algal   composition  from green  to
bluegreen since  the latter  are  tolerant  to higher levels  of  ultraviolet
light.   Butler  (1964)   observed an inverse  relationship  between turbidity
and  primary  productivity;  gross  primary  productivity  in a  clear  pond was
three-fold  greater  than an  adjacent  turbid  pond  (with  Permian  red clay).
Benson  and   Cowel1    (1967)  found   that   turbidity  in   Missouri    River
impoundments was  the  strongest limiting  factor to plankton  abundance and
that plankton was of great importance to fish growth and survival.

Suspended solids  can also  alter the  distribution of heat  in  a water  body.
Butler (1963) reported that colloidal  clay in central  Oklahoma was altering
the  heat  distribution and  consequently  summer  stratification was  more
pronounced  in  turbid   situations.   This   stratification  causes  greater
differences  between  the  surface   and  bottom temperature  in  turbid   water
bodies.

To protect  against  the deleterious effects  of  suspended  solids  on aquatic
life  by  decreasing  photosynthetic   activity,   EPA  (1976)  developed the
following criteria:  "Settleable and suspended  solids  should not  reduce the
depth of the compensation point for photosynthetic activity by more than 10
percent  from the seasonally  established  norm for  aquatic  life."    The
compensation  point   is  the point   at  which  incident  light  penetration is
sufficient  for  plankton  to  photosynthetically produce  enough  oxygen  to
balance their  respiration  requirements.    To   determine  this  compensation
point, a set of "light" bottle 0.0. and  "dark"  bottle  D.O.   tests would be
needed (see "Standard Methods", APHA,  1979 for  details).

Effect on Zooplankton  and Benthos

Benthic macroinvertebrates  and  zooplankton  are major  sources of  food for
fish  which  can  be   adversely  affected  by  suspended  matter  and sediment.
Depopulation and  mortality  of benthic organisms occurs  with  smothering or
alteration of preferred  habitats.   Zooplankton  populations may  be reduced
via  decreasing   primary   productivity  resulting  from   decreased   light
penetration.  Ellis  (1936) demonstrated that freshwater mussels  were killed
in  silt  deposits  of  6.3  to 25.4 mm  of  primarily  adobe  clay.     Major
increases in stream  suspended solids (25 ppm turbidity upstream  vs. 390 ppm
downstream)  caused  smothering of  bottom  invertebrates,  reducing  organism
diversity to  only 7.3  per square   foot  from  25.5 per  square  foot  upstream
(Tebo, 1955).  Deposition of  organic materials  to bottom sediments can also
cause  imbalances  in  stream  biota by  increasing  bottom  animal  density,
principally oligochaete populations,  and  diversity  is  reduced as pollution

                                   11-2-2

-------
sensitive forms disappear.   Deposition of organic materials can  also  cause
oxygen  depletion  and  a  change in  the  composition  of  bottom  organisms.
Increases  in  oligochaetes  and  midges may  occur since  certain species  in
these groups are tolerant of severe oxygen depletion.

Sensitivity of Fish Populations to Suspended Solids and  Sediment

Field and laboratory studies have shown that fish species  vary  considerably
in  their  population-level   responses  to  suspended  solids  and   sediment.
Atchison  and  Menzel   (1979)  reviewed  the  population   level  effects   on
warmwater species and  categorized  species as  either tolerant or  intolerant
based on their habitat preferences.  This review  also revealed  species with
a preference  for  turbid  systems.   Tables 1 and 2 have been  adapted from
this review and provide valuable information on  population  effects.  As  can
be seen from these tables, the  intolerant assemblage is  composed  of  a  large
number  of  species  with  complex  spawning  behavior  whereas  the tolerant
fishes  include a  larger  percentage  of simple  spawners  and  forms  with
special early life adaptations  for turbid waters.

Effects on Fish Reproduction

The  impacts  of suspended  solids  and  sediments  on fish reproduction vary
with the phases of the reproductive cycle.  The  following  describes  several
of the mechanisms of impairment:

(1) Diminished Light Penetration
Swingle(1956)provided  data  wnich  shows  that   suspended  materials  might
affect fish reproductive  processes by  reducing light penetration.  He  found
that largemouth bass  spawning  was delayed by  as much as  30  days in  muddy
ponds as compared to clear ponds.

(2) Visual Interference
Some species such as black  bass and  centrarchid  sunfish have strong visual
components  in  their  reproductive behavior.   For example,  Trautman  (1957)
found  that  smallmouth  bass  populations in  Lake  Erie  shunned   potential
spawning  areas  that were highly  turbid.   Chew  (1969) observed  that   in
turbid Lake Hoi 1 ingsworth  (Fla.)  largemouth  bass spawning was  very  limited
and  that  most females  failed   to  shed their  eggs  and  gradually  resorbed
them.

(3) Loss of Spawning Habitat
Reproductive failure among  many species  is attributable to direct  loss  of
spawning  habitat  through  two   pathways:  (a)   siltation  of  formerly  clean
bottom and  (b) loss of vegetation  due to the  reduction  of the photic zone
by turbidity.

(4) Physiological  Alterations
The major physiological alterations are:

(a)  the  failure  of  gonadal maturation  at  the   appropriate  time  and  (b)
stress incurred by  the organism thus  creating  increased susceptability  to
disease.

In general,  laboratory bioassays indicate  that  larval   stages  of selected
species  are  less  tolerant  of  suspended   solids  than  eggs  or  adults.
Available  evidence  suggests that  lethal  levels  for  suspended  solids  are
determined  by  interaction  between  biotic factors,  including  age-specific
and  species  specific  differences,  and  abiotic   factors such  as particle
size, shape, concentration and  amount  of  turbulence in the  system.
                                   II-2-3

-------
TABLE 1: SELECTED MIDWESTERN WARMWATER FISHES WHICH ARE  INTOLERANT OF
         SUSPENDED SOLIDS (TURBIDITY) AND SEDIMENT
Species
Spawni
Ichthyomyzon - Chestnut lamprey
"rastaneus X
Acipenser - Lake Sturgeon
fulvescens X
Poiyodon spathula - Paddlefish X
Lepisosteus - Shortnose gar
platostomus
Ami a calva - Bowfin X
Hioclon tergisus - Mooneye
Esox lucius - Northern pike X
Esox masquinongy - Muskel lunge
"CTTnostdmus - R¥dside dace
elongatus
Dfonda nubila - Minnow
Exoglossum laurae - Tonguetied minnow
Exoglossum - Cutlips minnow
maxi 1 1 i ngua
Hybopsis amblops - Bigeye chub
Hybopsis dissimilis - Streamline chub
Hybopsis x-punctata - Gravel chub
Noconris biguttatus - Horneyhead chub X
Nocopiis micropogon - River chub
Notropis amnis - Pallid shiner
Notropis boops - Bigeye shiner
Notropis cornutus - Common shiner
Notropis emiliae - Pugnose minnow
Notropis heterodon - Blacknose shiner
Notropis heterolepis - Blacknose shiner
flotropis hudsonius - Spottail shiner
Notropis rubellus - Rosyface shiner
Notropis stramineus - Sand shiner
Notropis tex.anus - Weed shiner
Notropis topeka - Topeka shiner
Notropis volucellus - Mimic shiner
Carpi odes velifer - Highfin carpsucker
Cycleptus elongatus - Blue sucker
Frimyzon oblongus - Creek chubsucker
Erimyzon sucetta - Lake chubsucker
Hypentelium nigricans - Northernhog
sucker
L^gochila lacera - Harelip sucker
Minytrema melanops - Spotted sucker
Moxoxtorna carTnatum - River redhorse
Moxostoma duquesnei - Black redhorse
'Moxostoma' valenciennesi - Greater redhorse
Ict'alurus furcatus - Blue Catfish
Effect
ng General
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Impact
Suspended so
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
through
lids Sediment
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
                                            II-2-4

-------
TABLF 1: SELECTED MIDWESTERN WARMWATER FISHES WHICH ARE INTOLERANT OF
         SUSPENDED SOLIDS (TURBIDITY) AND SEDIMENT (Cont'd)
Species
Etheostoma - Greenside darter
blennioides
Etheostoma exile - Iowa darter
Etheostoma tippecanoe - Tippe canoe
darter
Etheostoma zonal e - Banded darter
Perca flavescens - Yellow perch
Percina caprodes - Log perch
Percina copelandi - Channel darter
Percina evides - Gilt darter
Percina maculata - Blackside darter
Percina phoxocephala - Slenderhead
darter
Noturus flavus - Stonecat
Noturus furiosus - Caroline madtom
Noturus gyrinus - Tadpole madtom
Nocturus miurus - Brindled madtom
Nocturus trautmani - Scioto madtom
Pylodictis oli van's - Flathead catfish
Percopsis - Trout perch
omiscomaycus
Fundulus notatus - Blackstripe
topminnow
Labidesthes sicculus - Brook silverside
Culaea inconstans - Brook stickleback
Ambloplites rupestris - Rock bass
Lepomis gibbosus - Pumpkin seed
Lepomis megalotus - Longear sunfish
Micropterus dolomieui - Smallmouth bass
Micropterus salmoides - Largemouth bass
Ammocrypta asprella - Crystal darter
Ammocrypta clara - Western sand darter
Ammocrypta pellucida ~ Eastern sand
darter
Effect
Spawning General
X
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
X
Impact
Suspended so
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
through
lids Sedimen
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
                                   II-2-5

-------
TABLE 2: WARMWATER FISHES WHICH  ARE  TOLERANT  OF  SUSPENDED SOLIDS AND SEDIMENT
Species
Scaphi rhynchus albus - Pallid sturgeon
Dorosoma cepedianum - Gizzard shad
Hiodon alosoides - Goldeye
Carassius auratus - Goldfish
Couesius plumbeus - Lake chub
Cyprinus carpi o - Common Carp
Ericymba buccata - Silver jaw minnow
Hybopsis gelida - Sturgeon chub
Hybopsis gracilis - Flathead chub
Notropis dorsal is - Bigmouth shiner
Notropis lutrensis - Red shiner
Orthodon microlepidotus - Sacramento blackfish
Phenacobius mirabilis - Suckermouth minnow
Phoxinus oreas - Mountain redbelly dace
Pimephales promelas - Fathead minnow
Pimephales vigilax - Bullhead minnow
Plagopterus argentissimus - Woundfin
Semotilus atromaculatus - Creek chub
Catostomus commersoni - White sucker
Ictiobus cyprinellus - Bigmouth buffalo
Moxostoma erythrurum - Golden redhorse
Ictalurus catus - White catfish
Ictalurus melas - Black bullhead
Aphredoderus sayanus - Pirate perch
Lepomis cyaTfe'Tius - Green sunfish
Lepomis humilis - Orangespotted sunfish
Lepomis microlophus - Redear sunfish
Micropterus treculi - Gtiadalupe bass
Pomoxis annularis - White crappie
Pomoxis ni gromacul atus - Black crappie
Etheostoma gracile - Slough darter
Etheostoma micriperca - Least darter
Etheostoma nigrum - Johnny darter
Etheostoma spectabile - Orangethroat darter
Stizostedion canadense - Sauger
Aplodinotus grunniens - Freshwater drum
General Preference
tolerance for turbid systems
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
                                  II-2-6

-------
                                 CHAPTER  11-3.
                    POOLS, RIFFLES  AND SUBSTRATE  COMPOSITION


AQUATIC INVERTEBRATES

Many  factors  regulate the occurrence  and  distribution of stream-dwelling  in-
vertebrates. The most  important  of  these are current speed,  shelter, tempera-
ture,  the  substratum  (including vegetation),  and dissolved  substances. Other
important factors are  liability to drought and to  floods,  food  and  competition
between  species.  Many  of these  factors  are  interrelated  - current,  for
example,  largely controls  the type of substratum and  consequently  the amount
and  type of food available.   Of  these, current  speed,  the substratum, and the
significance of  riffle and pool areas will  be  discussed in  greater detail in
the  following paragraphs.

Current Speed

Many  invertebrates  have  an inherent need for current,  either because they  rely
on  it for   feeding  purposes  or because  their  respiratory requirements demand
it.  However,  persistently very  rapid current  may make  life  intolerable  for
almost all  species.   At  the  other extreme,  stagnant  or  very  slow  areas in
rivers which at time flow  swiftly  are often  without  much  fauna.  This is
because  silt  collects  during periods of  low  discharge, and  the  conditions
become unsuitable for  riverine  animals.  On  the other hand, many common stream
creatures  (e.g.  flatworms, annelids,  crustaceans,  and a  great  number  of  the
insects)  persist  in   running  water simply  because they  avoid  the  current by
living under  stones  or   in  the dead  water  behind  obstructions.  Still  other
animals which are  poor  swimmers and  lack  attachment mechanisms and therefore
can  only scuttle from  one  shelter to  another select  areas  where  the current is
tolerable,   and move  further  out  or back  into shelter as  the flow varies. This
applies to  many  genera of mayflies and to snails. Other  animals actually  bur-
row  down into  the  substratum to avoid the  current and require only to remain
buried. Many animals,  such as the  annelids  and some Diptera larvae, have this
habit  as a  birthright; several  other  groups  have  acquired this  habit, such as
several  genera  and  species   of  stoneflies  and  mayflies.  Similarly,  as  the
current changes  from place to place  in  a stream  at a given  discharge so the
fauna changes.

In conclusion,  current speed  is  a  factor  of  major importance in  running water.
It controls the occurrence and abundance of  species  and  hence  the whole struc-
ture  of the animal  community.

The Substratum and  Its Effect On Aquatic  Invertebrates

The  substratum   is  the  material   (including  vegetation)  which  makes  up  the
streambed.   It is true of many river systems that  the further down  a river the
smaller the general  size of  the particles forming the bed. This is partly due
                                    II-3-1

-------
to the  fact  that the  shear  stress  on the  bottom  and hence the  power  to move
(and break up) particles decreases with  increasing  discharge.  In  streams  where
current speeds do not  normally exceed  about  40  cm/sec a  streambed is likely to
be sand, or even silt  at still lower  maximum currents of about 20 cm/sec. How-
ever,  large  amounts  of  silt occur  only in  backwaters  and  shallows  or  as  a
temporary thin  sheet  over  sand during  periods  of  low flow; silt  is certainly
not  a  major  component  of  the  substratum  in  the  main  channels  of the  great
majority of even base-level  rivers.  Where currents frequently exceed  about 50
cm/sec  on  steep slopes  the  bed  is  likely  to  be  stony  and the  animals  which
live there must be  able to  maintain  their position.

The  substratum  is  the major  factor  controlling the  occurrence of  animals and
there is  a  fairly  sharp distinction  between  the types of fauna  found  on hard
and  on  soft  streambeds.  In  general,  clean  and shifting  sand is  the  poorest
habitat with  few specimens of few  species.  Bedrock,  gravel and  rubble  on the
one  hand  and  clay  and mud  on the other,  especially when  mixed with sand, sup-
port  increasing  biomasses. The  fauna of  hard substrata  has  its  own  typical
character, and  it  is  here  that  most of  the  obviously specialized forms  occur;
that of  the  soft substrata  is more  generally shared  with still   water,  and it
shows much more geographical  variety.

The  fact  that  rubble  supports more  animals than does sand is  almost certainly
correlated with the amount of living  space  (shelter)  and with  the greater pro-
bability that organic matter will  lodge among stones and  provide  food.

Another  factor  affecting  the occurrence  of fauna  in the  substratum is  the
temporary nature  of  some  types  of  substratum  themselves. For example,  stony
areas can  be alternately  covered with  silt or sand  and then cleared  away by
spring  floods  (spates).   Streams  that  are  more  liable to  spates  or  other
similar  phenomena  (which  greatly and  rapidly  alter  the  faunal   density)  have
less abundant  and  less varied faunas  than  others. An interesting  consequence
of this is that  small  tributaries,  being less exposed to the effects of storms
covering  limited areas, are  richer  than  the  larger  streams  into  which  they
flow. Another consequence  is that  as development  increases the  intensity of
runoff, the variety and abundance of stream fauna  also decreases.

The  presence  of solid objects also  affects the fauna,  and the   nature of the
solid object  affects  the animals  which  colonize it.  As  shelter  is  more impor-
tant, some  animals prefer  irregular  stones  as opposed  to  smooth  ones.  Still
other animals occur only on wood.

Other  factors which  may   account for  differences   of invertebrate  biomass in
streams  or  reaches of  streams  are the  differences  in  plant  detritus and in
vegetation  on the   banks,  which,  of course,  supplies  food to the  biota.  Both
the  amounts  and the  nature  of the  deposits  and the  vegetation  are important.
In  any  case  there  are more  animals  in  moss,  rooted plants, and  filamentous
algae than there are  on  stones,  and  all  plants  are more  heavily  colonized than
the  nonvegetated areas of  substratum.
                                    II-3-2

-------
Finally,  the  availability  of  food   (whether  it  be  organic  detritus  lodged
amongst stones,  vegetation,  wood.  .   .  )  is  an obvious factor controlling  the
abundance of  species.  Generally speaking  species  occur, or  are common,  only
where their food is readily  available, but it  should  not  be  forgotten  that  few
running water invertebrates are very  specialized in their diets.

It seems  appropriate  at  this time to restate the three  ecological  principles
of Theisemann  (Hynes,  1970)  which  summarize  the implications of the  foregoing
discussion.  They are:

   o   The  greater the diversity of  the conditions in a  locality the  larger is
       the number of species which  make up the biotic  community.

   o   The  more the  conditions in  a locality deviate  from  normal  and  hence
       from the normal optima  of  most species, the  smaller  is  the number  of
       individuals of each of the species  which do  occur.

   o   The  longer a  locality  has  been established in the  same condition  the
       richer is its biotic community and  the more  stable it  is.

In conclusion,  it can  be  stated  that  the  fauna of  clean,  stable, diverse  stony
runs is richer  than  that  of silty reaches and pools  both in  number  of species
and total  biomass.

As previously  discussed,  certain  species  are confined to fairly well-defined
types  of  substraum,  and  others  are   at  least more abundant  on  one type  than
they are on others. The result of these preferences is that  as the type of sub-
stratum varies  from  place to place  so does  the fauna. In general, the  larger
the stones,  and  hence  the  more  complex the substratum, the  more  diverse  is  the
invertebrate fauna.

The following groups of invertebrates  almost  invariably  provide the  major con-
stituents of the fauna of  stony streams:

   o   Parazoa
   o   Cnidaria
   o   Tricladida
   o   Oligochaeta
   o   Gastropoda
   o   Pelecypoda
   o   Peracarida
   o   Eurcarida
   o   Plecoptera
   o   Odonata
   o   Ephemeroptera
   o   Hemiptera
   o   Megaloptera
   o   Triehoptera
   o   Lepidoptera
   o   Coleoptera
   o   Diptera
                                    II-3-3

-------
The fauna of  the  softer substrata in rivers is much less evident than  that  of
the hard substrata. However, there are still many genera  of  invertebrates  such
as Limnaea, Chironomus, Tubifex,  and  Limnodrilus  which can be  found  in rivers
in most  continents,But the less-rigorous  habitat  of  areas of slower  current
which allows  less-specialized  species to  .occur also permits the  local  charac-
ter of the fauna to be dominant.

It is therefore  difficult  to  generalize,  but characteristic organisms  of  soft
riverine substrata  are: Tubificidae, Chironomidae,  burrowing  mayflies  (Ephe-
meridae, Potomanthidae,  Polymitarcidae),  Prosobranchia,  Unionidae,  and Spnae-
riidae,  and when plants are present  a  great  variety  of  organisms may  be  added.

Riffle/Pool  Areas

Natural   streams  tend to have  alternating deep and  shallow  areas -  pools  and
riffles   -  especially where there  are coarse  constituents  in  the  substratum.
Riffles   tend  to  be spaced  at  more or  less  regular  distances of  five to seven
stream widths apart  and to be  most  characteristic of  gravel-bed  streams.  They
do not  naturally  form in sandy streams,   since their presence seems to  be  con-
nected with some  degree of heterogeneity  of particle  size. Riffles  are formed
when the larger particles (boulders,  stone and  gravel)  congregate  on  bars.

The  reasons  for  the  regular  spacing  of  riffles  is  unknown;   however, it  is
known that riffles  do not  move,  although the stones that compose them  may  mi-
grate downstream,  being replaced by  others. Furthermore, it  has been  estab-
lished  that  riffles  are superficial  features  with  the  largest stones  in  the
upper layer.

Pools tend to  be  wider and deeper than the  average  stream course.  In contrast
to the  broken  surface  of riffles,  the surface of  a  pool or  backwater  is
smooth.   In  pools, the  current is reduced,   a  little siltation  may occur,  and
aquatic   seed  plants  may form  beds.  The  significance  of riffle/pool areas  to
the production  potential  of aquatic  invertebrates  has been  alluded  to in  the
previous discussions  of the current  speed   and the  substratum. One  result  of
the complex interaction  of local  factors  on fauna!   density is  that  in  streams
with pool and riffle structure,  the  fauna  is  considerably  denser on the  lat-
ter. Similarly, aquatic  invertebrates  are most  diverse in riffle areas with a
rubble  substrate. As  a  consequence  the amount  of drift  produced  by  riffles  is
greater than that produced  by pools.

FISHES

Like the invertebrates, there  are many  factors  which  regulate the  occurrence
and distribution  of  running  water fishes. The  most  important of  these  are  the
substratum, food  availability, cover,  current  speed,  and  the  presence of  a
suitable spawning habitat. All of these  are directly  related to  the  distribu-
tion of  pool/riffle areas  in a stream, and  for  most  fishes  a 1:1  ratio  of  pool
to riffle run  areas is sufficient for successful propagation and maintenance.
The significance  of the  substratum  (type  and amount),  and the  presence  of  both
pools and  riffle areas  will  be  discussed  in  greater  detail  in  the  following
                                    11-3-4

-------
paragraphs. Finally, the specific habitat  requirements  of  several  fish  species
(including black & white crappie, channel  catfish,  cutthroat trout,  creek  chub
and bluegill) will  be discussed in  order  to illustrate the importance  of  the
substratum and  the  pool/riffle  structure and to indicate the  similarities  and
differences in requirements between  species.

The Substratum and Its Effect on Fishes

A few fishes, particularly small benthic species,  are  more  or  less confined to
rocky or  stony   substrata.  These include  all  those with  ventral  suckers  and
friction  plates  (e.g.  some  species  of  darters).  Many  others  are also  fairly
definitely associated with a specific type  of substratum.  For example, the  gud-
geon  is  associated with  gravel,  the  sand darter with sand,  and the  mudfish
with thick marginal vegetation.

For the great majority  of  fish  species, however,  the  nature of  the  substratum
is  apparently of little consequence  except  at  times  of  breeding.  Nearly  all
species of fish  have fairly  well-defined breeding  habits  and requirements.  The
great majority  of  freshwater fishes spawn on  a  solid  surface  (such as  a  flat
area  under a large  stone)  in  stoney  or  gravel  substrata.  Other species  dig
pits  in  gravel   (e.g. the  stoneroller)  in which the eggs  are laid. This  re-
quires that  the gravel  be a suitable  size and be relatively free of silt  and
sand. Still other  species  make  piles of pebbles  (e.g.  some  chubs  and minnows)
through which  water passes  freely   bringing  oxygen to the  buried  eggs.  Some
species of trout and Atlantic salmon select  places for  spawning  where there is
a  down-flow  of   water,  say  at  the   downstream  end of  pools,  where the water
flows  into riffles.  In  summary,  species  which  construct  nests   (see Table
11-3-1) or  redds are restricted not only  in  respect  of the size  of the mate-
rial of the substratum, which they must  be able  to move,  but by  the  need to be
free of silt; and  salmonids, and probably  some other  fishes, are also  restric-
ted to places where there is a  natural  intra-gravel flow of water.

On  the  other  hand, there  are a great  many species (e.g. the  whitefish, ster-
let,  grayling,  etc.)  which  breed on  gravel  or  stones  but  build  no nests.  In
fact, this is probably the most  common  pattern of  breeding among running-water
species. Table  II-3-2 is a partial  list  of fish  species (which build no nests)
along with their  desired  spawning  habitat. The  fishes  which  breed  in  this
manner move onto the clean gravel in swifter and shallower water than  is their
normal adult habitat to spawn.

There are  also  those species which  spawn on  other substrata  besides  stones  and
gravel, including  sand  (e.g. the  log-perch),  mud  (e.g.  the Murray cod),  and
vegetation (e.g. some species of darters and  most still-water species).

Finally, there  are many riverine species (e.g. grass carp,  some  perch species)
which  lay buoyant or  semi-buoyant  eggs which float  in the  water and  are
carried downstream while they develop.

In  conclusion,   it  can  be  seen  from  the previous discussion  that  breeding
habitat requirements for fishes can  be  very  restrictive,  and consequently,  the
                                    II-3-5

-------
TABLE II-3-1. EXAMPLES OF NEST-BUILDING FISH

Species                                       Type of Nest

Sticklebacks (Gasterosteidae)                 Nest a circular
Largemouth Bass (Micropterus salmoides)       depression in mud,
Crappies (Pomoxis)                            silt,  or sand and
Rock Basses (Ambloplites)                     often  in and  among
Warmouth (Chaenobryttus)                      roots  of aquatic
Bluegill (Lepomis macrochirus)                flowering plants
Most Bullheads (Ictalurus)
Smallmouth Bass (Micropterus dolomieu)        Nest  a circular
Trouts (Salmo)                                depression in
Stoneroller (Campostoma anomalum)             gravel
Brook Trout (Salvelinus fontinalis)

Creek Chubs (Semotilus)                       Nest  a pile of
Bluntnose & Fathead Minnows (Pimephales)      pebbles
                                    II-3-6

-------
TABLE II-3-1. EXAMPLES OF FISH THAT DO NOT BUILD NESTS
opecies

Northern Pike (Esox lucius)
Carp (Cyprinus carpio)
Goldfish (Carassium auratus)
Golden Shiner (Notemigonus crysoleucas)

Whitefishes (Coregonus)
Ciscos (Leucicthys)
Lake Trout (Salvelinus namaycush)
Log Perch (Percina caprodes)
Suckers (Catostomus)
WaMeyes (Stizosstedion)

Yellow Perch (Perca flavescens)
White Perch (Morone americana)
Grass Carp (Ctenopharyngodon idellus)
Brook Silverside (Labidesthes sicculus)
Alewife (Alosa pseudoharengus)
Siamese Fighting Fish (Betta)

Bitterling (Rhodeus)
Lumpsucker (Careproctus)
Spawning Habitat

Scattering eggs over
aquatic plants, or
their roots or
remains

Scattering eggs over
shoals of sand, gra-
vel ,  or boulders
Semi-buoyant or
buoyant eggs
Eggs deposited in the
mantle cavity of a
freshwater mussel

Eggs deposited
beneath the carapace
of the Kamchatka crab
                                    II-3-7

-------
suitable  breeding  sites can  be extremely  limited.  Furthermore, the  require-
ments  can be  extremely  varied  among  species.  However,  the general  breeding
habitat requirements fall  into the  following categories:

     o Build a nest and breed on stone or gravel  substrata.

     o Breed on stone or gravel substrata without  building a nest.

     o Breed on other substrata, including sand,  mud,  or vegetation.

     o Lay buoyant or semi-buoyant  drifting eggs  and  larvae.

Pool Areas

Pool areas  in a  stream  are essential for  providing  shelter for both  resting
and  protection from predation.  To a  lesser  extent  pools  are  important  as  a
spawning habitat and for food  production  (although food  production  is  lower in
pools than in  riffles).

Even the streamlined species that  are well  adapted to  fast-flowing  water (e.g.
salmon and  trout)  need time to  rest  or  seek  shelter  to avoid predators.  As  a
matter of  fact all  fishes spend  most  of  their  time  resting  in  shelters  in
lower velocity pool areas.  Still other species  (e.g.  channel  catfish,  particu-
larly adults)  reside primarily  in  pool areas  and  generally  move  only to riffle
areas at night to feed.

Therefore, based on the foregoing  discussion, one must  conclude  that the exis-
tence of  pools is critical to  the well-being of  all  fish  species,  since  they
provide resting cover and protection from predators.

Riffle/Run Areas

As  discussed  previously  in the  section  on  benthic  invertebrates and  again  in
the  section  on the substratum  and its affect on fishes,  it is apparent  that
riffle areas  are  most  important due  to  their food producing capability  (i.e.
benthic invertebrates) and  their suitability  as  a fish  spawning habitat  (i.e.
it is in riffle areas where the silt-free stone  or gravel exists  and where  oxy-
gen to the  eggs  is constantly being  renewed). Without  an abundant  food supply
and the proper spawning habitat, propagation  and  n.aintenance  of  a  fish species
would be impossible.

Species Examples

Bluegill  (Lepomis  macrochirus)

The  bluegill   is  native  from  the  Lake Champlain and  southern  Ontario  region
through the  Great Lakes to Minnesota,  and  south to northeastern Mexico,  the
Gulf States, and the Carolinas.

Bluegills  are most  abundant   in  large  low  velocity  (<10  cm/sec  preferably)
streams. Abundance  has  been positively correlated to a  high  percentage (>60%)
of  pool  area  and  negatively  correlated to  a  high  percentage  of  riffle/run
areas.


                                    ' "•  "3  Q
                                    l 1 -J-O

-------
Cover in the form of submerged vegetation, logs, brush and other debris is uti-
lized  by  bluegills. Excessive  vegetation can  influence both  feeding  ability
and abundance of food by inhibiting the utilization of prey by bluegills.

Bluegills are  guarding,  nest building  lithophils.  Nests are usually  found  in
quiet shallow water over almost  any  substrate;  however,  fine gravel  or sand  is
preferred.

In summary,  riffles  and substrate play a  small  role in the  life  cycle of  the
bluegill. In  fact,  excessive riffle/run areas  have  been negatively  correlated
with  an  abundance of  bluegills.  On the  other  hand, pools  are  significant  as
the typical  bluegill habitat for resting,  feeding, and spawning.

Creek Chub (Semotilus atromaculatus)

The Creek Chub is a widely  distributed cyprinid ranging from  the Rocky  Moun-
tains to  the  Atlantic  Coast and  from  the Gulf of Mexico to southern  Manitoba
and Quebec. Within  its  range,  it is one  of  the most characteristic  and common
fishes of small, clear streams.

The optimum  habitat  for creek  chubs  is small, clear, cool  streams  with  mode-
rate to high  gradients,  gravel  substrate, well-defined  riffles  and  pools with
abundant  food,  and  cover of cut-banks,  roots, aquatic  vegetation,  brush,  and
large rocks.  Creek  chubs  are found over  all  types  of substrate with abundance
correlated  more with  the  amount  of  instream cover  than  with the  substrate
type. It  is assumed that stream reaches with 40-60% pools are optimum for pro-
viding riffle areas for spawning habitat and pools for cover.

Rubble substrate in riffles, abundant  aquatic vegetation,  and abundant stream-
bank  vegetation  are  conditions  associated with  high production of  food  types
consumed by creek chubs.

Spawning  occurs  in  gravel  nests constructed  by the  male in shallow  areas just
above and below  riffles to  insure  a  good  water exchange rate through the  creek
chub  redds. Reproductive success  of  creek  chubs varies with the type of spawn-
ing  substrate  available.  Production  is  highest  in  clean gravel  substrate  in
riffle-run areas with  velocities  of 20-64 cm/sec. Production  is  negligible  in
sand or silt.

In summary,  pools,  riffles  and substrate are  important  to the creek  chub  in
the following manner.

    1)  Riffles - provide a suitable spawning habitat,
    2)  Substrate - a clean gravel substrate is required for spawning,  and
    3)  Pools - provide resting  cover and abundant food.
                                    II-3-9

-------
White Crappie (Pomoxis annularis)

The white  crappie  is  native to freshwater lakes and  streams  from  the  southern
Great Lakes, west to  Nebraska, south to Texas  and  Alabama,  east  to North Caro-
lina, then  west  of the Appalachian Mountains  to  New York.  It has  been  widely
introduced outside this range throughout  North America.

White crappie  are  most numerous  in  base-level  low gradient  rivers  preferring
low velocity areas  commonly fou.nd in pools,  overflow areas,  and backwaters  of
rivers. In these areas, cover is  important for providing resting  areas  and pro-
tection from predation. Cover also provides  habitat  for insects  and small for-
age  fish,  which are  important  food  for the  crappie.   In  addition, cover  is
important during reproduction  as  the  male white crappie constructs  and  guards
nests over a variety of substrates almost  always near vegetation  or around sub-
merged objects.

In summary, riffles and substrate composition  are  for the most  part insignifi-
cant to the white  crappie.  However,  pools are  important for  resting,  feeding,
spawning and providing protection from predation.

Channel Catfish (Ictalurus punctatus)

The native  range of channel catfish  extends from  the southern portions  of the
Canadian prairie provinces  south to the  Gulf  States, west  to the  Rocky Moun-
tains, and east to  the Appalachian Mountains.  They have been  widely introduced
outside this  range and occur  in essentially  all  of the Pacific  and  Atlantic
drainages in the 48 contiguous states.

Optimum riverine habitat  for the channel  catfish  is  characterized  by  a  diver-
sity  of  velocities,  depths and  structural   features that  provide cover  and
food.  Low  velocity  (<15  cm/sec) areas of  deep pools  and  littoral areas  and
backwaters  of  rivers with  greater  than  40  percent  suitable  cover  are  desir-
able. Riffle and run  areas  with  rubble  substrate,  pools, and  areas with  debris
and aquatic vegetation are  conditions associated with high  production  of aqua-
tic insects consumed  by  channel  catfish.  A  riverine  habitat  with  40-60% pools
would be optimum  for providing riffle habitat  for  food production and feeding
and pool habitat for spawning and resting cover.

Adult  channel  catfish in  rivers are found  in large,  deep pools  with  cover.
They  move to  riffles and  runs  at  night to feed.  Catfish fry  have  strong
shelter-seeking tendencies  and  cover availability is important  in determining
habitat suitability.  However,  dense aquatic  vegetation  generally does  not pro-
vide  optimum  cover  because predation  on- fry  by centrarchids  is  high  under
these conditions.

Dark  and  secluded  areas  are required for nesting. Males build and guard nests
in cavities, burrows, under rocks and in other protected sites.
                                    II-3-10

-------
In summary, the presence of riffles and pools are equally important to the suc-
cessful  propagation  of  channel  catfish,  with  riffles  providing a  suitable
habitat  for  food production  and  feeding and  with pools providing  a  suitable
habitat  for  spawning  and resting. Additionally,  channel  catfish  appear  to  be
relatively insensitive to variations in the substrate type.

Cutthroat Trout (Salmo clarki)

Cutthroat  trout  are  a  polytypic  species consisting of  several  geographically
distinct forms with a broad distribution and a  great  amount  of  genetic diver-
sity.

Optimal  cutthroat  trout  riverine  habitat  is  characterized by  clear,  cold
water;  a  silt  free rocky substrate  in riffle-run  areas; an  approximately  1:1
pool/riffle ratio with  areas  of slow,  deep water;  well  vegetated stream banks;
abundant instream cover; and  relatively  stable water  flow,  temperature regimes
and stream banks. A 1:1  ratio (40-60%  pools)  of  pool  to riffle area appears  to
provide an optimal mix of trout food producing and rearing areas.

Cover is recognized as  one  of the essential  components  of trout  streams. Cover
is  provided  by  overhanging  vegetation; submerged  vegetation,  undercut  banks
and  instream  objects. The  main  use of  this cover  is  predator avoidance  and
resting.

Conditions for  spawning require  a gravel  substrate with _<  5%  fines. Greater
than  30%  fines will  result  in a low  survival  rate  of  embryos.  Optimal  sub-
strate  size  averages  1.5 - 6.0 cm in  diameter;  however, gravel size  as small
as 0.3 cm in diameter  is suitable  for incubation.

Black Crappie (Pomoxis nigromaculatus)

The  black  crappie  is  native  to  freshwater  lakes  and  streams from the Great
Lakes south to  the Gulf of Mexico and the southern Atlantic  States,  north  to
North Dakota and eastern Montana and east to  the Appalachians.

Black crappie  are common  in  base or  low  gradient streams  of  low velocities,
preferring quiet, sluggish  rivers with  a high  percentage  of pools, backwaters,
and cut-off  areas.  Black crappie  prefer  clear water and grow faster  in areas
of low turbidity.

Abundant cover,  particularly  in  the form  of aquatic vegetation,  Is  necessary
for growth and  reproduction.  Common  daytime  habitat is  shallow  water  in dense
vegetation and around  submerged trees,  brush  or other objects.

Conclusions

In conclusion, a  review of  the substratum and its  effects  on benthic  inverte-
brates  and  fishes  reveals  that the  invertebrates  are dependent on  a  suitable
substrata  for growth, successful  reproduction, and  maintenance,  and the fishes
are dependent on a  suitable substrata  primarily  only  during breeding.  With  the
                                    II-3-11

-------
proper substrata, an  adequate  supply  of benthic invertebrates  is  available as
food for the fishes.

Similarly,  it  is  the proper balance  between  pools and  riffles  (approximately
1:1 ratio) that will  insure  an  abundant  food  supply  for both invertebrates and
fishes, the  existence  of  the proper habitat  for reproduction  of  both inverte-
brates  and  fishes,   and  adequate cover  for  resting  and protection  from  pre-
dation.
                                     II-3-12

-------
                                  CHAPTER  11-4

                          CHANNEL  CHARACTERISTICS  AND
                           EFFECTS OF  CHANNELIZATION
INTRODUCTION

Channelization can  be  defined as modification  of  a stream system -  including
the stream  channel,  stream bank, and  nearstream  riparian  areas  - in order to
increase the  rate  of  drainage  from  the land  and conveyance of  water down-
stream. Simpson et al.  (1982)  listed the common  methods  of  channelization as:

  1.  Clearing  and Snagging.   Removal  of obstructions  from  the  streambed  and
      banks to increase the capacity  of  a  system to convey water. Such oper-
      ations include removal of  bedload  material,  debris,  pilings, head walls,
      or other manmade  materials.

  2.  Rip-rapping. Placement  of  rock  or  other  material in  critical  areas to
      minimize erosion.

  3.  Widening. Increase of channel  width to improve the  conveyance of water
      and increase the  capacity of  the system.

  4.  Deepening.  Excavation of  the  channel  bottom to  a lower elevation so as
      to increase  the capacity to convey water or  to promote  drainage  or lower-
      ing of the water  table,  or to enhance  navigation.

  5.  Realignment. Construction of  a new channel or straightening of  a channel
      to increase  the capacity to convey water.

  6.  Lining.  Placement of a  nonvegetative  lining  on  a  portion of a  channel to
      minimize erosion or  increase the capacity of a stream to convey or con-
      serve water.

Channelization projects  are classified according  to their  magnitude  as either
short-reach or  long-reach.  Short-reach channelization  is associated with road
and bridge  construction  and may  entail 0.5 km of  stream length within the  vi-
cinity  of  the  crossing. Although   short-reach  projects may  adversely  affect
stream biota,  they  should  not  produce significant long-term impacts with pro-
per mitigation  (Bulkley  et al.  1976).  The  comments in  this chapter  generally
refer to the  effects of long-reach  channelization;  those  impacts are greater
in  duration,  dimension,  and  severity.  Simpson  et  al.  (1982)  listed the pur-
poses of (long-reach) channelization as:

  1.  Local flood  control  to   prevent  damage to  homes,  industrial  areas,   and
      farms  on the  flood  plain  by increased stream  conveyance  of  water past
      the protected areas;
                                    II-4-1

-------
  2.  Increase  of  arable  land for agriculture by channel  straightening,  deep-
      ening,  and widening to  remove  meanders,  increase channel  capacity,  and
      lower the  channel bed.  Straightening  reduces  the stream  area  and  length
      of bordering  lands,  increases  land area at  cutoffs, and  increases  flow
      velocity.  Deepening and  widening  increases channel capacity and improves
      drainage from adjacent lands;

  3.  Increased navigability  of waterborne commerce and recreational  boating,
      usually performed in large streams; and

  4.  Restoration  of hydraulic  efficiency  of  streams  following  unusually  se-
      vere storms.

In the  interest  of  such goals,  several  thousand  miles  of streams in  the  United
States  have  been altered  over the past  150 years  (Simpson et  al. 1982).  How-
ever,  in  achieving  these goals,  detrimental  effects  are often incurred  on
water quality and stream  biota. This  chapter addresses the effects of channel-
ization on stream characteristics and the associated  biological  impacts.

CHARACTERISTICS OF  THE STREAM  SYSTEM

Stream Depth and Width

The depth and  width of  a  stream are usually made uniform  (generally  by  widen-
ing and deepening)  by stream  channelization  in order to  increase the hydraulic
efficiency  of  the  system.  This  practice  results  in  a monotony of  habitats
throughout the  modified reach.  Gorman  and Karr  (1978)  demonstrated  the  direct
relationship that  exists  between  habitat  diversity  (considering depth,  sub-
strate, and  velocity)  and fish species  diversity.  Alteration of stream  depth
involves the  disturbance  and  removal  of natural bottom materials.  Increasing
stream  depth can lower the water  table  of  the area.  Probably the most  signi-
ficant  impact  of depth modification  is  the disruption of   the  run-riffle-pool
sequence  (See  Chapter II-3:  Pools,  Riffles,  and Substrate Composition).  Wid-
ening a stream increases  the surface  area and often  involves removal  of stream-
side vegetation. These practices  increase the  amount  of light  received  by  the
water column and can  lead to  changes  in  the productivity and  trophic regime of
the system.  Increasing and  regularizing  stream width  also   may  reduce  the  pro-
portion of bank/water interface, which constitutes important wildlife habitat.

Stream Length

Stream  channelization  usually  involves  realignment  of the stream channel  in
order to convey water more quickly out  of the  modified  reach. By straightening
a stream its overall  length is  decreased. Channelized  streams have been  short-
ened an average  of  45 percent (ranging from 8 to 95 percent) in  Iowa  (Bulkley
1975)  and  approximately   31  percent  in  Southcentral Oklahoma  (Barclay  1980).
Shortening the  linear distance between  two points  with a constant  change  in
elevation  increases the  slope or gradient of  the  stream,  causing a  corre-
sponding increase in  current  velocity.  Reducing  the  time  required for a  given
parcel of water  to  flow through a  stream segment may lower the  capacity  of  the
                                    II-4-2

-------
stream  to  assimilate  wastes  and  increase  the organic  loading  on  downstream
reaches.

The  obvious  effect  of reducing  stream  length is  the  loss  of  living  space.
Stream   segments   that  are  isolated  by   channelization   eventually   become
eutrophic and  fill  with sediment  (Winger  et al.  1976), and their  function  is
severely  impaired.   In  these   eutrophic   habitats,   normal   stream  benthos,
especially mayflies,   stoneflies,  caddisflies,  and  hellgramites, are  replaced
by tolerant chironomids and oligochaetes (Hynes 1970).

In  addition  to the  loss  of total  living  space,  the amount  of  valuable  edge
habitat  is  decreased  by  stream  straightening. Fish are habitat  specialists
(Karr  and  Schlosser 1977)  and  are not  found  uniformly  distributed  throughout
the  water  column.  Most  fish and macroinvertebrate  species  utilize cover  in
lotic systems, much of which is  associated with the  sloping stream bank.

Channel Configuration

A  stream is  straightened  by cutting  a  linear  channel  that  eliminates  natural
bends  (meanders)  from the  main course  of  flow. Sinuosity is a  measure  of  the
degree  of  meandering  by  a  stream and  is  measured  as the  ratio  of  channel
length  to  linear  length or down-valley  distance  (Leopold et al.  1964).  Sinu-
osity index values  may  range from 1.0 for  a straight  conduit  to as  high  as  3.5
for  mature,  winding  rivers  (Simpson et  al.  1982).  A high gradient  mountain
stream  may have a  sinuosity index of  1.1,  while a  value of 1.5  or greater jus-
tifies  designation as a meandering stream (Leopold  et  al. 1964).

Channelization  (straightening)   decreases   sinuosity. Reducing  sinuosity  de-
creases  the total  amount  of habitat  available to  biota as well  as  the  amount
of  effective  and  unique habitat. Zimmer and  Bachman (1976,  1978)  found  that
habitat  diversity was  directly  related  to the  degree of  meandering  in  natural
and  channelized streams  in  Iowa,  and that  as  sinuosity  increased the  biomass
and number of organisms in  the  macroinvertebrate drift increased. Drift  of  ben-
thic invertebrates is a major food source of fish.

The S-shaped  meanders  commonly  observed in  streams serve as a  natural  system
of dissipating the  kinetic energy produced  by  water moving  downstream  (Leopold
and Langbein  1966).  When a  stream is straightened  the  energy is expended  more
rapidly, resulting in increased  scour during high-flow periods.

Bedform

Bedform, or vertical sinuosity, is a  measure of riffle-pool  periodicity  and  is
expressed in  terms  of the average distance between  pools measured  in  average
stream widths for the  section (Leopold  et  al.  1964).  Leopold  et al.  (1964)  re-
ported  that  natural streams have a   riffle-pool periodicity  of five to  seven
stream  widths.  This  is  variable, however,  and is dependent  on gradient  and
geology  (as   is  horizontal  sinuosity).  Channelization  eliminates  or  reduces
                                    II-4-3

-------
 riffle-pool  periodicity  (Huggins  and  Moss 1975,  Lund 1976, Winger et  al.  1976,
 Bulkley et al. 1976. Griswold et  al.  1978).

 Disruption of the  run-riffle-pool sequence has detrimental consequences  on mac-
 roinvertebrate  and fish  populations. Creating  a homogeneous  bedform  drasti-
 cally  reduces  habitat  diversity  and  leads  to shifts  in  species composition.
 Griswold  et  al.   (1978)  concluded  that  riffle   species  (heptageniids,  hydro-
 sychid,  elmids)  in  macroinvertebrate communities  are  replaced  by  slow water
 forms  (chironomids and tubifictds) after channelization  of  warmwater streams.
 Riffles  are  commonly  considered to be the  most  productive areas in the stream
 in  terms  of  macroinvertebrate  density  and diversity.  Also,  the benthic fauna
 adapted  to  riffles are highly  desirable fish food  species.  Pools can  support
 an  abundant  benthic  fauna, but pool-adapted  forms  are  not as heavily utilized
 by  fish.  Habitat  diversity provided  by  the  run-riffle-pool  sequence also con-
 tributes  greatly to species richness  in the fish  community.

 Velocity  and Discharge

 Stream velocity is a  function  of  stream gradient  and channel  roughness. Rough-
 ness is a measure  of  the  irregularity in a drainage channel,  which will reduce
 water  velocity,  and  is affected  by  sinuosity, substrate  size,  instream vege-
 tation, and other  obstructions  (Karr and Schlosser 1977).

 Discharge or  flow  (Q) is  the  volume  of  water moving past a  location  per unit
 time, and is related to velocity as follows:


                                     Q = VA


where  Q  = discharge (ft /s)
       V  = velocity (ft/s)         ~
       A  = cross-sectional area (ft ).

By  increasing the  slope and  reducing  roughness,  channelization  often increases
water velocity (King and  Carlander  1976,  Simpson  et  al. 1982);  however, if the
 cross-sectional  area  of  the channel  is  sufficiently enlarged by  widening and
 deepening, the average velocity may  be  unchanged or decrease  (Bulkley  et al.
 1976, Griswold et  al.  1978).  In either case,  the  velocity is  usually made uni-
 form by channelization.

The concept  of unit stream power has been developed to predict the rate of sed-
 iment transfer in  streams. Unit  stream  power (DSP)  is  defined  as the  rate  of
potential energy expenditure  per  unit weight  of  water  in a  channel  (Karr and
Schlosser 1977)  and can be calculated by the following equation   (Yang 1972):

                                   dY    dX dY
                                    II-4-4

-------
where  t = time  (s)
       V = average stream velocity  (ft/s)
       S = slope or gradient of the channel  fft/100 ft)
       Y  = elevation  above  a  given  point  and is equivalent  to  the potential
           energy  per unit weight  of water  (i.e.,  foot-pounds of  energy  per
           pound of water)
       X = longitudinal distance

      USP  =  unit  stream  power,  (foot-pounds of energy per  pound  of water per
           second)

The USP  is a  measure  of  the  amount of energy available for sediment transport;
however, a stream  may  carry  less  than the maximum load depending on the avail-
ability  of sediment  due  to  such  factors   as  bank  stability,  substrate  sta-
bility, vegetative cover, and surface erosion.

The effect of  channelization on  discharge is seasonally variable.  During rainy
periods a natural  stream  tends to overflow  its banks,  inundating adjacent low-
lying  areas.  This  flood water  is temporarily stored  and  slowly  percolates  to
the water table. Natural  storage  dampens  runoff  surges. Also, the roughness  of
natural  streams  slows conveyance,  lengthening the time of energy  dissipation.
A variety of channelization practices designed to increase drainage and hydrau-
lic efficiency  (e.g.,  straightening, removal  of  channel  obstructions,  removal
of instream and streamside vegetation, berming and leveeing) result in a sharp-
er flow  hydrograph  and a shorter  flow  period  following rainfall  events (Huish
and Pardue  1978).  The hypothetical  hydrographs  shown   in  Figure  II-4-1 illus-
trate  the  hydrologic/hydraulic  effects  of  channelization.  Channelization  is
designed to rapidly  convey water off the land  and  downstream through the con-
duit.  Properly-functioning  channelized  streams  amplify  the  impact   of  high
flows. Increased flow  velocity, discharge,  and  unit  stream power  result in ac-
centuated  scour,  erosion,  bank   cutting,  sediment  transport,  and  hydraulic
loading  (flooding);   especially   below  channelized  segments. Because  of  in-
creased  hydraulic  efficiency,  channelized  streams  return  to  base  flow levels
following rainfall more  rapidly  than natural streams  (see  Figure  II-4-1),  and
can  reduce  water  availability  by  lowering  the water  table. Griswold  et  al.
(1978) concluded  that  in small,  well-drained,  agricultural  watersheds  channel
alterations can  lead to complete  dewatering  of  long  sections  of  the stream bed
during drought  conditions. Simpson et  al.  (1982)  summarized  the  seasonal  im-
pacts  of  channelization  as causing lower than  natural base  flows  and higher
than normal  high flows.

Instream vegetation can be reduced,  eliminated,  or  prevented  from  reestablish-
ment  by high  stream velocity.

Current velocity has  been  cited  as one of  the most  significant  factors in de-
termining the  composition  of  stream benthic communities (Cummins  1975).  Hynes
(1970) suggested that many macroinvertebrates are associated with  specific vel-
ocities because  of  their  method  of feeding  and  respiration.  Macroinvertebrate
                                    II-4-5

-------
                              Time

                       NATURAL  STREAM
            o
                                       natural stream
                               i ime
                   CHANNELIZED STREAM
Figure II-4-1.
Generalized hydrographs of natural and channelized streams
following a rainfall event or season (modified from Simpson
et al.  1982).
                                II-4-6

-------
 drift  has been found  to  increase as discharge  decreases  (Minshall  and Winger
 1968)  and as velocity  increases  (Walton 1977, Zimmer 1977).

 By  altering  stream velocity, discharge,  and  unit  stream power, channelization
 modifies  the  natural  substrate.  Disruption  of the  streambed may produce shift-
 ing  substrates that  are  unstable  habitats  for rnacroinvertebrates.  Scour and
 erosion due to high  velocity increases  stream turbidity and leads to siltation
 of  downstream  reaches. High turbidity can damage macroinvertebrate populations
 via  abrasive  action  on fragile  species  (Hynes  1970)  and clogging the gills of
 species without protective  coverings  (Cairns et al. 1971).

 High turbidity and velocity in  conjunction  with a  lack of cover is detrimental
 to  fish.  Usually,  a  very  high concentration  of sediment is required to direct-
 ly  kill adult  fish by  clogging  the opercular cavity and gill  filaments (Wallen
 1951),  but  detrimental behavioral effects occur at much  lower  levels (Swenson
 et  al. 1976).  Turbid  waters  can also  hinder the capture  of  prey  by  sight-
 feeders.  An obvious  impact  of channelization  is the loss of habitat due to re-
 duced  flow  and dessication during drought conditions.  Productive  riffle  areas
 can  be exposed by  low  flows, thereby directly affecting the benthos and reduc-
 ing  the  food  supply  of  fish.  Low dissolved  oxygen  levels during  summer low
 flows  can eliminate  rnacroinvertebrates  with  high  oxygen  requirements  (Hynes
 1970),  and can affect  emergence  (Nebeker  1971),  drift  (Lavandier  and Caplancef
 1975),  and  feeding and  growth   (Cummins  1974).The  effects of  reduced  flow on
 fish  include  a degraded  food  source,  and interference with  spawning.  Concen-
 trating fish  into  a  greatly  reduced  volume can  lead  to increased competition,
 predation, and disease.

 Bulkley et al.  (1976)  found that gradient was a major factor affecting the dis-
 tribution  of   fishes.  Thus,  modifications  in  gradient  by channelization  can
 drastically alter the  species composition of a fish community.

 Substrate

 The  stream  substrate  is  ultimately  a product  of  climatic conditions  and the
 underlying geology  of  the  watershed.  It is  specifically  affected  by  factors
 such as gradient,  weathering,  erosion,  sedimentation,  biological  activity, and
 land use.  Channelization  generally  alters  the substrate  characteristics  of  a
 stream; more  often  than not,  average  substrate particle  size  is reduced
 (Etnier 1972,   King 1973, Griswold et  al.  1978).

The substrate  of a stream is  one of  the  most  important factors  controlling the
 distribution and  abundance  of  aquatic  macroinvertebrates  (Cummins  and  Lauff
 1969,  Minshall  and Minshall  1977,  Williams  and Mundie 1978),  and  therefore,
 the impact of  channelization  on  benthic  communities is  directly related to the
 degree to which the substrate  is  affected. Siltation  is especially  detrimental
 to the benthos and can cause the following impacts:
                                    II-4-7

-------
  1.  Decreased  habitat  diversity  due  to  filling   of   interstitial   spaces
      (Simpson et al. 1982)

  2.  Decreased standing crop (Tebo 1955)

  3.  Decreased density (Gammon 1970)

  4.  Decreased number of taxa (Simpson et al.  1982),

  5.  Decreased reproductive success by affecting  eggs  (Chutter  1969)

  6.  Decreased productivity (King and Ball  1967)

  7.  Species  shifts  from valuable  species  to burrowing  insects  and  oligo-
      chaetes (Morris et al. 1968)

Generally, the impact of channelization  via substrate  disruption  is more  sign-
ificant in high gradient headwater  streams  (where coarse  substrates are  essen-
tial  for  protection  from   a  strong  current)  than  in  low gradient  warmwater
streams. Little  or  no change  in  benthic communities  has  been observed  in  the
latter  stream type following channelization  (Wolf et  al. 1972,  King  and
Carlander 1975,  Possardt  1976),   at  least partially because  the natural  sub-
strate  of  these  ecosystems  was   not  drastically  altered  by  channelization.
Shifting substrates  are  often a   consequence of  channelizing  streams. The  ab-
sence of a stable habitat  leads to reductions  in  macroinvertebrate  populations
(Arner et al.  1976).  In  some streams where channelization  has  not  permanently
disturbed the substrate,  rapid recoveries (within  one year)  in the benthic  com-
munity  have  been observed  (Meehan 1971,  Possardt  et   al.  1976,  King  and
Carlander 1976, Whitaker  et al.   1979);  however,  recovery of macrobenthos  can
be very slow (Arner et al.  1976).

Changes in macroinvertebrate populations  affect the fish  community  through  the
food chain. Substrate  composition  is  also important to fish  reproduction.  For
example: trout and  salmon  require a specific  size of  gravel  in which to  build
redds and  spawn;  pikes broadcast   eggs  over  aquatic vegetation  *vhich  requires
silt and mud to grow;  sculpins require  a slate-type substrate under which  they
deposit adhesive  eggs; and  catfish prefer natural  cavities  for  reproduction
(Pflieger 1975).  Siltation  can decrease reproductive  success by  smothering  or
suffocating  eggs,  Channelization   can  also  affect  fish adversely by  reducing
substrate heterogeneity,  thereby decreasing  habitat  diversity.

Cover

Cover is anything that provides real  or  behavioral  protection for an  organism.
It  can  allow escape  from  predators, alleviate the need  to  expend energy  to
maintain a position  in  the current, or  provide a place to  hide  from  potential
prey or to  just  be out of  sight.  Cover includes  rocks,   logs,  brush,  instream
and  overhanging   vegetation,  snags,  roots,  undercut   banks,  crevices,  inter-
stices, riffles,  backwaters,  pools,  and shadows.  Channelization  generally  de-
creases the amount of cover  in a  stream.  Practices  such as  modification  of  the
                                    II-4-8

-------
streambed  (usually  into  a  uniform trapezoidal  shape),  snagging  and clearing,
and vegetation  removal  decrease  the  total  amount  and variety of cover, and re-
duce habitat c
Cover  such as  logs,  stumps,  and  snags  provide valuable  stable  substrate for
macroinvertebrates  - especially  in  streams  with  a  shifting  substratum.  In-
stream  vegetation  serves  macroinvertebrates  as a  substrate  for  attachment,
emergence,  and  egg  deposition.  Instream obstructions  accumulate leaves, twigs,
and other  detritus.  This coarse  particulate  organic matter (CPOM) is used as a
food  source by  detritivorous  invertebrates  (shredders). Retention  of  CPOM re-
duces the  organic loading on downstream reaches  (Marzolf 1978).

Both  fish  and  aquatic macroinvertebrates  use  cover  for  predator  avoidance,
resting,  and  concealment.  Simpson  et  al.  (1982) stated that  cover  can be re-
garded as  a behavioral  habitat  requirement  for many fish species, and that re-
moval of cover adversely affects fish populations.

Inundat i on  and Desiccati on

The modified  hydroperiod typical  of channelized streams (illustrated in Figure
II-4-1) often causes  downstream reaches to flood more  frequently  and  more in-
tensely,  altering floodplain  soils and vegetation,  and damaging  land values
and personal property.

By  augmenting  land drainage and hydraulic efficiency,  channelization  has also
led to  summer drying of streams and  desiccation of adjacent  and  upstream land
areas. Nearstream riparian  areas  provide a number  of  valuable functions  which
are often  disrupted  by channelization. Wetlands assimilate  nutrients  and trap
sediment  from  runoff  and   stream  overflow,   thereby  acting  as  natural  puri-
fication  systems  (Karr  and Schlosser  1977,  Brown et al.  1979).  Rapid convey-
ance  and  accumulation of  nutrients has led  to eutrophication problems  down-
stream  (Montalbano  et al.  1979).  Natural  fertilization  of the  floodplain  is
prevented  by  restricting  flow  to  the  channel.  In  natural  systems,  detritus
entering  the  stream  from backwaters  constitutes an important  food  source  for
benthic invertebrates  (Wharton and  Brinson  1977). Likewise,  riparian areas are
often  rich  sources  of macroinvertebrates  (Wharton  and  Brinson 1977)  that  can
become available  to  stream  fish during  floods or serve  as  an epicenter for re-
populating  stream benthos. Some  fish  (e.g.,  Esocidae, the  pike family)  use
swampy areas that are seasonally  connected to a stream  as  spawning  and nursery
habitat. Loss  of wetlands  due  to dewatering precludes these functions.

When wetland  areas  are drained they  become  available for other  types  of land
use such as agriculture or  development.  Conversion  of wetlands to pastures and
cropland  has  frequently occurred  following   channelization.  Relative   to  wet-
lands,  agricultural  land  uses  accentuate  runoff,   sedimentation,  nutrient  en-
richment  (from  fertilizers  and  animal  waste),  and  toxicant leaching  (from
pesticides).

The response of the  benthic community  to nutrient enrichment  (i.e.,  from  agri-
cultural  runoff)  generally involves  the demise of intolerant,  "clean-water"
                                    II-4-9

-------
taxa  and  an  increase in numbers and  biomass  of  forms  that  are tolerant of or-
ganic  pollution  and low dissolved oxygen; a  decrease  in species diversity of-
ten occurs as well.

Land  use  changes  can increase  the  load of toxic chemicals reaching the stream.
Agricultural and  urban  runoff  contribute  a  variety  of  toxicants. Saltwater in-
trusion may  become a problem following drainage of  coastal  wetlands. (Although
sodium  chloride  is generally not considered  a  toxic chemical  it can be lethal
to  freshwater  organisms.)  Potential   impacts include  lethal  and  chronic  ef-
fects,  biomagnification (via bioaccumulation  and bioconcentration), and contam-
ination of human  food and recreational resources.

The impact of  draining  and dewatering riparian  areas  on terrestrial  organisms
is  extensive.  Vegetation   (including  bottomland  hardwoods)  tends  to  undergo  a
shift  from  water-tolerant  to  water-intolerant  forms  (i.e.,  hydric >  mesic  >
xeric)  (Fredrickson 1979,  Maki  et  al. 1980,  Barclay  1980),  These vegetative
changes along with land use changes  and  land drainage commonly  cause the fol-
lowing  impacts on terrestrial fauna:

                        loss of habitat
                        loss of cover
                        loss of food sources
                        species composition changes
                        reduced diversity, density,  and productivity
                        increased susceptibility to  predation
                        increased exposure to toxic  chemicals.

Streamside Vegetation

Channelization may  impact  streamside   vegetation indirectly  through changes  in
drainage  as  described above  or  directly  by  the  clearing of  stream  banks  and
the deposition of dredge spoils.  Clearing, dredging, and spoil deposition typi-
cally  result in  reduced species diversity  and  vertical   and  horizontal  struc-
tural   diversity  of  streamside vegetation.  Tree removal  is  performed  in  many
channelization projects  (Fredrickson 1979, Barclay  1980). Removal of woody spe-
cies  eliminates  wildlife  habitat,  mast   production, canopy  cover,  and  shade.
Other detrimental impacts  of channelization on vegetation include dieback,  sun-
scald,  undercutting,  and windthrow  (Simpson  et  al.  1982). Spoils  deposited  on
the streambank from channel  cutting,  dredging,  and  berming  generally make  in-
fertile,  sandy  soils that  are  easily  eroded.  Subsequent channel  maintenance
procedures hinder  ecological  succession and  delay  recovery of the  stream  sys-
tem.

Interception of  rainfall by  the  vegetative canopy  lessens the impact of rain-
drops on  the soil,  and bank  stability is enhanced  by  the  binding of  soil  by
plant  roots. Loss  of these  functions permits  the rate of  erosion and  the
stream sediment  load to  increase.
                                    II-4-10

-------
Removal  of vegetation that  shades  the stream increases  the  intensity of sun-
light  reaching the water  column.  A  resultant  increase  in the  rate  of photo-
synthesis  causes  changes in the  natural  pathways of  energy  flow and nutrient
cycling  (i.e., trophic  structure).   Increased primary  production can  lead  to
amplification  of   the  diurnal   variation  in  pH   and  dissolved  oxygen  concen-
tration  following  channelization  (0'Rear 1975, Huish  and  Pardue 1978, Parrish
et  al.  1978).  Increasing the incident sunlight  raises water temperature.  High-
er  temperatures  increase the  rates of chemical   reactions  and  biological  pro-
cesses,  decrease oxygen  solubility, and  can exceed the physiological  tolerance
limits  of  some macroinvertebrates  and fish  -  most  notably trout  (Schmal  and
Sanders  1978,  Parrish et al. 1978).

In  natural  stream  systems,  allochthonous input of organic  matter from stream-
side  vegetation  constitutes  the  major  energy  source   in low-order  streams
(Cummins 1974). A  functional group of benthic organisms  called shredders uses
allochthonously-derived detritus  (CPOM)  as  a food source,  and  process  it into
fine particulate organic matter  (FPOM) which  is  utilized  by another functional
group,  the collectors.  Removing streamside vegetation greatly  reduces  the  in-
put of  allochthonous  detritus  and allows primary  productivity  to increase  be-
cause  of greater  light  availability. These  factors  bring about a decline  in
shredder populations  and  an increase  in herbivorous  grazers which  take advan-
tage of increasing algae abundance.  In  headwater areas,   species  diversity  is
iikely  to   decrease  due to the  loss of detritivorous  taxa,   and  macroinver-
tebrate  density may  decline because the swift current of  those reaches  is  not
conducive  to planktonic and some  periphytic algae forms.  Loss  of allochthonous
material has less  impact  on intermediate-order streams because  they  are  natu-
rally  autotrophic  (P/R>1),  except  that channelization of  upstream  reaches  re-
duces  the  amount  of FPOM that  is  received via nutrient  spiraling. The  liter-
ature  contains excellent   discussions  of   energy and materials transport  in
streams  (Cummins et  al. 1973,  Cummins  1974,  Cummins  1975, Marzolf 1978,  Van-
note et  al. 1980).

Reductions  and changes  in  the macroinvertebrate  community  affect  the  food
source  of  fishes.  Changing   availabilities  of  detritus and algae may  skew  the
fish  community with respect  to  trophic  levels that utilize  those energy
sources. Clearing away nearstream vegetation  also reduces  the  input of terres-
trial  insects that  are eaten by fish.

In  addition, streamside vegetation provides cover in  the  form  of shadows, root
masses,  limbs,  and trees which  fall  into  the  stream.  Most game  fish  species
prefer shaded habitats near  the streambank.

SUMMARY

The benefits realized  by  channelizing a  stream  are  often obtained at  the  ex-
pense of such impacts as:
                                    II-4-11

-------
  1.  Increased downstream flooding
  2.  Reduction of groundwater levels and stream dewatering
  3.  Increased bank erosion, turbidity, and sedimentation
  4.  Degradation of water quality
  5.  Promotion of wetland drainage and woodland destruction
  6.  Promotion   of   land   development   (agricultural,    urban,   residential,
      industrial)
  7.  Loss of habitat and reduced habitat diversity
  8.  Adverse  effects  on  aquatic and  terrestrial communities  (productivity,
      diversity, species composition)
  9   Lowered recreational  values

The  time  required for  a  natural stream to  return to a  productive,  visually-
appealing body  of water is  highly variable. Natural  recovery  of  some channel-
ized streams requires  better than 30 years. Restoration  of  the  stream channel
and biota can be accelerated by mitigation  practices.

The potential negative  impacts and time  frame  of  recovery should  weigh heavily
in the evaluation of any newly-proposed channelization project.
                                    II-4-12

-------
                                  CHAPTER  Il-o

                                  TEMPERATURE


Temperature  exerts   an  important  influence on  the  chemical  and  biological
processes in a water body.  It  determines  the distribution of aquatic species;
controls  spawning   and   hatching;   regulates   activity;  and  stimulates  or
suppresses growth  and development.  The two most important  causes of temper-
ature  change  in  a  water  body are  process  and  cooling  water discharges, and
solar  radiation. The consequences of temperature variation  caused by thermal
discharges (thermal  pollution)  continue  to receive considerable attention. An
excellent review on  this  subject may be  found  in  the Thermal Effects section
of the  annual  literature review  issue  of the Journal  of  the Water Pollution
Control Federation.  Discussion in this  chapter  is  limited to the  influence of
seasonal temperature variation  on a  water  body.

PHYSICAL EFFECTS

Annual  climatological cycles and precipitation  patterns are controlled  by the
annual cycle of solar radiation. Specific patterns of temperature  and precipi-
tation, which vary  geographically,  determine annual  patterns  of flow to  lakes
and  streams. In  general,  winter precipitation in  northern  latitudes does not
reach a  body of  water until  the spring snow melt. For this reason,  streamflow
may  be  quite  low in  the  winter  but increase rapidly in  the  spring. Low flow
typically occurs  in the  summer  throughout  North America.

Changes in season cause changes  in water  temperature  in  lakes and  streams. The
patterns  of  temperature  change  in  lakes  are  well   understood.  Briefly,  many
lakes  tend  to  stratify  in  the  summer,  with  a  warm  upper   layer  (the
epilimnion),  a  cold  bottom  layer  (the hypolimnion)  and a  sharp   temperature
difference between  the  two,  known  as  the thermocline.   The depth  of the
thermocline is determined to  large  extent  by the  depth to  which  solar radia-
tion  penetrates  the  water body.  The  epilimnion tends  to  be  well   oxygenated,
through both algal  photosynthesis,  and  through  oxygen transfer  from the  atmo-
sphere. Surface wind  shear forces help  mix the epilimnion and keep  it oxygen-
ated. The  thermocline presents  a physical  barrier,  in  a sense, to mixing be-
tween the epilimnion  and  the  hypolimnion. If  no photosynthesis  takes place in
the  hypolimnion,  due to  diminished  solar  radiation, and  if  there  is  no ex-
change with the  epilimnion,  dissolved oxygen levels  (DO)  in  the  bottom  layer
may  drop to critical  levels,  or  below. Often water released through  the bottom
of a dam has  no dissolved  oxygen,   and  may severely jeopardize  aquatic  life
downstream of the impoundment.

Typical summer and  annual lake temperature profiles  are  presented in Figures
II-5-I  and  II-5-2,   respectively. In  the  fall  the thermocline  disappears and
the  lake  undergoes  turnover  and  becomes  well  mixed. The temperature becomes
fairly  homogeneous  in the winter  (Figure II-5-2),  there is  another wind in-
duced turnover in  the spring and the cycle ends  with the development of epi-
limnion, hypolimnion and thermocline in  the  summer.
                                    II-5-1

-------
                         TEMPERATURE °C

                     6   8   10   12	 14   16   18   20   22
Figure II-5-1,
Summer Temperature Conditions  in  a Typical
(Hypothetical) Temperate-Region  Lake.
         MARCH APRIL1 MAY I J'JNI I  HJLY i AUG. ' SEPT '  or.T  ' NOV. '
 Figure 11-5-2.  The Seasonal  Cycle  of Temperature and Oxygen
                 Conditions  in Lake  Mendota, Wisconsin, 1906,
                 (Reid and Wood).
                         II-5-2

-------
Rivers and  streams  generally  show  a  much more homogeneous temperature profile,
largely  because  turbulent stream flow assures  good  vertical  mixing. Neverthe-
less,  small  streams may  undergo temperature  variation as  flow  passes  through
shaded or sunny  areas,  as  it is augmented by  cool  groundwater  or  warm agri-
cultural   or other surface  return flow,  or as it becomes more  turbid and cap-
tures  solar  radiation in  the  form of heat.
TEMPERATURE RELATED BIOLOGICAL EFFECTS

Warm  blooded  homeothermic  animals,  such as the mammals,  have  evolved a number
of  methods  by which to  control  body temperature.  Cold  blooded poikilothermic
animals, such as fish, have not evolved these mechanisms and are much more sus-
ceptible to variation in  temperature than  are  warm blooded  animals.  Perhaps
the most important  adaptation of fish to  temperature  variation is  seen in the
timing of reproductive behavior.

Gradual seasonal changes  in water  temperature  often trigger spawning, metamor-
phosis  and  migration.  The  eggs  of  some  freshwater organisms  must  be  chilled
before  they will  hatch properly.  The tolerable temperature range  for  fish  is
often more  restrictive during the  reproductive  period  than at  other times dur-
ing maturity.  The temperature  range tolerated by  many species may  be narrow
during very early development but increases somewhat during maturity. Reproduc-
tion  may be hindered significantly  by increased  temperature because this  func-
tion  takes  place  under restricted  temperature  ranges.  Spawning may  not  occur
at  all  when temperatures  are  too high. Thus, a fish population may  exist in a
heated area only because of continued immigration.

Because fish  are  cold-blooded,  temperature  is  important  in  determining  their
standard metabolic rate.  As temperature increases, all  standard metabolic  func-
tions  increase,  including  feeding  rates. Water  temperature  need  not  reach
lethal levels to eliminate a  species. Temperatures that favor competitors, pre-
dators, parasites and  disease can  destroy a species at  levels  far  below  those
that  are lethal.

Since body  temperature regulation  is not possible  in  fish,  any changes in am-
bient  temperature  are  immediately  communicated  to blood  circulating  in  the
gills and thereby to  the  rest of the fish.  The  increase  in temperature causes
an  increase in  metabolic  rates  and  the  feeding activity of the fish must in-
crease  to   satisfy the  requirements  of  these  elevated  levels. Elevated  bio-
chemical rates facilitate the transport  of toxic  pollutants  to  the  circulatory
system via  the gill structure, and  hasten  the  effect these toxicants might ex-
ert on the  fish. Increased temperature will also raise  the rate at which detox-
ification takes  place through  metabolic  assimilation,  or excretion.  Despite
these mechanisms of detoxification,  a rise in  temperature  increases  the lethal
effect  of  compounds  toxic  to fish. A  literature  review  on this subject  will
also be found in the JWPCF annual literature  review number.

The importance  of  temperature to  fish  may also be  seen  in Tables  II-5-1  and
II-5-2. The data  in  these tables were found in  references  by  Carlander (1969,
1972) and Brungs  and Jones (1977).  Table  II-5-1 shows the  preferred tempera-
ture  for  a  number of  fish and  Table II-5-2 shows  the range  of  temperatures
within which spawning may  occur in  several  species  of fish.


                                    II-5-3

-------
Preferred  temperatures  usually  are  determined  through  controlled  laboratory
experiments  although  some  values  published  in  the  literature are  based  on
field observations.  Determination  of final  temperature  preferenda of fish  in
the  field  is  difficult  because  field  environments  cannot   be  controlled  to
match laboratory  studies  (Cherry  and Cairns, 1982).   Temperature  preference
studies  are  based  on an acclimation  temperature which  is  used as a  reference
point against  which  to examine the 'response of  fish to different temperature
levels.  The  acclimation temperature  itself  is  critical  for  it.  affects  the
range of temperatures  within  which fish prefer to  live.   This may be seen  in
Figure  II-5-3  which  shows an  .increase in  preferred  temperature and  in  the
upper threshold of avoidance with  an  increase  in acclimation  temperature.   The
range between  the  acclimation  and  the upper avoidance temperatures  is species
specific and is dependent  on  the  acclimation temperature  in  which the  fish
were tested.   A  greater  variability  in  fish avoidance response is observed  in
winter than  in summer testing  conditions (Cherry  and Cairns,  1982).

Temperature  preference/avoidance studies  are important  to an  understanding  of
the  effect of  thermal  pollution on the  biota of a water body.  The  literature
on  temperature preference  will  be  important to the water  body survey in  two
ways:   when  the stream  reach  of  interest  is affected by thermal  pollution  or
when ambient  temperature patterns may  be a  contributing  factor  which deter-
mines the  types  of fish that   might  be  expected  to  inhabit a water  body  under
different management schemes identified  during  the  assessment.

Temperature  is also  important  because it  strongly  influences  self-purification
in  streams.  When a rise  in temperature  occurs in a  stream polluted  by organic
matter,  an  increased rate  of  utilization of  dissolved  oxygen by biochemical
processes  is accompanied by  a reduced  availability of  DO  due to the reduced
solubility of  gases at higher  temperatures.  Because  of this,  many  rivers  which
have adequate DO in the winter may  be devoid of DO  in the summer.

Bacteria and other microorganisms  which mediate  the breakdown of  organic  mat-
ter  in  streams are strongly influenced  by  temperature changes and  are more ac-
tive at  higher than  at  lower temperatures. The rate  of oxidation  of organic
matter  is  therefore  much  greater during  the summer than  during  the winter.
This means  self  purification  will be more rapid,  and the stream  will recover
from the effects of  organic pollution in  a  shorter  distance  during  the warmer
months  of the  year than  in the colder months of  the year,  provided there  is an
adequate supply of dissolved oxygen.

Temperature  is an  important regulator of  natural conditions.  It  has  a profound
effect  on  habitat  properties  in lakes and streams;  on the solubility of  gases
such as  oxygen,  upon  which most aquatic  life  is dependent;  on  the toxicity of
pollutants;  on the rate  and extent of  chemical  and  biochemical  reactions;  and
on  the  life  cycle  of  poikilothermic  aquatic  life in general.  Since in the con-
text of the  water  body  survey  uses are  framed  in reference to the  presence and
                                    II-5-4

-------
->  36
O


UJ

2
O
a.
V)
UJ
cc
  u
  OC
  cc
  UJ
  a.
  2
  UJ
     24 —
                   Avoidance

              :L-Lethal Temp.

              •P-Preferred Temp.


              — A-Acclimation Temp.
              ' Lower Avoidance
                          --P
      12 —
                     --P
                                               --P
                                           --P
— p
                      --P
                                                                --P
                     VJV

                     LMB MOS
          /
                                       v/

                                       RBT  LMB MOS
             \LS

            COM RBT  LMB MOS
                    12                       24                36



                        ACCLIMATION  TEMPERATURE  CO
Figure II-5-3. Relationships of preffered  (P),  avoidance (£),  and lethal temp-

eratures to the acclimation  (A) temperature  for coho salmon (COH), rainbow trout

(RBT), largemouth bass (LMB), and mosquitofish  (MOS) from laboratory trials

(from Cherry and Cairns,  1982).
                                    II-5-5

-------
the  protection  of  aquatic  life,  those  factors  which  support  or  jeopardize
aquatic life must be considered.

Perhaps the most critical element  in the  aquatic  environment  is  dissolved oxy-
gen, whose solubility is a function of  temperature.  Oxygen  is  added to an aqua-
tic  system  by  photosynthesis  and  by  transfer from  the atmosphere.  Unfortu-
nately, the  availability of  dissolved  oxygen  is apt  to be greatest when  the
requirement for  DO  is least,   i.e.,  in  the winter when  metabolic  activity  has
been  substantially  reduced.  Conversely,  the availability  may  be  lowest  when
the demand is greatest.

Consideration of the  relationship  of temperature  and  availability  of dissolved
oxygen is important  to the water  body survey, and will  require a  close examina-
tion  of  natural seasonal variation in DO  and  its  interaction with treatment
process efficiency,  with the oxygen demand  of  the  CBOD   and NBOD  in  waste-
waters, and with the seasonal  requirements of aquatic  life.
                                    II-5-6

-------
   Common name
           TABLE II-5-1.  PREFERRED TEMPERATURE  OF SOME  FISH  SPECIES.

              Species                  Life     Acclimation     Preferred
   Latin name
Life     Acclimation
Stage  Temperature,*^
Temperature,°C
Alewife



Threadfin shad
Sockeye salmon

Pink salmon
Chum salmon
Chinook salmon
Coho salmon

Cisco
Lake whitefish
Cutthroat trout
Rainbow trout



Atlantic salmon
Brown trout
Brook trout


Lake trout
Rainbow smelt
Alosa pseudoharengus



Dorosoma petenense
Oncorhynchus nerka

0. gorbuscha
0. keta
0. tshawytscha
0. Kisutch

Coregonus artedii
C. clupeaformis
Salmo clarki
S. gairdneri



S. salar
S. trutta
Salvelinus fontinalis


Salvelinus namaycush
Osmerus mordax
J 18
J 21
A 24
A 31
A
J
A
J
J
J
J
A
A
A
A
J not given
J 18
J 24
A
A
A
J 6
J 24
A
J
A
20
22
23
23
>19
12-14
10-15
12-14
12-14
12-14
12-14
13
13
13
9-12
14
18
22
13
14-16
12-18
12
19
14-18
8-15
6-14
Grass pickerel
Esox americanus
  vermiculatus
                                          J,A
                             24-26
                                    II-5-7

-------
TABLE II-5-1.  PREFERRED TEMPERATURE OF  SOME  FISH  SPECIES.  (Continued)
Species L
Common name
Muskellunge
Common carp





Emerald shiner
White sucker
Buffalo
Brown bullhead



Channel catfish

White perch



White bass
Striped bass



Rock bass
Green sunfish




ife
Acclimation
Preferred
Latin name Stage Temperature, °C Temperature, °C
Esox masquinongy
Cyprinus carpio





Notropis atherinoides
Catostomus commersoni
Ictlobus sp.
Ictalurus nebulosus



Ictalurus punctatus

Morone americana



M. chrysops
M. saxatilis



Ambloplites rupestris
Lepomis cyanellus




J
J
J
J
J
J
A
J
A
A
J
J
J
A
J
A
J
J
J
J
A
J
J
J
J
A
J
J
J
J
J

10
15
20
25
35
Summer
Summer


18
23
26

22-29

6
15
20
26-30
Summer
5
14
21
28

6
12
18
24
30
26
17
25
27
31
32
33-35
25
19-21
31-34
21
27
31
29-31
35
30-32
10
20
25
31-32
28-30
12
22
26
28
26-30
16
21
25
30
31
                               II-5-S

-------
  TABLE II-5-1.   PREFERRED TEMPERATURE  OF  SOME FISH SPECIES.  (Continued)

           Species                  Life     Acclimation      Preferred
Common name      Latin name         Stage  Temperature,°C  Temperature,°C
Pumpkinseed L. gibbosus




Bluegill L. machrochirus




Smallmouth bass Micropterus dolomieui



Spotted bass M. punctulatus




Largemouth bass M. salmoides
White crappie Pomoxis annularis



Black crappie P. nigromaculatus

Yellow perch Perca flavescens
Sauger Stizostedion canadense
Walleye S. vitreum
Freshwater drum Aplodinotus grunniens
J
J
J
J
A
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
A
J
A
J,A
A
J,A
A
8
19
24
26

6
12
18
24
30
15
18
24
30
6
12
18
24
30

5
24
27







10
21
31
33
31-31
19
24
29
31
32
20
23
30
31
17
20
27
30
32
26-32
10
26
28
28-29
27-29
24-31
19-24
18-28
20-25
29-31
                                II-5-9

-------
           TABLE II-5-2.  SPAWNING TEMPERATURE OF SOME FISH SPECIES.
              Species
   Common name      Latin name
                       Spawning temperature,°C
                      approximate
                       value or     optimum
                         range      or peak
Lamprey

  Northern brook
  Southern brook
  Allegheny brook
  Mountain brook
  Silver
  Least brook
  Arctic
  American brook
  Western brook
  Pacific
  Sea

Sturgeon

  Shortnose
  Lake
  Atlantic
  White

Paddlefish

Gar

  Longnose
  Shortnose

Bowfin
Ichthyomyzon fosser
Ichthyomyzon gagei
Ichthyomyzon greeleyi
Ichthyomyzon hubbsi
Ichthyomyzon unicuspis
Ichthyomyzon aepyptera
Lampetra japonica
Lampetra lamottei
Lampetra richardsoni
Lampetra trident at a
Petromyzon marinus
Acipenser brevirostrum
Acipenser fulvenscens
Acipenser oxyrhynchus
Acipenser transmontanus

Polydon spathula
Lepisosteus osseus
Lepisosteus platostomus

Ami a calva
Blueback herring  Alosa aestivalis

Shad
  Alabama
  Hickory
  Alewife
  American
  Gizzard
  Threadfin
Alosa alabamae
Alosa mediocris
Alosa pseudoharengus
Alosa sapidissima
Dorosoma cepedium
Dorosoma petenense
13-77
  15
  19
10-12
10-16
12-15

 3-20
  >8
11-24
 8-12
12-19
13-18
 9-17

  16
19-24

16-19

14-27
19-22
18-21
13-28
11-19
17-29
14-23
 17
9-11
 21
                        Spawning
                         season
                         month
May-Jun
Mar-May
   May
Mar-Apr
Apr-Jun
Mar-May
May-Jul
Apr-Jun
Mar-Jun
   Apr
Apr-Jul
               Apr-Jun
               Apr-Jun
               Feb-Jul
               May-Jul

               May-Jun
               Mar-Aug
               May-Jul

               Apr-Jul

               Apr-Jul
Jan-Jul
May-Jun
Apr-Aug
Jan-Jul
Mar-Aug
Apr-Aug
                                    II-5-10

-------
     TABLE II-5-2.  SPAWNING TEMPERATURE OF SOME FISH SPECItS. (Continued)
              Species
   Common name      Latin name
                       Spawning temperature,°C
                      approximate
                       value or     optimum
                         range      or peak
Salmon

  Pink
  Sock eye

  (Kokanee)

  Coho

Whitefish
Oncorhynchus gorbuscha
Oncorhynchus nerka
  (anadromous)
Oncorhynchus nerka
  (landlocked)
Oncorhynchus kisutch
  Cisco           Coregonus
  Lake            Coregonus
  Bloater         Coregonus
  Alaska          Coregonus
  Least cisco     Coregonus
  Kiyi            Coregonus
  Shortnose cisco Coregonus
  Pygmy           Prospium
  Round           Prospium
  Mountain        Prospium
          artedii
          clupeaformis
          hoyi
          nelsoni
          sardinella
          kiyi
          reighardi
         coulteri
         cylindraceum
         spilonotus
Trout

  Golden
  Arizona
  Cutthroat
  Rainbow
  Gila
  Atlantic salmon
  Brown
  Arctic char
  Brook trout
Salmo aguabonita
Salmo apache
Salmo clarki
Salmo gairdneri
Salmo gilae
Salmo salar
Salmo trutta
Salvelinus alpinus
Salvelinus fontinalis
 3-7

5-10
7-13
 1-5
1-10
  5
 0-3
 0-3
 2-5
 3-5
 0-4
 0-4
5-12
           10
7-10
8
10
5-17
8
2-10
1-13
1-13
3-12



9-13

4-6
7-9
3-4
9
                       Spawning
                        season
                        month
Jul-Oct

Jul-Dec

Aug-Feb
Oct-Jan
Nov-Dec
Sep-Dec
Nov-Mar
Sep-Oct
Sep-Oct
Oct-Jan
Apr-Jun
Oct-Jan
Oct-Dec
Sep-Dec
                         Jun-Jul
                            May
                         Jan-May
                 Apr-Jul/Nov-Feb
                         Apr-May
                         Oct-Dec
                         Oct-Feb
                         Sep-Dec
                         Aug-Dec
                                    II-5-11

-------
     TABLE II-5-2.  SPAWNING TEMPERATURE  OF  SOME  FISH  SPECIES.  (Continued)

                                         Spawning temperature,°C
approximate Spawning
Species value or optimum season
Common name Latin name range or peak month
Dolly Varden
Lake
Inconnu
Arctic grayling
Rainbow smelt
Eulachon
Goldeye
Alaska blackfish
Salvelinus malma
Salvelinus namaycush
Stenodus leucichthys
Thymallus arcticus
Osmerus mordax
Thaleichthys pacificus
Hiodon alosoides
Dallia pectoralis
5-8
3-14
1-5
4-11
1-15
4-8
10-13
10-15
Sep-Nov
Aug-Dec
Sep-Oct
Mar-Jun
Feb-May
Mar -May
May-Oul
May-Aug
Central
   mudminnow

Pickerel

  Redfin

  Grass

  Chain

Northern pike

Muskellunge

Chiselmouth

Central
  stoneroller

Goldfish

Redside dace

Lake chub

Common carp
Umbra limi



Esox americanus
 americanus
Esox americanus
 vermiculatus
Esox niger

Esox lucius

Esox masquinongy

Acrocheilus alutaceus


Campostoma anomalum

Carassius auratus

Clinostomus elongatus

Couesius plumbeus

Cyprinus carpio
13
10
   Apr
Feb-Apr
7-12 10 Mar-May/Aug-Oct
6-16 8 Mar-May
3-19
9-15 13
17
13-27
16-30
>18
14-19
14-26 19-23
Feb-Jul
Apr-May
Jun-Jul
Apr-Jun
Feb-Nov
May
May-Jun
Mar-Aug
                                    II-5-12

-------
     TABLE II-5-2.  SPAWNING TEMPERATURE OF SOME FISH SPECIES. (Continued)
                                         Spawning temperature,°C
              Species
   Common name      Latin name
Utah chub

Tui chub

Brassy minnow

Silvery minnow

Chub

  River
  Silver
  Clear
  Rosyface

Peamouth

Hornyhead chub

Shiner

  Golden
  Satinfin
  Emerald
  Bridle
  Warpaint
  Common
  Fluvial
  Whitetail
  Spottail
  Rosyface
  Saffron

Sacremento
  blackfish

Bluntnose minnow

Fathead minnow

Sacremento
  squawfish

Northern
  squawfish
Gila atraria

Gila bicolor

Hybognathus hankinsoni

Hybognathus nuchalis
Hybobsis micropogon
Hybobsis storeriana
Hybobsis winchelli
Hybobsis rubriformes

Mylocheilus caurinus

Nocomis biguttatus
Notemigonus crysoleucas
Notropis analostanus
Notropis atherinoides
Notropis bifrenatus
Notropis coccogenis
Notropis cornutus
Notropis edwardraneyi
Notropis galacturus
Notropis hudsonius
Notropis rubellus
Notropis rubricroceus
Orthodon microlepidotus

Pimephales notatus

Pimephales promelas


Ptychocheilus grandis


Ptychocheilus oregonensis
approximate
value or optimum
range or peak
12-16
16
10-13
13-21
19-28
18-21
10-17
19-23
11-22
24
s 16-21
18-27
20-28 24
14-27
20-24
15-28 19-21
28
24-28
20
20-29
19-30
s 15
21-26
14-30 23-24
4
sis 12-22 18
Spawning
season
month
Apr-Aug
Apr-Jun
May-Jun
Apr-May
May-Aug
May-Jun
Feb-Mar
Apr-Jun
May-Jun
Spring
May-Aug
May-Aug
May-Aug
May-Jul
Jun-Jul
Apr-Jul
Jun
May-Jun
May-Jul
May-Jul
May-Jul
Apr-Jun
Apr-Sep
May-Aug
Apr-Jun
May-Jun
                                    II-5-13

-------
     TABLE 11-5-2.  SPAWNING TEMPERATURE  OF  SOME  FISH  SPECIES.  (Continued)



                                         Spawning temperature,°C
approximate
Species value or optimum
Common name Latin name range or peak
Black nose dace
Longnose dace
Redside shiner
Creek chub
Famish
Pearl dace
Sucker
Longnose
White
Flannelmouth
Largescale
Mountain
Tahoe
Blue
Northern hog
Smal 1 mouth
buffalo
Bigmouth
buffalo
Spotted sucker
Blackfin sucker
Redhorse
Silver redhorse
River
Black
Golden
Shorthead
Greater
Rhinichthys atratulus
Rhinichthys cataractae
Richardsonius balteatus
Semotilus atromaculatus
Semotilus corporalis
Semotilus margarita
Catostomus catostomus
Catostomus commersoni
Catostomus latipinnis
Catostomus macrocheilus
Catostomus platyrhynchus
Catostomus tahoensis
Catostomus elongatus
Hypentelium nigricans

Ictiobus bubalus
Ictiobus cyprinellus
Minytrema melanops
Moxostoma atripinne
Moxostoma anisurum
Moxostoma breviceps
Moxostoma duquesnei
Moxostoma erythrurum
Moxostoma macrolepidotum
Moxostoma valenciennesi
16-22 21
12-16
10-18
>12
>16
17-18
>5
8-21
13
>7
10-19
11-14
10-15

14-28 17-24
14-27 16-18
13-18
12-18
22-25
13-23
15-22
11-22
16-19
Spawning
season
month
May-Jun
May-Aug
Apr-Jul
Apr-Jul
May-Jun
May-Jun
May-Jun
Mar-Jun
Apr-Jun
Apr-Jun
Jun-Jul
Apr-Jun
Apr-Jun
May

Mar-Sep
Apr-Jun
Apr-May
Apr
Apr -May
Apr
Apr-May
Apr-May
Apr-May
May-Jul
Humpback sucker   Xyrauchen texanus
12-22
Mar-Apr
                                    II-5-14

-------
TABLE II-5-2.  SPAWNING TEMPERATURE  OF  SOME  FISH  SPECIES.  (Continued)



                                    Spawning temperature,°C
approximate
Species value or optimum
Common name
Catfish
White
Blue
Black bullhead
Brown bullhead
Channel
Flathead
Stonecat
Bridled madtom
White River
springf ish
Desert pupfish
Banded ki lif ish
Plains kilifish
Mosquitofish
Burbot
Brook stickleback
Threespine
st ickleback
Trout-perch
White perch
White bass
Striped bass
Rock bass
Sacremento perch
Flier
Latin name

Ictalurus catus
Ictalurus furcatus
Ictalurus melas
Ictalurus nebulosus
Ictalurus punctatus
Pylodictis olivaris
Noturus flavus
Noturus miurus

Crenichthys baileyi
Cyprinodon macularius
Fundulus diaphanus
Fundulus kansae
Gambusia affinis
Lota lota
Eucalia inconstans

Gascerosteus aculeatus
Percopsis omiscomaycus
Morone americana
Morone chrysops
Morone saxatilis
Ambloplites rupestris
Archoplites interruptus
Centrarchus macropterus
range or peak

20-29
>22
>21
>21
21-29 27
22-28
27
25-26

32
>20 28-32
>21 23
28
23
0-2
4-21

5-20
6-21
11-20
12-21
12-22 16-19
16-26
22-28
17
Spawni ng
season
month

Jun-Jul
Apr-Jun
May-Jul
Mar-Sep
Mar-Jul
May-Jul
Jun-Aug
Jul-Aug


Apr-Oct
Apr-Sep
Jun-Aug
Mar-Oct
Jan-Feb
Apr-Ju]

Apr-Sep
May-Aug
May-Jul
Apr-Jun
Apr-Jun
Apr-Jun
May-Aug
Mar -May
                               II-5-15

-------
TABLE II-5-2.  SPAWNING TEMPERATURE  OF  SOME FISH SPECIES.  (Continued)
                                    Spawning temperature,
°c
approximate
Species value or
Common name Latin name range
Banded pygmy
sunfish
Sunfish
Redbreast
Green
Pumpkinseed
Warmouth
Orangespotted
Bluegill
Longear
Redear
Spotted
Bass
Redeye
Smallmouth
Suwannee
Spotted
Largemouth
White crappie
Black crappie
Yellow perch
Sauger
Walleye
Greenside darter
Johnny darter
Channel darter
Blackside darter
Mottled sculpin
Freshwater drum
Elassoma zonatum
Lepomis auritus
Lepomis cyanellus
Lepomis gibbosus
Lepomis gulosus
Lepomis humilis
Lepomis machrochi rus
Lepomis megalotis
Lepomis microlophus
Lepomis punctatus

Micropterus coosae
Micropterus dolomieui
Micropterus notius
Micropterus punctulatus
Micropterus salmoides
Pomoxis annul aris
Pomoxis nigromaculatus
Perca flavescens
Stizostedion canadense
Stizostedion vitreum
Etheostoma blennioides
Etheostoma nigrum
Percina copelandi
Percina maculata
Cottus bairdi
Aplodinotus grunniens
14-23
17-29
20-28
19-29
21-26
19-32
22-30
20-32
18-33

17-23
13-23
15-21
12-27
14-23
14-20
4-15
4-15
4-17
>10
>18
20-21
16-17
10
18-24
Spawning
optimum season
or peak month
Mar-May
Apr-Aug
May-Aug
May-Aug
May-Aug
May-Aug
25 Feb-Aug
May-Aug
Mar-Sep
Mar-Nov

Apr-Jul
17-18 Apr-Jul
Feb-Jun
May-Jun
21 Apr-Jun/Nov-May
16-20 Mar-Jul
Mar-Jul
12 Mar-Jul
9-15 Mar-Jul
6-9 Mar-Jun
Apr-Jun

Jul
May-Jun
Apr -May
23 May-Aug
                              II-5-16

-------
                                CHAPTER  11-6
                           RIPARIAN  EVALUATIONS
Riparian ecosystems can  be  variously  identified  but  their  common  element  is
that they are  adjacent  to  aquatic systems.  Rrinson et  al.,  (1981)  defines
them as  "riverine floodplain  and streambank ecosystems.  Cowardin et  al.,
(1979) in  their"Classification of  Wetlands  Habitats  of  the  U.S.", do  not
clearly  delineate  riparian and wetland  zones.    For this  chapter  emphasis
will be  given  to  floodplain,  riverine and lacustrine  riparian  habitats  and
no   distinction   has   been  made  between   riparian   and  wetland   land
envi ronments.

The primary  legislative  justification for riparian  protection  is  the  Clean
Water  Act,   specifically  that  section  dealing   with water quality.    Many
factors  enter  into  the  relationship  between  riparian  ecosystems  and  water
quality;  a  simple  correlation  between   any  single  measure  of  riparian
habitat  and  water quality  does not exist.   A  well  developed  riparian  zone
is frequently  the juncture  between  terrestrial and aqautic environments  and
its characteristics are  governed  to some  extent  by both.   The riparian  zone
is usually  related to  the  adjacent terrestrial   environment with  respect  to
climatic conditions,  soil  types,  land topography  etc.  The  aquatic  system
is  an   integration  of  upstream  drainage  (Lotspeich  1980)  and  has  the
riparian  zone as  an  important  component.   The   aquatic effects  to  the
riparian ecosystem  will vary with factors  such  as  stream  size,  climatic
vegetation and soil  type.   Although no ideal riparian  habitat water  quality
scenario is  possible, general  relationships  can  be derived.

A  critical   relationship  exists  between  stream  size  and   the  extent  of
riparian habitat.   Small  streams canopied by riparian  vegetation will  be
more influenced than  large streams  where  riparian canopy  represents only  a
small  fraction of  the  immediate  channel.   The   small   riparian  zone  in
relation to  stream size  of many large streams  has frequently  been  cited  in
order to diminish the  importance  of this habitat.    The  presumption  is  made
that riparian  importance is minimal  because the riparian/river  size  ratio
is  small.     It  is   also  argued  that  alteration   of  smaller  streams  is
insignificant  with   respect  to  the  total  drainage  basin   and  that   such
activities have minimal  implications  for  larger  streams.   An  obvious impact
of  large  stream   riparian  modification  is shore  line   destruction   and
subsequent loss of near  shore  stream habitat.   Although  modification  of  a
single small tributary may  have a minimal  effect on the larger water  body,
major  drainage basin  alterations  could  seriously  damage  water  resources,
the larger stream being  a  product of  its tributaries.

Riparian system have  unique ecosystem qualities  which should  be  considered
in  addition  to their  water  qualiy  values.   Riparian zones   are cited  as
classical ecotones which will  usually support greater  species and numerical
diversity than adjacent  aquatic or  terrestrial environments.   Large  numbers
of rare  and  endangered  animal  and plant  species reside  here.  It  is  often
critical  habitat for an  entire  life span  or  it  may  be used in  a  transitory
manner for reproduction, migration  or as hunting territory for raptors  and
carnivorous  mammals.   Even though organisms may not use  the  riparian  zone
                             11-6

-------
as their  primary  living habitat, its  loss  may  seriously disrupt  foodchain
mechanisms  and  life  history  processes.    Significant  changes  in  species
numbers, diversity and  types may  occur in  both  the terrestrial and  aquatic
environments  following  riparian  destruction.   It  is estimated  that  less
than two percent of the land area in  the U.S.  is riparian habitat  (Brinson
et al.,  1981).   Large  portions  have  been  converted to  agricultural  use,
e.g.   the  Mississippi  bottomland  hardwoods,  and   stream  channelization
has  destroyed  adjacent riparian  ecosystems.    Timber removal  has  greatly
reduced  riparian  habitat  in forested  regions.   Livestock  grazing has  had
extremely  detrimental  riparian  effects  on  semi-arid   rangelands.    Land
values have favored agricultural  and urban  development immediately  adjacent
to the aquatic environment with the exclusion of most natural  vegetation.

PHYSICAL RELATIONSHIPS

Key physical stream characteristics are  affected by the riparian ecosystem.
Water  temperature  responds to  almost any  riparian  alteration  in  smaller
streams.   Several  studies  (Karr  and Schlosser  1978,  Moring 1975,  Campbell
1970)  have  demonstrated  that   shade  afforded   by  adjacent  vegetation
significantly  moderates  water   temperature,  reducing  summer  highs   and
decreasing winter lows.  This can have significant  effects on  many  chemical
and  biological  processes.     Chemical   reaction   rates  are  temperature
dependent  and  increased  temperature   generally  increases  reaction  rates.
Adsorption, absorption,  precipitation reactions, decomposition  rates,  and
nutrient  recycling dynamics  could all be altered.   Many aquatic  organisms
have  relatively  specific  temperature   requirements.   Elevated temperatures
increase  poikilotherm metabolic  rates  causing  excessively  low production
during food deprivation and the increased  temperature may disrupt  critical
life stages such as  reproduction.  Temperatures exceeding or  substantially
below  optimal  requirements,   even   for  relatively  brief   periods,   can
completely alter the  biota.  Larger streams may not be physically  affected
as   readily   as   the   smaller   tributaries  but   large   scale   tributary
modifications could have dramatic downstream consequences.

Another  direct  physical  consequence  is  alteration  in  the  quality  and
quantity of incident  solar radiation.   Optimal photosynthetic  wave  lengths,
especially  for  diatoms,  may  be  altered by  the  canopy,   but as  will  be
elaborated  later,  this  may  not  have  serious  consequences  to  a diversified
biota.  Turbidity will  be reduced by riparian vegetation.  This too  will  be
discussed  in  greater detail.    A further  loss  with  reduction in  riparian
habitat  is the  fine   particulate  matter,   especially   the   nutrient  rich
organic  material.    This  may be  transferred to  the  adjacent terrestrial
environment during  floods or  carried directly  to  the  large  streams  with
such  a  reduced  residence time  in the  smaller  stream  that  they  become
nutrient limited.

FLUVIAL RELATIONSHIPS

Fluvial  characteristics are  governed  by   such  processes  as  stream  bank
stability, flow rates,  rainfall  seasonality and water volumes.  Stream bank
stability  is important  in maintaining  stream  integrity.   This stability  is
a function of the local geology and riparian vegetation.
                             II-6-1

-------
Streams  are  not  static  but  new  channel  formation  rates  are  slowed  with
increased bank stability.   During  high  water,  bank  erosion  is minimized and
excess  flow  energy  dissipated over  floodplains  with minimal environmental
damage.    Without   riparian  vegetation,   flooding   is   more   erosive  and
extensive.   Energies are  not dissipated  readily  but  remain excessive for
the duration of  the high water.   The geomorphological  consequences  can  be
considerable;  extreme erosion,  formation  of  additional  channels,  upland
sediment  deposition etc.   The  biological   impact  can  be devastating,  with
the aquatic  habitat physically  destroyed or silted  to  the  extent  it  is  no
longer  a  biologically viable unit.   Under extreme conditions, silt  levels
may be  sufficient to cause  embryo death  and  physiological  damage to  gill
breathing organisms.   This scenario  is  best  illustrated using the example
of stream channelization.   High energy  water  movement  leads to  rapid  land
drainage  but also to extremely  damaging floods when stream  banks  overflow.
Biological  communities  may  become   species  depauperate,  biomass  greatly
reduced  and  those  populations  remaining  may  be  undesirable  compared  to
previous  inhabitants.

Riparian  zone  groundwater  levels   are controlled  by adjacent surface  water
levels.   The vegetated  riparian system  retains  more water  and releases  it
at  slower  rates than   non-vegetated  shore   zones.    This  has   important
implications  for stream water  quality.   Flood  surge   may  be  diminished
downstream  of  precipitation  events   by  water movement   into non-saturated
riparian  soils.   This would  reduce   sediment  transport   capacity,  flooding
and channel  erosion.   Water  movement into the  terrestrial  water  table  is
especially important  to  stream  stability in arid  regions  where  rainfall may
occur  rarely  but may  lead  to devastating  floods.   Stream-side  vegetation
moderates  the   potential   impact   of  local  rainfall  events  by   retaining
surface   runoff.     Groundwater  can  moderate  stream   temperatures   where
significant flow  is  derived from underground sources.

BIOLOGICAL RELATIONSHIPS

Primary  production  is controlled  by  the  quality  and  quantity  of  incident
solar  radiation, nutrients  and  plant   community   structure.    In  smaller
streams with extensive canopies the  radiation  quantity may  be significantly
reduced   and   the  wavelength  distribution  altered.    This  may  reduce
production in  that  section  but  may   at  the same time  make nutrients  more
available  to  downstream   organisms.    Water  temperature  will   also  be
affected,  and   photosynthesis  may be   reduced  by  cooler  water  but  also
temporarily extended  by  a  reduction  in  seasonal  temperature  extremes.   Many
stream  primary producers,   especially diatoms  and mosses,  have adapted  to
reduced  light   intensity,   and  relatively  high  photosynthetic  rates  are
maintained under  low  light  conditions.

Stream  flow  characteristics are also affected by debris.   Flow  rates  are
moderated  by  the  pool-riffle  morphology  common  to   streams  with  well
developed riparian  systems.   It   has  been demonstrated  that   the rate  of
water movement can  be significantly  different  for  a  given elevation  loss
between well developed  pool/riffle complexes  and  streams which allow  free
water flow.   The  streams with the  most   complex morphology  retain  the  water
                             II-6-2

-------
for  the  greatest  period.   This  has  important  secondary  implications  for
groundwater, hydrologic  regime, water temperature  and  biota.

Perhaps  the  most  severe  effect  on  water  quality   following   riparian
destruction is  increased  channel  sedimentation.   Agricultural and  forestry
practices  frequently  remove  vegetation to  the  immediate  streambank  thus
allowing  unhindered  surface  water  movement  directly  into the   stream.
Riparian vegetation will  retard  surface sheet  flow, substantially  reducing
stream  sediment loads.    Stream  sedimentation  results  in  extreme  habitat
diversity  loss,  and  the  bottom  morphology  becomes   a  monotony  of  fine
grained  sediments.   The immediate  biotic  symptom  may  be acute  suffocation
of  the  invertebrate  fauna  with  the  possibility  of  chronic,  physiological
stress.   The  long  term  effects  are  extensive.   Table  II-6-1 prepared  by
Karr  and  Schlosser (1978)  illustrates  the relationships  between  land  use
practices and stream  sediment  loads.

Table II-6-1:    POTENTIAL EFFECTS  OF VARYING MANAGEMENT  PRACTICES ON
EQUILIBRIUMS OF EQUIVALENT  WATERSHEDS.  THESE ARE  BEST  ESTIMATES OF
RELATIVE EFFECTS FOR A VARIETY OF WATERSHED CONDITIONS,  INCLUDING SOURCES
AND AMOUNTS OF  SEDIMENTS.
                        Relative Amount of
                          Sediment From
Management
Practice
Natural watershed

Clear  land for
rowcrop agriculture;
maintain natural
stream channel

Channelize stream
in forested
watershed

Clear  land and
channelize stream
Best land surface
management with
channelization
 Land
Surface

 Very low

 High
Stream
Channel

Very low

Low
 Suspended    Source
Solids Load   of
 in Stream    Sediment

 Very low

 Medium     Land surface
 Very low    High
             High
              Channel
              banks
 High
 Low
High
High
 Very high  Land surface
            and channel
               banks
 Medium to
 high
Channel
banks
Best land surface
and natural channel
 Low
Low
 Low to     Equilibrium
 medium     between land
            and channel
                             II-6-3

-------
}
t_
ro
E

t_
Q.

C
O
•1 —
_4_J
ro
4_j
C
QJ
E

•^j
0)
CO



Ol
t-
3
4_>
ro

Ol
Q_
E
01











s
o
1 —
1 1



c
co -o c
0) QJ T- O
CO •!— t- •!-
QJ ro i — ro 4_>
_v QJ >, • a. CL cJ
ro i — i — CO Q-'r— 3
>,+-> QJ .E: r- 3 t_-o
_Q Q- £- cn-i— co o
3 -r- O 4- £_
-O "O -C CO QJ O Q-
QJ C QJ i—
4->rO4-JJCO.aaj>>
ro -t— ro cn -f— ro CO t-
£_ t_ i — 3d, — 3ro
QJ ro 3 O ro -i — ro £
~CJ Q- Cn £_ cnro  QJ L_
SI S- a: 4-> O •=£ -O Q.

,— I CM ro
-o
O)
^_J
ro >,

QJ -r-
£— O CO
4-> C" c
C -)-> QJ
O QJ -r- +J
•r- r- 5 C
4-J _Q •! —
ro ra t/)
•i— -I— +-)
O CO CO JT
QJ E QJ cn
Q. CO -CT -r-
CO ,r- +-> i —
tr c:
-a ro >i-c
QJ Cn CO QJ
O t~ O U
= 0 +-> 3
^!3 O ~O
QJ O -C QJ
Ct: 4-J Q- t-


>^
JD
C
-o o
QJ •!-
1 i +-)
rO ro
!_ +0
O> CD
~O Cn
O 01
s: >
S i — co
O -r- C
r- ro 0
-0 T3 -r-
T3 CO QJ 4->
C QJ +J -D ro
ro E ro O> 3
QJ £- O 4->
x: t- OJ 3 o
cn -i_> ~o ~o 3
•i— X O QJ i —
HI O) S C£  QJ
O >
ro O)
"C QJ
CO QJ £- i—
QJ +J ro
E ro QJ U
QJ t- r- O
t_ OJ 4-> <—
-t-J "O +->
X 0 -r- 0
UJ E — I +->
i— I CM
T3 >,
QJ QJ jQ
-M >
ro - O T3
i — GJ E O> Ol
O O> 4-> O) t- M
,_ 4-> t- OJ !_ 0 -r-
ro £- (4— r— ro
C CO >} rO >^ O) T— j ^
C C4-J+-J4-J rO-C+_) o
CO O -1- O 3 E 3 -r-
ro -i— i — -i— O CO -O
QJ 4-- -i- £> cn 4-> Ol
CO ro _Q c~ CZ C i- O
3 ro E co -r- QJ ro -r—
OJ 4-J i — ro ro ~O -i — -4~>
Cn o -F— OJ 5 O L >} ro
c 23 ro c Q [ ^ QJ ^
rOr— >+-! Or- 3-C CT
	 1 i+_ <^ co +-) 4^ ci -(-J ro

t— I CM
3 rr
.0 !_ C 01
cn o O O) ^-«
C Ol C > -i— £_ CO
O i — •!— ro +-> CD CD
•r- _O "O 4— ro i 4-J
4-> ro ro -i— QJ >,
O £- O CO O 3 -C
3-r- i — QJ QJ i — Q_
-a CO <- CL-Q O
O QJ 4-! 3 CO L_
£~ "O C 4-J CO O
CL c O) ro QJ 3 ro
3 -r~ i- r- O E
"O S- QJ -O 4->
CD M- . 4_j o. ro C S-
LOOco3^f^QjO
ro CD C CD •!— E
CD C *i — 4-1 CO ro QJ
t- O) O -C O1 . — ro
o 4-J o1 cn ~o "O •" — cn
C4- Q.T- C C4-r—
>— i O CO 31 ro 3 	 	 ro

. '
^H CM
!- 1
CD O
c~ .,—
Cn 4j
•r- I- c
-£= ro Cn-o O
a. c CD -i-
>, •-- JC 4->
i — « >-> 'S co Q.
r— CO r- O t_ 3
ro T3 t- , — QJ t_
3 ro ro i — 4-> CO
CO O i — O ro •!—
=3 r- 34- 2 -0
^>
•i— c:
ro 0

r- O +->
CD ro -r- QJ ro
E C 4-> E 3
CD O ro QJ 4->
U 1/1 •!- S_ (J
4-1 ro 1_ 4-> 3
X CD ro X i —
UJ CO > UJ M-

r-H CNJ
! 	
ro
O
^ 0
O i — CO
i — ( »
M- O C
4-> CD
O >
•r- CO QJ
+_) 4^
ro O C
S_ ro -r-
£_ QJ ro
UJ Q; I-
^-1 CM
 E   •
 QJ T3
-t-5  O)
 co  a.
 >>  o
 CO i—
    QJ
 C  >
 ro  Ol
•r- T3
 t_
 ro i—
 a. i—
•r-  QJ
a:  3
                                                      ro
                                                      O.
                                                      T3
                                                      OJ E
                                                      O Ol
                                                      3 4->
                                                      T3 CO
                                                      OJ >,
                                                      rs CO
                                                   II-6-4

-------
C
O
o
CXJ
CO


C
ro

L
ro
CL
., —
ce



t_
CD

ra
2
TO
c
^3
o
t_
CD




00
oo
fO
E
O

CD






oo
, —
fO
^
TO
., —
;>
., 	
-a
c:
» — i

•
O











>^
4_]
.,—
00
t_
CD

• r—
r — L










01
C
., 	
TO
O
O
, —
M—

CU

4_j
4-J
•i—
	 j

i — i





Ol
C
., —
c
• t—
ra

CO
13
CO

4—
1 —
CD
00

C
•1 —

CD
01
c
ro
C"
O

2
O
i —
oo


o>_
O

>^
4-J
•r—
00
£_
CD

• r~-
o




CD
Ol
t_
ro
r—

CD
:>
ro
-C

;>^
03
s:


JC
4_J
.)—
5

C
0
•1 —
-t_>
03
•i —
O
OJ
Q_
(/I

O)
l/>
I_
OJ
>.
>,—
Q
•
1 — 1




>-J
r—
, 	
rO
t~
OJ
C
a;


t_
cu
4->
ro
3







Q
4_>

4->
U
CU
Q-
00
CD
C—

-C
4->
.,—
2






c
O
• 1 —
4->
fO
>
QJ
i —
CD
CO
CD
Q-
-**•>
4-3

^
CO
• i —
c
ro
01
t_
O

CO
CD
>r_
O
a>
c.
CO

(J 	
o

t_
CD
J3
E
rs
c:










4_^
ro
4-J
.,—
n
ro
jd

CD
CO
t_
CD
>
•t—
-a


CD
C
c:
ro
t —
O

C
•i—

-£3
CD
C
•i —
ro
4-1
CU
c_





^
CO
4_J
C
O)
• r—
t_
4->

C

^
L
CU
4_J
ro
3







O
4-J

-a
CD
Ol
ro
Ol



O
40

0)

jS
ro

TO
C
ra
CO
E
00
., —
c
ra
Ol
t_
o

2
QJ
"4—

-C
4_>
•r—
2
















c:
o
•i—
4-'
O
CD
, —
CL
00





«*
^_
13
O
U
O

T3
0
C3
, —
4~

o>.
K-l

C\J








•
0
^
CD

4_J
•T:
^_>
'i —
-Q
ra
-C





c
•1 —

oo
CD
CD
C
ts
.C
0

CU
Ol
t_
ro


C
., —
fO
40
CO
3
00





ro
X
ro


c~
(_)
ro
CD

t_
O

c:
C
•i —
4_J
IO
•1 —
o
CD
CL
00

CD
o-
L.
fO


CD
>
to
c~

>^
ro
"3T
•


-a
OJ
4_)
(^
Q. 1Z
•^ 0
00 -r-
CO 4_)
•1— fO
~O 4-J
CD
Dl
.^
~o
O
o
,__
4-

CD

fO
0
CO
>> Ol
cn CD ' cu
t_ >•
CD
c: >,
CD -Q

























1 —
CD
;>
CD
r—

E
ro
CD
i_
4_J
00







00
OO
ro
E
0
• r~
-Q


















OO
CD
4-> C
ro t-
e 0.1 £= CD
-C 4^ O i—
O; oo -r- 4->
4_< CD 1 4-J 4->
t- 3 C ro -i-
O) -r- ^- r—
> 0 =S
C 4-J O) CL-C >,
•i- CD O 4J 4-J
C i- CL-r- -r-
"O O ro 2 OO
C E i — CD t-
ro E 4-J >> CD
O » ro 4-> >
JC O CO l_ •!- -r-
00 E -C 00 ID
•i— CO ro CD t-
>4- ro OJ 4_> Ol -C
l_ i- > 00
C <~ 4~> CD -r- -i-
•i- O 00 > T3 4-

01
L.
ro
	 1

i — i
00
CU
TO
ro
f_










t_
^3
O
u
o

>^
ro
E






CU
cr>-Q
CD
TO

£
CD
4J
00
>^
00

a1
o
c
0
CD
CJ1
c
ro
r~
O

TO
>i —
O
ro
a:

«
i — i

CO
00
ro
E
0
• r—
.a

CD
01
£_
ro
-1



14—
O

t_
CU
-C
E
13
C"

cu
Ol
(_
ro
	 1








CO
t^
a;
-C
E

c:

00
a>
>r—
U
O)
a.
CO

2
O

r^
CD
Ol
C
0
1 —

o
c:

^
ro
E



Ol
c
., —
2
o
t —
1 —
0
w~






OJ

4_)
4_j
.,—
1 —

^1
4_)
•i —
3



ia

t_
0


00
E
00
., —
c
ro
01
L-
O




























1_
CD
4_)
ra
3

>j
Ol
s_
CD
C
CD

JC
01
•1 —
3:

C\J

c
• I —
ro
j *
00
^
CO

o
^^

QJ
i —
_O
•i —
00
CO
O
O_


e
•i —

00
0)
O1
c:
ro
f—
O








>•)
4_J
• i —
CO
f^_
CD
>
• i—
TO










ro
X
ro
4-3

3
CD
M—



























CD
01
{_
ro
r—

CD
C
•i —
OO
!3
ro
O

3
0
r_—
0>_






j_J
ro
4_>
.,—
-Q
ro
f

C
 CD

OO 4-J TO
C C
CD Oj_ ro
4-> O
X TO
CL' Ol CD
d _Q
4_> >r~
=3 ^ E
O t- ro
JC O CD
4-> 3 t-
•r- CD 4-J
3 £- oo


, —
• ) —
0
00
Ol
TO C
•1 — -r—
Q- >,
ro £_
fV TO

•
CM




















































































TO
C3
ro
r —
CL
^3

-4-*
d
OJ
u

-------
Several  studies  have investigated  the  use of  riparian  wetlands for  waste
water treatment.  Generally,  significant  phosphorus  and  nitrogen  reductions
occur  following  varying  wetland  exposure.    EPA  Regions   IV  and  V  have
prepared documentation for generic  EIS statements which  address  the  wetland
alternative to secondary and  tertiary waste treatment  technology.  Riparian
vegetation has also  been used to treat urban  runoff  where it  has  been  found
to significantly  reduce  treatment  costs  and  sediment  loads,  and  to  improve
water quality and greatly moderate  flows.

Recent research  has  indicated that  humic acids released from some  riparian
ecosystems, particularly wetlands,  can  significantly affect  water  quality.
Humates  are  generally   large  organic   molecules   which   may  sequester
substances making them  biologically unavailable or may, conversely, act  as
chelating  agents making  them more  available.   These  phenomena can  also
occur with toxic materials.   Humates may cause considerable oxygen  demand
and significantly affect such chemical properties as  COD.   These  substances
remain largely unclassified and their exact effects  unknown.

RIPARIAN CASE HISTORY STUDIES

A  long  standing controversy  has  developed in  western States where  cattle
are permitted to graze adjacent to or   in both  permanent   and  intermittent
streams beds (Rehnke 1979).   The unprotected  riparian  vegetation  is  altered
in virtually  all respects; species change,  biomass  is  reduced, herbs  and
shrubs become almost non-existent.  A critical  question  is  how  this  affects
water  quality  and  ultimately the  fishery.    Platts  (1982),  following  an
extensive  literature review,  concluded  that  studies conducted  by fisheries
personnel  generally  found   significant   biomass   and   speciation   changes
following  "heavy  grazing".    Similar  studies  by range personnel  frequently
repudiated these  results  but  Platts suggests  many were  improperly  designed
or  alternative   data   interpretations   are   possible.     Platts1   overall
conclusion is "Regardless  of  the biases  in the studies, when  the  findings
of all  studies  are  considered  together   there  is  evidence   indicating  that
past  livestock  grazing  has degraded  riparian-  stream habitats  and  in  turn
decreased  fish populations".

Studies are underway in the western U.S.  testing  stream  exclosures  as  means
to  improve riparian and  stream  habitat.   These  are usually  qualitative
efforts  and  frequently  do  riot  emphasize  water  quality   or  stream  biota
surveys.   Hughes (personal  communication) observed  distinct physical  and
biological  differences between grazed and upgrazed  small streams  in  a  study
of  a  Montana  watershed.    Grouse  and Kindschy   (1982)  have  observed
consideration variation in riparian vegetation  recovery  following both  long
and short  term cattle exclosure.

Studies  conducted  in thp  Kissirnmee-Okeechobee basin,  Florida  (Council  of
Environmental  Ouality   1978), indicate   distinct  physical   and  biological
differences  that  follow everglade  stream channelization.    Nutrients  once
removed  by  riparian  vegetation  make   their  way  to  lakes  and   aid   in
accelerating  eutrophication.    The   Corps   of   Engineers   (Council   of
Environmental  Quality   1978)  is  using   the   Charles  River watershed   in
Massachusetts to  control  downstream flooding.  This project has preserved
large riparian watershed tracts  to  serve  as "sponges"  to control  abnormally
high  runoff.  The  preservation  of  southwestern playas and  their  vegetation

                           II-6-6

-------
has  assumed added  importance  following  realization  of  their  function  in
groundwater  recharge  and wildfowl  preservation  (Bolen  1982).     Prarier
potholes have  long  been  recognized  as  critical  bird arid mamma] habitat  and
recent  studies  have  demonstrated  that  they  too  act   as  nutrient  sinks,
groundwater  recharge  areas  and  as important mechanisms  to  retain  excessive
precipitation  and surface  runoff (van  de  Valk  et  al.,  1980).    Southern
bottomland  hardwood  forests are  essential   for  both indigenous  fauna  and
migratory  birds  but  also are  critical  water  management  areas  to  retain
excessive  runoff  to prevent  flooding.

The  value  of   the  freshwater  tidal   riparian  zone  to  aquatic   fauna   is
considerable.   Many  commercially  important  anandromous   fish  require  nearly
pristine  environmental  conditions to  breed.   Perhaps  the best  documented
example  is  the  Pacific  Coast Salrnonid  fishery which is  extremely  sensitive
to  physical   and  chemical  alterations.    Increased  sedimentation   and
temperatures  associated  with  riparian  vegetation  removal  can  destroy  a
historical   fishery.     Large   number   of  commercial    and   non-commercial
(sniffen,  personal   communication)  east  coast  fish  depend  on   extensive
freshwater  floodplains  during  their life cycle.    South eastern  U.S.  salt
marshes, perhaps  an extended riparian  definition,  are critical  for  numerous
commercially  important  organisms.   The  panaeid  shrimp totally  depend  on
this  environment during  the  early  stages  of their   life  cycle  (Vetter,
personal communication).   It has been  hypothesized  that these marshes  are
critical to  many near shore organisms  through  organic   carbon  export  (Odum
1973).   Several  midwestern  fish  species  also  are dependent  on  riparian
habitat, the muskelunge  requiring it for  completion  of  their  life  cycle.

Table 11-6-2 is  an  abbreviated  summary of differences  between  small  stream
with  well  developed  'riparian  zones  and streams  with   a  reduced  riparian
zone.

ASSESSMENT OF RELATIONSHIPS  BETWEEN RIPARIAN AMD AQUATIC SYSTEMS

A variety  of methods  exist  to measure  water  quality in physical,  chemical
and biological  terms.   These are  treated in Chapter  I1I-2 and will  not  be
discussed  here.   Riparian environmental  measures  are similar to  those  used
in terrestrial ecology (Mueller-Dumhois  and Ellenberg 1974).

Ties  between the  aquatic  and riparian   or the  aquatic,   riparian  and  upland
environments  can  only   be  estimated.     There   is  a   paucity   of   such
information  because of  the  extremely  high research costs  and the  inability
to devise  procedures to test experimental hypotheses.

The results  are  that  most such  evaluations  are qualitative.  Their quality
is  based  on  the  integrity  and  knowledge  of  the   person  making   the
evaluation.   The remainder  of this section  lists  physical,  chemical  and
biological  factors  which  might be considered when  evaluating the  riparian
aquatic interaction.  It  is  not meant  to be exhaustive  but only  an example
of factors affecting the interactions.

I.  Riparian Measures and Their Effect  on Water Quality
    A. Geomorphology (erosion, runoff  rate, sediment loads)
       1.  Slope
       2. Topography
       3. Parent  material


                             H-6-7

-------
    B. Soils (sediment loads, nutrient inputs, runoff  rates)
       1, Particle size distribution-           " .
       2. Porosity
       3. Field saturation
       4. Organic component
       5. Profile (presence or absence of mottling)
       fi. Cation exchange capacity
       7. Redox (Fh)
       8. pH

    C. Hydrology (water budget, flooding potential, nutrient loads)
       1. Groundwater
          a. Elevation
          b. Chemical quality
          c. Rate of movement
       2. Climatic factors
          a. Total annual rainfall and temporal distribution
             1) Chemical  quality
          b. Temperature
          c. Humidity
          d. Light

II.  Vegetative and Faunal Characteristics
    A. Floristics ("community health", disturbance levels)
       1. Presence/absence
       2. Nativity
    B. Vegetation (nutrient loads, "community health", disturbance levels)
       1. Production
       2. Biomass
       3. Decomposition
       4. Litter dynamics
          a. Detritus
             1) Size
             ?.] Transportability
             3) Quantity
       5. Plant size classes
          a. Grasses, herbs (forbs),  shrubs, trees
       6. Canopy density and cover
          a. Light intensity
       7. Cover values

    C. Fauna (community disturbance,  community health)
       1. Production
       2. Riomass
       3. Mortality

    n. Community structure
       1. Diversity
       2. Evenness
                             II-6-8

-------
III.  Physiological  Processes
    A. Transpirational  water loss (community health)
    B. Photosynthetic rates (community health)

IV.  Streambank  characteristics
    A. Stream sinvosity
    B. Stream bank  stability (sediment loads, habitat availability)
                            II-6-9

-------
°SECTION III :  CHEMICAL EVALUATIONS

-------
                                  CHAPTER  III-l
                              WATER QUALITY  INDICES
One of the most effective ways of communicating  information  on  environ-
mental trends  to  policy  makers  and  the general  public  is  by use  of
indices.  Many water  quality  indices  have been developed which  seek  to
summarize a  number  of water  quality parameters into a  single  numerical
index.  As with all indices the various  components  need to  be  evaluated
in  addition to  the  single  number.     U.S.  EPA  (1978)   published  an
excellent  review  of  water  quality  indices  entitled  "Water  Quality
Indices:    A Survey  of Indices  Used  in  the U.S." which  provides  the
reader  with the   types  of  indices  used by  various  water  pollution
control  agencies.    The purpose  of  this  chapter  is  to  identify  and
explain the  various  indices  that would  be  applicable  to  a  use  attain-
ability analysis.   The choice of  indices is at  the  discretion of  the
States and  will  primarily be dictated  by the water quality  parameters
traditionally analyzed  by the State.

NATIONAL SANITATION FOUNDATION INDEX  (NSFI)/WATER  QUALITY  INDEX (WQI)

Brown  et   al  (1970)  presented  a   water quality  index  based  upon  a
national  survey  of water  quality experts.   In this survey  respondents
were  asked  (1)  which variables  should  be included  in a  water  quality
index,  (?.}  the  importance  (weighting)  of  each  variable  and   (3)  the
rating scales  (sub-index  relationships) to  be  used  for each  variable.
Based on this survey, nine variables  were  identified:   dissolved oxygen
pH, nitrates,  phosphates,  temperature,  turbidity,  total  solids,  fecal
coliform,  and  Fi-day  biochemical  oxygen  demand.   Appropriate  weights
were  assigned to each  parameter.   The index is arithmetic  and  is  based
on the equation:

WQIA  = £ w-uq.
where:  WQIA"= the water quality index,  a number  between 0  and  100.
            %•„= a quality  rating  using the rating  transformation curve.
            u>^= relative weight of the   th  parameter  such that     =1.

Figures A-l-9 show the rating curves and  relative weights  for  each  of
the  parameters.    To determine  the  water  quality  index  follow  these
steps:
        (1)  determine the measured  values  for  each parameter
        (2)  determine   q  for  an  individual  parameter  by finding the
             appropriate value from  curves  (Figures A  1-9)
        (3)  multiply  by the weight  (w)  listed  on  each  figure
        (4)  add the wq  for all parameters  to determine the  water
             quality  index (a  number from 0-100)

The water  quality  index  can  then   be compared  to a  "worst" or "best"
case  stream. Examples of a best  and worst  quality  stream cases  follow:
                            in-i

-------
                              Best Quality  Stream

Measured
values

Individual
quality
rating
(q-J


Weights
(WL)
Overall
quality
rating
(q^x w;. )
DO, percent sat.
Fecal  coliform
  density, $ /100 ml
PH
BOO  mg/1
Nitrate, mg/1
Phosphate, mg/1
Temperature °C
  departure from equil
Turbidity, units
Total  sol ids, mg/1
100

  0
7.0
0.0
0.0
0.0

0.0
  0
 25
 98

100
 92
100
 98
 98

 94
 98
 84
0.17

0.15
0.11
0.11
0.10
0.10

0.10
0.08
0.08
                                           WQI=!wLqL=  96.3
                            Worst  Quality  Stream
Parameters
DO. percent sat.             0
Fecal  coliform
  density, # /]00 ml         5
pH                           2
BOD , mg/1                   30
Nitrate, mg/1               100
Phosphate, mg/1              10
Temperature °C
  departure from equil    +15
Turhidity, units          100
Total  solids, mg/1        500
                4
                4
                8
                2
                fi

               10
               18
               20
               0.17

               0.15
               0.11
               0.11
               0.10
               0.10

               0.10
               0.08
               0.08
16.7

15.0
10.1
11.0
 9.8
 9.8
 9.4
 7.8
 6.7

Measured
s values

Individual
quality
rating
(qj


Wei ghts
(W;)
Overall
quality
rating
(q;x WL)
               0

             0.6
             0.4
             0.9
             0.2
             0.6
             2.4
                                                       7.5
                                  lll-l-l

-------
                      WTE1 OUM.ITY 1»DC
M
A
T
C
II

a
u
A
L
I
T
Y
          AIJTHHIT1C
           20   «   60   30   100  120  1W

               uiitotvto OXYCU. I uruuTioa
                                                    UWTI
100
90
80
70
60
SO
«
30
20
10
n







/
/
^





/
/
/
/'
'7
/ .
X


/
/'
/
/
/ ,
i/
/
/

/
/
/
/
//
//
f
1
/
;




/
'/
/'








^
\









\
\^
\
'^




































                                                1-0.17
                                                MU:
                                                 MB 0.0. >1VZ UT,
M
A
T
I
                      *TIR OMLiTY 1KB

                        FtCAL
A*ITW«TtC MCAII
                                      BOX
1UU
30
70
60
SO
M3
30
2C
1C
n
\
\
|
\
1







\
V

\
\
*t






N,
^


\
\



^"^


\
^>


\


•^,



\
>


\_
\

N




\



\
\

\




\





\



^
^v,




\
y



\,





V
\



'v.





t
\
V


X







N
'\










k\

"^N







^4

	








X
-
                          102      103       1C4       10S

      FECAL COU'OftftS, AVCIUAC MUHteR Of QMANIkNS fVt 100 H
                          ritur* A-2
                                                             OT MM UK SC&U

                                                               IHTOMtATIM
                                                                MOTE:
                                   IIT-l-2

-------
H
A
T
c
Q
u
A
I
I
T
Y
                       MFC* QUALITY INOU

                               Hi


                                	30Z
90
80
70
GO
SO
40
30
20
10
n


_





x
X* _^.






•
j
'
X


•
/
/
/
1
1
/
/

i
i


1
1
1
f

i

/
l!
f


I
I
i


^

\
\








\
\
\\
\\
• \
i
i
i
V
\
V
\
y
\
. i


\
\
\







\
\
\
X
\
^








Xv.
^-
       234S678910UU

                            J>H.  UNITS
                           fi<;ur» A-J
                                                                     0.12
                       MTU QUALITY INDEX


                              M05


            A«I7MflCTIC ft**       	802 COMIOMCl LJWJTI
 M
 A
 T
 c
 II

 a
 u
 A
 L
 I
 T
 y
100


70


50
20
10
^
>
\
\
1\
i \
i
i
i
\
\
\
i


\
\
\



\
\


\
\
's


\
\



\






*
S
t
\


N







\
\
\

""N^.







v%
x
•^_








































             5    10   IS   20   25   30

                           •ooS. ns/u
     0.10
MOTX:

 KM 1005 '50.
                        III-1-3

-------
                      *!U
M
A
T
c
0
•J
k.
L
I
T
Y
•MM*
100
so
70
60
SO
50
20
10
{\
" AtiTXfcnc r
h

1
1\
j\
i
i
i
i
i
	 i
I
X
V




\
\




X





\


•ITVATU
*** — -— JQJ O»f IBMCl UJUTS


\
\
\











\
\
\

\








\
\

~*>«








\.
X
*^*.









— .



















^.

                                                            H -0.1D
                                                           •on:
                                                               »1T»ATES
           1£20304050607D8Q90100
                               A- 5
                                     1WU
TOTAL ftWHATU
" AUtTWCTtC KAII "••"• 802 COttflMKS UNITS
lour
90
80
A 70
[ 60
S 50
A
\ w
T
Y 30
20
^3
n
\
\
1 \

\\
\\
\\
I
i
i
i
i
1 i
i

\%
"\



\
\




\
"N-



\





"x
\



^^





».
*N


•-*.






\


•**c






k

r







\
\v
•«MMM>
• 1








•-»,
•H^MM^
i^HMM








NMMBM
^MMUW
• - 0.
•OTt:
KM TOTAL
|
                                                                          2.
                       TTTAt PHOSPHATES. Mft/L
                             fl»ur« A-4
                     III-1-4

-------
                     MATE* OUAUTY
H
A
T
c
I

a
u
A
I
I
T
y
                                     8QZ coviocua umr»
100
90
80
70
60
SO
*0
20
20
10
n


/
/


I
/
/
/
/
/
>
/l\
i
y
•
/






^k
^
V \
\
I






\

\
\
\
\

1
\
\_
<
\
%
v

\
\
\
\
V
V

^s
\

^_





\
^

\
>,







\^

xj









«^





















-5        0        5

   DC WEES COT! MADE
                                  10
                                                      H-O.JO
                                                 NOTE:

                                                  H)A
                                                                 OCVUTlttl
                                                              5.
                              A- 7
                                    FKGM EfiUlLIMtUH TEWCMTURC (0)
                            !«EX
                      MAICI
          A««TW«Tje KM       -- —  KB cttVtMMCI UMTS
100
90
? *
I «J
3 so
A
\ «
T
y 30
20
10
n

i\
I
\
\
''




F=

\
\


\
\
\


—- ».



\



\
\

	




s



V
•*,^




s





x




X.




\










V




\




xx




^^





X






                                                            H • O.Ot
                                                        wn:
                                                             luaifiin '100 JTU
                                , UNITS

-------
H
A
r
i
R

Q
U
A
L
I
T
T
           A«IT«TIC
                       QUALITY


                     TOTAV  MklDS

                           ---  30Z
                                                     UWTi
     90
     80
60

50

40

JO

20

10

 0
                                          I
X
     »  •  o.os


BTI:
 f<3»  TOTAL  KXIOS
 *500 «/u     - 2C.
            SO   1001502Q02S030Q550«OQ4SOSQa

                       TOTAL SOLIDS.
                             III-i-G

-------
DINIIJS WATER QUALITY  INDEX          ''•      •_ ''.   ., '',

In  107?,  Dinius  proposed a water quality  index as' part of a  larger  social
accounting   system   designed   to   evaluate   water   pollution   control
expenditures.  This index  includes  11  variables and  like the  NSFI,  it has a
scale which decreases with  increased  pollution,  ranging from  n to 100.   The
index is  computed  as  the weighted  sum  of  its  sub  indices.   The 11 variables
included  in  the  index  are:   dissolved  oxygen,  biological  oxygen  demand,
Eschericia  col i ,  alkalinity,  hardness,  sp-ecific  conductivity,  chlorides,
pH,  temperature,  coliform, and  color.   This  index  is  unique in that  the
calculated  water quality  index  could  be matched to  specific water  uses.
Hinius proposed  different   descriptor  language for  different  index  ranges
depending  on  the specific  water  use  under consideration as  illustrated  in
Figure A- 100.  The index values  can be derived  from  the following formula:

                     -O-fcHl              -630
0
+
+
+
= 5(DO) +
5 +
-6.1
535 (SC)
1
B4(ALK)
.5
214(ROO)
9
tftf
+ 62
+
+ 10
+
+ 400(5E.Coli)
+ 4
-6.1°? /.?
.9(C1) + 10
.5
+R
1 +
+ 300(Coli )
+ 3
1
(Ta-Ts) + 224 +
2 +


128(C)
1
 Note:   If  the pH  is  between 6.7  and  7.3, 100  should  be substituted  for
        for  the  pH  expression.     If  pH  is  greater  than   7.3,   the   pH
        expression  should be  10

      DO = dissolved oxygen in percent  saturation
     BOD = biological oxygen  demand  in  mg/1
  E.coli = Fschericia coli as E.coli  per ml
    Coli = col iform per ml
      SC = specific conductivity expressed  in microhms per  cm  at  25°C
      Cl = chlorides in mg/1
      HA = hardness as ppm CaCO
     ALK = alkalinity as  ppm  CaCO
      pH = pH units
      Ta = actual  temperature
      Ts = standard temperature (average monthly  temperature)
       C = Color units

Once  the  quality  unit  is  determined  based  on  the  above  calculation,  a
comparison to  Figure A-lfl  should   reveal  the  quality of  the  water  for  a
specific use.

HARK.INS/KENDALL HATER QUALITY INDEX

A statistical  index was  developed  by Harkins  (1974)  using a  nonparametric
classification  procedure  developed  by  Kendall  (1963).   The  procedure  was
summarized by Harkins by  the  following  four steps:

(1) For  each water  quality   parameter  used,  choose  a minimum or maximum
value  as   a   starting   point.   This  sector   of  values   is   the  control
observation frorn which standardized  distances will  be  computed.
                              III-1-7

-------
meat
  100
   80
   70
   60
   20
   10
PUBIPI-
CATIOB
SOT
rZCESSAST
xnoB
PDRIPI-
CATI03
IKXS3ABT
B1KM12G
WBZ
ataarvz
DOUBT TOX
H
0
T
C
C
Z
P
T
A
B
L
E
ACCZPT-
ABXZ
IOT
ALL
HATER
spoars
BXCOXUC
STHL
ACCEPT-
ABLE
BACTEaiA
COUBT
DOUBT7TO
poa
VATZB
COSTACT
OSLT
B3ATIBG
SO VATEB
COKTACt
OBVIOTS
POL1OTIOH
APPZABDIG
OBVIOUS
POLLCTIOS
IOT
ACCZPT-
ABLS
ACCEPT-
POB
AUr-
rzsB
KABOIXAI.
poa
TBOUT
DOUBT PUI
POB
szssrrivz
PISH
HA23T
PISH
OILT
COABSZ
PISH
OILT
0
T
C
C
Z
P
T
A
B
L
R
PUBIPI-
CAIIOH
IOT
MHO*
PTOIPI-
CATIOB
I2CZSSAK7
POB
XUVSTRT
stSQtlXSZVG
QUALITT
vim
10
IZC2SSABT
POB
IORKAI
mrosrai
EZTESSIVE
TaZATKDT
poa
MOST
UDOSTBT
BOUGH
USZ
OHLT
IOT
ACCZPT-
/
t
(
<
1
i
5
I
\
]
J
>
^
[
•
t
!
P
r
L
)
i
I
t
OBVIOUS
PoiiUTioa
JLPPZARZ9G
OBVIOUS
POLLUTION
KOT
ACCEPT-
ABLE
t
i
(
(
J
]
1
I
I
1
J
>
t
L
«
•
I
5
>
>
L
1
|
f
«OT
ACCEPT-
ABLE
          Public  S«cr«atlon    Pish
          Water             Shellfish
          Supply                and
                            Wildlife
Industrial   Kavi-
   and      gallon
  igri-
 cultural
                    p.

                 Fig. 10  GenenU rating Kile for the quality unit.
treated
 Vast*
 Trass-
portatlon
                           III-l-E

-------
(2)  Rank  each  column of  water  quality  parameters  including  the  control
value.  Tied ranks are split  in the  usual manner.

(3) Compute the rank  variance  for  each parameter  using  the  equation:
      Variance  (Ri ) =^x  [(n3-  n)  - .l:(tit  - tK)]
 where:  i = l,2...p,                 -'"'
         p = the number of parameter being used
         n  =  the  number  of  observations   plus  the   number   of  control
             points,  and
         k = the number of ties encountered.

These variances are used to standardize the  indices  computed.
     For  each  member  of  observation  vector,   compute  the   standardized
distances:
 where R is the rank of the control value.

This index  is  meant  as  a  method for summarizing  a  large amount of data  to
present  a   concise  picture  of overall  trends.   This  method  provides  a
simple,  expedient  method  whereby one  station  can be compared  with another
or  previous time  periods  from a particular  station may  be compared  with
another  time period at the  same  station.   A detailed example of this  index
may be found in Harkins (1974).

OTHER INDICES

Many other  water quality  indices have  been  developed; some  being variations
of  the   indices described  previously.    Several  States  (Georgia, Oregon,
Nevada,  Illinois)   have   developed   their  own  systems   based   on   the
characteristics of the water bodies  of the  State.    McOuffie  and   Haney
(1973) proposed an eight-variable  water quality index which was applied  to
streams  in   Mew York State.
                            III-1-9

-------
                                 CHAPTER  111-2

                     pH, HARDNESS,  ALKALINITY  AND SALINITY
INTRODUCTION
The chemical composition and the chemical  interactions of the  aquatic  environ-
ment exert  an  important influence on  the aquatic life  of  a water body.  Many
chemical constituents  in a  body  of water  have the ability to  alter the  toxic-
ity of  specific  pollutants, or  to protect  organisms  from  toxic materials  by
removing them  or  by blocking their  action.  The  importance  to aquatic life  of
four water  quality  parameters  -  pH,  alkalinity,  hardness   and  salinity  -  is
discussed in this  section.

pH

The pH  of water  is a measure of its acid  or  alkaline  nature.  Specifically,  it
is  an  expression  of the  hydrogen  ion activity  of  the solution. Hydrogen  ion
activity is mathematically  related to  the  hydrogen ion concentration  [H  ]5  and
for most natural  waters these may  be considered  equivalent.  pH  is  expressed  as
the negative logarithm of the hydrogen  ion concentration:

       pH = - log  [H+]

The water molecule, H20, ionizes  to yield one hydrogen  and one  hydroxyl ion:

       H20 *=  H+ + OH"

The equilibrium expression for this reaction is:
The  concentration  of water,  [HJD],  is  considered  to be  a  constant,  and  the
equation simplifies to:

       K  = [H+][OH"] = 10"14
        W

Because the  product of  the  concentration of both  ions  is always 10"   ,  when
they are equal to each other,

       [H+] = [OH"] = 10"7, and

       pH = - log (10~7) = 7.

At pH 7 the solution is neutral. When there are  more hydrogen  ions  than  hydrox-
yl ions, the  pH  is  less  than 7 and  the solution is  acidic. When there are  more
hydroxyl ions, the pH is greater than 7 and the  solution  is alkaline.
                                    III-2-1

-------
The pH of most natural fresbwaters in the U.S.  is between 6 and 9.  It  is inter-
esting to  note that  the pH  of  most  ocean waters  falls in  a much  narrower
range, 8.1 to 8.3 (Warren 1971). This is due to the presence  of several  buffer-
ing systems in salt  water which control  pH changes.  In freshwater,  pH  is regu-
lated primarily by  the  carbonate buffer system. Biological  activities  such  as
photosynthesis  or   respiration  can  cause  significant  diel  variations   i.i  pH.
Extreme pH values or  variations in  pH can  be  caused by  pollution such  as  acid
mine drainage.

Importance to Aquatic Life

The importance  of  pH  to  aquatic  organisms  resides primarily  in its effect  on
other environmental  factors. In general, the change in  pH itself is  not  direct-
ly harmful. Rather,  the impact on aquatic life  accompanies a  change  in  an asso-
ciated variable such  as the  solubility  or  toxicity of a  toxic  pollutant.  The
pH  range  6.5-9.0 is  considered to  be  generally  protective  for fish   and  the
range 5.0-9.0 is not considered directly lethal (EIFAC  1965).

Aquatic  organisms  have  protective  membranes  and  internal  regulatory  systems
which afford  a degree  of  protection from  the  direct  effects of hydrogen  and
hydroxyl  ions. The  indirect effects of  pH seem to  Intensify  as the  pH  deviates
from the optimum (EIFAC 1969).

The degree of  dissocation of  weak acids  is  pri-dependent  and thus the  toxicity
of  several  common  pollutants  is affected.  Ammonia  (NH-^),   hydrogen  sulfide
(HS), and  hydrocyanic  acid  (HCN)  are   xamples.  Under  low  pH  conditions  the

NhU molecule ionizes and becomes the NH^  ion (Thurston,  et al.  1974). The tox-
icity of ammonia is attributed to the un-ionized form (NH^),  so  that  increased
pH conditions result in increased levels of the tox-'c un-ionized fraction.

The  lower  the  pH,  the  smaller  the  degree of dissociation of hydrocyanic acid
to hydrogen  and  cyanide ions. The molecular form  (HCN)  is the  toxic  form,  and
so the toxicity  of  cyanide  is  favored  by  low pH.  The undissociated form of  hy-
drogen  sulfide   (HpS)  is  the  primary  source of  sulfide  toxicity.  Therefore,
under  low  pH conditions,  very  little  H2S  is dissociated, and  toxicity  is  in-
creased.

The  solubility  of  toxic metals  is  a function  of  pH.  Metals in water  tend to
form complexes with  such  anions as  sulfate, carbonate or  hydroxide.  The solu-
bility of these  complexes increases with  decreasing  pH,  as illustrated  for  hy-
droxides in  Figure  III-2-1,  so  that  low  pH  conditions  may  cause the  release of
metals  from sediment  deposits  into the  water column.  Metal  toxicity  is  be-
lieved  to  be related  to  the total  metal  concentration  (i.e.,  free  ions plus
complexed  ions)  in  solution (Calavari  et al . 1980). Table  III-2-1 illustrates
the effect of pH on metal  concentrations in natural waters.
Due  to  the complexity  of  its  interactions  with  elements of  the  environment,
there may  be  several  mechanisms  by which  pH  affects  toxicity.  The  exact mecha-
                                    II1-2-2

-------
 CD
 O
                                                     1    I     I   \l     I
                                                         10         12
14
                                         PH
Figure III-2-1.   Relationship  Between  pH  and Solubility of Metallic Hydroxides
                                   III-2-3

-------
TABLE III-2-1.
CONCENTRATION (ug/1)  OF METALS
ACIDITIES (From Haines, 1981).
IN LAKE WATERS OF VARIOUS
Local itv

102 lakes, Ontario (average)
Blue Chalk Like, Ontario
Like i'anadie, .Smlhiirv. Ontario
North Sweden (range)
Central Norwav (range)
North Norway (range)

South-central Ontario, 14 lakes
(average)
Nelson Lake, Ontario

Four lakes, Ontario (average)
Clearwater Like, Suclhurv. Ontario
Four lakes. Sudburv, Ontario (average)
West coast Sweden (range)
Southeast Nonvav (range)
Lake l-angtjern, Norwav (average)
South Nornav (range)
A
-------
nism of  direct  toxicity  of pH in water  is  not  certain.  It has been  suggested
that at  very  low  pH  values,  oxygen  uptake may be affected and this may be the
toxic event. Acid-base regulation and  ionoregulation  appear to be affected  at
higher,  but still acidic,  pH  values  (Graham and Wood 1981). There is  evidence
that the  chronic  effects of pH  on  fish  include effects  on reproduction, such
as reduced egg production and hatchability  (Peterson, et al. 1980), and on be-
havior  (Mount  1973).  Some mobile organisms may  have  the ability  to  avoid low
pH conditions  if  the detrimental conditions  are localized. Evidence  suggests
(U.S. EPA  1960,  p.  180) that  outside  a  range of  6.5  to 9.0,  fish suffer ad-
verse physiological  effects which increase  in severity  as the degree  of devi-
ation  increases.  Tables  III-2-2  and III-2-3  present  pH  values that  have been
found to cause adverse effects on a number  of fish  species  in  the  field and  in
laboratory  investigations,  respectively.  These  values represent  only the low
end of  the  tolerated  range of pH .  (The lower limit is most often  exceeded due
to  anthropogenic  causes  such  as   acid  rainfall,   acid   mine  drainage  and
industrial discharges.)

Marine organisms, as a group, tend to  be  much less  tolerant of extreme pH con-
ditions. As mentioned previously, the  marine  environment is buffered  more ef-
fectively than  freshwater.  As a  result,  these  organisms  have not evolved  an
ability to cope with  pH variations outside  their narrow  optimum range.

ALKALINITY

Alkalinity  is  the property of water which  resists or buffers against changes
in pH  upon  addition  of  acid or  base.  The primary  buffer in freshwater is the
carbonate-bicarbonate system.  Phosphates,  borates,  and organic acids  also im-
part buffer capacity to water. These additional  buffer systems are more signi-
ficant in saltwater than in freshwater.

Bicarbonate (HC03") is the major form of  alkalinity. Carbon dioxide (C02) dis-
solved  in water  is  carbonic  acid  (HpCO-j). .Carbonic acid dissociates in two
steps to form bicarbonate and carbonate (CO- ) ions as  follows:
                                  HC03
       HC03" ^ H  + C03
The  ability  of  these chemical  reactions  to  shift  back and forth with  changes
in hydrogen  ion  concentration (pH) to  "absorb"  these changes is what  imparts
buffer capacity. This system tends to control  pH  best  in  the neutral  range.

The  form  of alkalinity  in  solution  is governed by  pH.  Figure  III-2-2  illus-
trates this  effect.  Biological activities such  as photosynthesis and  respir-
ation  cause  shifts  in pH and in  the  relative concentrations  of the forms  of
alkalinity, without significant effect on the total alkalinity.  The  production
of CO? during  respiration shifts  the equilibrium to the  right,  toward  carbon-
ate  formation.  The removal   of CO,, from  solution  during algal  photosynthesis
shifts the alkalinity equilibrium to  the left,  toward  the bicarbonate form.
                                    III-2-5

-------
TABLE  III-2-2.
SPECIES OF  FISH THAT  CEASED  REPRODUCING,  DECLINED,  OR  DISAP-
PEARED  FROM NATURAL POPULATIONS  AS A RESULT  OF  ACIDIFICATION
FROM ACID  PRECIPITATION,  AND THE  APPARENT pH AT WHICH  THIS
OCCURRED  (From Haines, 1981).
              Familv and species
                                                               Apparent pH at which population ceased
                                                                reproduction, declined, or disappeared
Salmonidae
  l.ake trout Salvflinus ruimateuxh
  Brook trout Salvelinta fonttnala
  Aurora trout Salvelimis fonlinalu timagamtensts
  Arctic char Sali'elinus alpinus
  Rainbow trout Salmo frairtintri
  Brown trout Salmo trutta
  Atlantic salmon Salmo saiar
  Lake herring Corrgonus artedii
  Lake whitefish Coregonus clufieaformis

Esocidae
  Northern pike Eiox Lucius

Cyprinidae
  Golden shiner Notemigonus cntoleucas
  Common shiner Nttropit corniuus
  Lake chub Couesius plumbrus
  Bluntnose minnow Pimephales notatus
  Roach Radius ruttlus

Cutostomidae
  White sucker Catostomvs commmoni

Ictaluridae
  Brown bullhead Ictaiurus neimlosus

Percopsidae
  Trout-perch Percopsa omiscoma\cus
Cadidae
  Burbot Lota lota
Cemrarchidae
  Smallmoutli bass Microptrrus dolomtna
  Ijrueinouih bass Microptrrus ialmoiilr*
  Rock bass Ambloplitn rupt\tru
  Puinpkinseed Lepoma grA6osui
  Bluei;ill Lrpomis  mncrofhina

Perculae
  Johunv daner EthrcKtoma nignim
  Iowa darter Ethrostoma extle
  Walleve Sttzostrtiion v. vitrnim
  Yellow perch Perca ftavncrns
  European perch Prrtaflttrintilis
                                           5.2-5.5   ; 5.2-5.8   ; 4.4-0.8
                                           4.5-1.8   ; -5
                                           5.0-5.5
                                           — 5
                                           5.5-6.0
                                           5.0   ; 5.0-5.5   ; 4.5-5.5
                                           5.0-5.5
                                           4.5-4.7   ; <4.7   ; 4.4
                                           <4.4


                                           4.7-5.2   ; 4.2-5.0


                                           4.8-5.2
                                           <5.7
                                           4.5-4.7
                                           5.7-6.0
                                           5.3-5.7
                                           4.7-5.2
                                           4.5-5.2
                                            5.2-5.5
                                            5.5-rt.O
                                            5.5-6.0
                                            4.4-5.2
                                            4.7-5.2
                                            4.7-5.2
                                            <4.2
                                            5.0-5.9
                                            4.8-5.9
                                            5.5-0.0
                                            4.5-4.8
                                            5.0-5.5
:  4.2-5.0


;  4.6-5.0




5.2-5.8


>5.5    ; -5.8    ;  4.4-5.0

;  4.2-5.0
5.2-5.H
<4.7    ; 4.2-4.4
                                              III-2-6

-------
TABLE III-2-3.  VALUES OF pH FOUND IN LABORATORY EXPERIMENTS TO CAUSE VARIOUS
                ADVERSE EFFECTS ON FISH SPECIES (From Haines, 1981).
Family and
species
Salmonidae
Brook trout
Arctic char
Rainbow trout
Brown (rout
Atlantic salmon


Ejocidac
Northern pike
Cvprinidae
Roach
Fathead minnow
Catosiomidae
White sucker
Percidae
Luropran perch
Increased monalitv
Juveniles Reduced
hmbrV° Fn »r adults srovv.h Other effects
g'g jA 45 ('r> Reduced t-KU viabililv: 5.0
' ., '*•' 4.(i lissuc (l.iin.iK«-: 5 2
4-J 6.1 3.5
4.8
55 4.3 3.(1-1.1 1.8
4.0 5.0
4.1
"Vg ' Tissue damage: 5.0
S 9 4^3
4.0 5.0
4.0-5.5
4.1

5.0

5.6
5-9 5'9 2'' 4.5 Reduced egK viability: G 6
4'5 5':5 4.5 Cc.ised leeding: 4 5
"*•" Bone defonnitv: 4.2 ; 5.0
5.6
5.5
                                III-2-7

-------
         100
    O
    O

    "c5
    "o
    h-
    c
    O
    O
    k.
    03
    Q.
          50
                                       HCO
                                          8

                                         PH
                                                        10
11
FIGURE III-2-2.  The relationship between pH  and the forms  of

Importance to Aquatic Life
                                                                  in water.
The  forms  of  alkalinity are biologically  significant  because they serve  as  a
source of  the essential elements carbon,  oxygen,  and hydrogen. When  free CO^
is  not   available,  algae  are  capable  of using  bicarbonate  as  their  carbon
source. Free  CO^  in  solution  regulates a  variety of  biological  processes  such
as  seed  germination, plant  growth   (photosynthesis),  respiration,  and  oxygen
transport in the blood.

Alkalinity is critical to the maintenance of  healthy conditions in  aquatic  sys-
tems, particularly where they  are stressed  by  pollution. Alkalinity  helps  to
maintain pH in the optimum range for  biological  activities. The impact  of acid-
ic  wastes  such as coal  ash  or basic wastes  such  as metal  plating  discharges
can  be moderated  to  a degree by the  natural  buffering  capacity  of  the receiv-
ing  water. The  indirect effects  of  alkalinity on toxicity  are also important.
In  particular,  alkalinity  reacts  with  the   toxic  soluble  metal  fraction  in
                                    III-2-8

-------
water to  form Insoluble carbonate  and  hydroxide  precipitates. Figure  III-2-3
illustrates that  the concentration of  heavy  metals  drops  rapidly as the  concen-
tration of  carbonate  increases.  Metals  which are  precipitated from the water
column are effectively removed from the aquatic environment and no  longer rep-
resent an immediate source  of toxicity to  aquatic  life.
     O)
     o
Figure III-2-3.  Relationships of metallic carbonate  solubility and  carbonate
                 concentrations
HARDNESS

Water  hardness  generally refers to  the capacity  of  the water to  precipitate
soap from  solution.  The  constituents  which impart  hardness to water are poly-
valent cations,  chiefly  calcium (Ca)  and magnesium (Mg). These form insoluble
complexes with  a variety  of  anions,  notably the  salts  of organic  acids
(soaps). By  convention,  hardness  is  reported on  the  basis  of equivalence as
mg/1 calcium carbonate (CaCO,).

Hardness  cations are  primarily  associated with carbonate  or sulfate anions.
Calcium  and  magnesium carbonate are  referred to  as  carbonate hardness. When
the anion  is  other  than  carbonate, such as sulfate or nitrate, this is  refer-
red to as  noncarbonate hardness.  Because alkalinity  and hardness are both ex-
                                    III-2-9

-------
pressed as  mg/1  CaCO^,  it can  be  concluded  that  carbonate alkalinity will be
responsible for forming carbonate  hardness and  that  hardness  in excess of the
alkalinity is noncarbonate.

Importance to Aquatic Life

Hardness,  the capacity of water to precipitate soap, is an aesthetic  consider-
ation important to potable water supply. The importance of hardness to aquatic
life is related to the ions which  impart hardness to water. There is  some evi-
dence to  suggest  that  hard water  environments  are  more favorable for aquatic
life  because  they  support  more  diverse  and abundant  biological  communities
(Reid 1961).

There is a  large body of  evidence  that  hardness mediates the toxicity of heavy
metals to aquatic organis^. Mathematical  correlations  between the toxicity of
several heavy  metals  (Cr   ,  Pb, Ag,  Ni, Zn, Cd,  and Cu)  have been developed.
Table  III-2-4  presents  the equations  (taken  from the  Water  Quality  Criteria
Documents) which enable the calculation of allowable metal concentrations as a
function of  hardness.  Although increased hardness can  be correlated  directly
with decreased toxicity,  the mechanism of this effect is not certain.  Two dif-
ferent mechanisms have been  proposed,  one chemical and  one  biological.  Cala-
mari, et al.  (1980)  have  reviewed  the  literature concerning  these mechanisms,
and discussed both with  regard  to  their  own experimental data.

Hardness may operate through  two chemical mechanisms to  reduce heavy metal tox-
icity. Complexation  of the  toxic   metal with  carbonate  might  be the  mechanism
if  the  free  metal  ion  is  the toxic species. Data may  be  found  in the litera-
ture  to  support  (Stiff  1971,  Pagenkopf et  al.  1974,   Calamari  and  Marchetti
1975, Andrew et al.  1977), or contradict (Shaw and Brown  1974, Calamari et al.
1980) this suggestion. It is also  possible that it is the  calcium or  magnesium
ion alone,  rather  than  the associated  carbonate, that  is protective. Carroll
et  al. (1979) present data which show that the calcium ion, much more  than mag-
nesium, seems to reduce  cadmium toxicity to brook  trout.

Further, the  question  remains  whether  the  hardness  ions  are  antagonistic to
the  action  of  the  toxic  metals   and  they  may  function  biologically through
competitive inhibition of metal uptake  or  binding of  sites of action. Kinkade
and Erdman  (1975)  published  data   to support  the  uptake inhibition mechanism.
Lloyd  (1965)  suggests that  calcium  has  a protective  effect  on fish gill
tissue,  an organ  which  is  significantly  involved  in  heavy  metal  uptake.
Calcium has  been shown  to decrease gill  permeability  to water,  which  would
influence metal uptake (Maetz and  Bornancin 1975).
                                    III-2-10

-------
     TABLE III-2-4.  DEPENDENCE  OF  HEAVY  METAL  TOX1CITY  ON  WATER  HARDNESS*

      	Metal	     Calculation of  Maximum Allowable  Concentration


      Cadmium (Cd)                 e^'05^ ^rdness}]-3.73)

      Chromium (Cr+3)              e'1'08^ (hardness )>3.48)

      Copper (Cu)                  e(0.94[ln (hardness)]-!.23)

      Lead (Pb)                     e(1^22[ln (hardness)]-0.47)

      Nicke1  (N1)                  e(0.76[ln (hardness)>4.02)

      Silver (Ag)                  ed.72[ln (hardness )]-6.52)


      Z1nc (Zn)                     e(0.83[ln (hardness)]+1.95)
   EPA Ambient Water Quality Criteria Documents  (1980]
There is  evidence  that calcium may  be  protective against  the toxic  action  of
pollutants other than  metals.  Hillaby and  Randal  (1979)  found that  increased
calcium  concentration   decreased  the  acute  toxicity   of  ammonia  to  rainbow
trout. Calcium  concentration  has  also been associated with  increased  survival
of fish in acidic conditions (Haranath et al.  1978).

SALINITY

Salinity  is  a  measure  of  the  weight of  dissolved  salts per  unit  volume  of
water. The  chloride  content of water, the  chlorinity,  is strongly  correlated
with  salinity.   In  freshwater, the   total  concentration  of  ionic  components
constitutes salinity.  The  major anions  are commonly carbonate, chloride,  sul-
fate,  and nitrate.  The predominant  associated cations  are sodium,  calcium,
potassium, and magnesium.

The  source  of  these  materials  is the substrate upon  which  tne water  lies  and
the  earth through  and  over which  water flows. The salinity of a given  body  of
water is  a function  of  the  quantity  and  quality of  inflow,  rainfall,  and  evap-
oration.

Importance to Aquatic Life

Salinity  has an  impact  on  a variety  of  parameters related to  oiological  func-
                                    III-2-11

-------
tions. It controls the ability of organisms to  live  in  or  pass  through  various
waters.  It  also  has  an  effect  on  the  presence  of various  food or habitat-
forming plants.

Salinity is  important  not  only in an  absolute  sense,  but  the degree of  vari-
ation in the salinity of a given water  is  biologically  important. The invasion
of species to  or  from fresh  or saltwater depends on their ability to tolerate
changes in salinity. Rapid changes in salinity  cause disruption of osmoregula-
tion  in  aquatic organisms  and  can  cause plasmolysis in plants. Organisms that
can  tolerate  a  range of  salinity  can  frequently  use salinity  gradients  to
evade less tolerant predators.

Salinity is important to the heat capacity of aquatic systems.  As salinity  in-
creases, the specific  heat  of  water  decreases. This  means that there  is less
heat  required to warm the water.  Temperature  is  a  significant  factor  in  biolog-
ical activity and  governs many  physical  processes  in  water  as  well.

Salinity also governs the dissolved oxygen concentration in water. For  a  given
temperature,  the   solubility  of  oxygen  decreases  with  increasing  salinity.
Table  III-2-6  illustrates  this effect. The  dissolved  oxygen concentration is
among the most  critical  of  all  water  quality  parameters  to  aquatic life.

The  ions which  make  up  the total salinity of water have individual  effects as
well. The effects  of calcium, magnesium, and  carbonate have been discussed pre-
viously with respect to  their effect  on the toxicity of pollutants.  Several of
the ions (e.g., nitrate,  and  potassium)  are plant  nutrients.

Aquatic  organisms  have  evolved  a variety  of  physiological adaptations  to  the
salinity of their environments. These adaptations are largely related to  their
osmoregulatory  systems whose primary  function  is to  solve the problem of  the
difference between the salt concentration of the  internal   fluids  of  the organ-
ism  and  the  salt  concentration  of  the  surrounding water.   Freshwater organisms
must  maintain  an  internal  salt  concentration  against the   tendency  to  gain
water  from  and lose  salts to  the  environment.  Osmoregulation in  freshwater
fish  results in the production of high  volumes  of liquid waste  with  a low salt
concentration.   In  contrast,  marine  organisms  must  maintain  an internal  salt
concentration that  is  lower  than that  of  the environment, against  a tendency
to lose water  and  gain salts. Osmoregulation in salt water fish results in  the
production of  small  volumes  of  liquid waste carrying  a  relatively  high salt
concentration.

The  gills and  kidneys  of both  types  of fish are  specially developed to accom-
plish these actions against the  natural environmental gradient. Therefore,  the
nature of these systems  governs the ability of  organisms to  survive  in  regions
of varying salinity or to successfully migrate through them.
                                    III-2-12

-------
.„
   760
Temper*'
af
ture.^___^
0
I
i
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
^2
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
0 5000_^_ 	 --— u.3
	 	 	 ^l 	 ^° ni n'°
£ £ £ Si -
ss | " 'is s
»3-1 n'l n'4 «< 9'8
12.8 12J IU ^ 9.6
f,. u.8 l;-9 10.2 4
122 ^
S "s * 1 a
s 1 s ! s
10.4 *; 9-1 g.O
10.2 ^ 9.o W 7.8
\i
9'7 91 V, 8'° 74
9.5 989 8.5 7>9 7-4
9'4 87 8'3 ,7 7'3
9.2 8'7 8i 7-^ 7.1
'•« M 8'-° '"
*'8 83 7'9 73 6/9,
8.7 8R3. 7.7 7, 6.7
8.5 \\ 7.6 ' 6.6
8.4 8'° 74 7'°Q 6.5
E " £ n s
T.9 «

7.6 _L1-— — 	 	 '
— 	

-------
3 SECTION IV:   BIOLOGICAL EVALUATIONS

-------
                               CHAPTER  IV-1
                       HABITAT SUITABILITY  INDICES
Habitat  Suitability  Index  (HSI) models  developed  by  the  U.S.  Fish  and
Wildlife Service are  used  to  evaluate habitat quality for a  fish  species.
HSI models  can  be  used  independently or in  conjunction  with the  Habitat
Evaluation Procedures  (HEP) applications described  in Chapter II-l.

The  HSI  models   provide  a  basic   understanding  of  species   habitat
requirements,  and   have  utility  and   applicability to  use   attainability
analyses.    There   are  several  types  of  HSI  models   including   pattern
recoonition, word  models,  statistical, linear regression, and mechanistic
forms in the FWS model publication series.  Use  of  models  is  predicated  on
two assumptions: (1 ^  an HSI value has  a  positive  relationship to potential
animal   numbers: and  (?)  there is a  positive  relationship between  habitat
quality  and some  measure of  carrying  capacity.    The  mechanistic  model
(Figure 1)  sometimes  referred to as  a structural  model  is  one  type  that
would  be  useful  for  use attainability  assessments.    Information  from
literature  reviews,   expert opinion,  and study  results  is  integrated  in
these  models  to  define  relationships  between   variables   and   habitat
suitability.   Suitability Index  (SI)  graphs  are developed for each  model
variable  (Figure  2).   The variables  included  in  a model  represent  key
habitat features known to  affect the  growth,  survival,  abundance,  standing
crop, and distribution for specific  species.   The model provides  a  verbal
or mathematical comparison of the habitat  being evaluated to the  optimum
habitat for  a  particular  evaluation  species.   For  some mechanistic  models
(Figure  3)   a  mathematical  aggregation procedure   is  used   to  integrate
relationships of model components.   In others  (Figure  4)  an HSI value  is
defined  as  the   lowest   SI   value   for   any   variable  in  the   model.
Nonmechanistic  models (e.g.,  statistical   models  for  standing  crop  and
harvest)  do not require  use  of  SI   graphs.    Output  from  an  HSI  model,
regardless of the type, is used  to determine  the  quantity  of  habitat  for  a
specific  species at  a site,  and an HSI value  ranges from 0 to  1, with  1
representing optimum  conditions.  The  relationship:

     Habitat area x Habitat quality (HST) = Habitat  Units  (HU's)

provides the basis  for obtaining habitat data to compare before and  after
conditions  for  a   site   if   pollution  problems  or other   environmental
problems are solved.

As wth all  models,  some  potential  sources  of  subjectivity  exist in  HSI
models.   Potential   subjectivity  in  mechanistic models may occur when:  (1)
determining  which  variables  should  be   included  in  the  model;   (?)
developing suitability index graphs from contradictory  or  incomplete  data;
(3) incorporating information for similar species of different life  stages
in the  suitability index  graphs;  (4)  determining  whether  or not  highly
correlated  variable   really affect  habitat  suitability  independently  and
which  variables,   if  any,  should   be  eliminated   from   the model;   (5)
determining  when,  where  and  how model variables should  be  measured;  and
(fi) converting  assumed relationships   between variables into  mathematical
equations that aggregate suitability  indices  for  individual  variables  into
a species HSI (Terrell et  al., 198?.).   All  models  developed  and published

                                  IV-1-1

-------
by the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service  are  subjected  to  reviews by species
experts to eliminate as much subjectivity as possible.

Appendix A-l  of  this  manual  is a  reprint  of the  HSI  developed  for  the
channel catfish.   Readers  are  encouraged  to  read  the  appendix  to  gain
greater understanding of features of the model.  HSI models for 19 aquatic
and estuarine fish species were  published  in  FY 82,  and  an  additional  20
are under development  and planned  for  publication  in FY 83.   Models  have
been  published  for  striped  bass,  channel  catfish,  creek  chub,  cutthroat
trout,  black  crappie,   white  crappie,   blue gill,  slough darter,  common
carp, smallmouth buffalo, black  bullhead, green  sunfish,  largemouth  bass,
northern pike, juvenile spot, juvenile  Atlantic croaker, gulf  menhaden,
brook trout, and the southern  kingfish.   Models for  coastal  species  were
developed  at  the National  Coastal  Ecosystems Team  (NCET) and  those  for
inland  species  were  developed  at  the   Western  Fnergy and  Land  Use  Team
(WELUT).

For more information concerning  models  for  inland  species,  contact:   Team
Leader, Western Energy  and Land Use Team, 2627 Redwing Road,  Fort Collins,
Colorado  80526  (FTS  323-5100,  or  comm.   303-226-9100).    Individuals
interested  in  models  for  coastal  species  should  contact  Team  Leader,
National Coastal  Ecosystems  Team, 1010  Oause Boulevard,  SIidell, Louisiana
70458 ( FTS 685-6511, or comm. 504-255-6511).
                                  IV-1-2

-------
Habitat Variables
                                        Life Requisites
% cover (V2
Substrate type (V4)
                                        Food (CF),
% pools
% cover (V2)
Average current velocity
                                        Cover (Cc),
Temperature (adult) (Vg)
Temperature (fry)
Temperature (juvenile)
Dissolved oxygen (Vg)
Turbidity (V7)
Salinity (adult) (Vg)
Salinity (fry, juvenile) (V]3)
Length of agricultural
  growing season (Vg)	
                                        Water Quality (CWQ)
% pools (V.,)
% cover (V2)
Dissolved oxygen (V0)
                   o
Temperature (embryo) (V,Q)
Salinity (embryo) (V
                                        Reproduction (CD)
                                                       K
Figure 1.  Tree diagram illustrating the relationship of habitat variables
and life requisites in the riverine model for the channel catfish HSI
model.  The dashed line for the length of agricultural growing season
(V)  is for optional use in the model (McMahon and Terrell 1982).
                            IV-l-3

-------
Variable
               Percent pools during
               average summer flow.
    1.0
                                                          25
                   50
75   100
               Percent cover (logs,
               boulders,  cavities,
               brush,  debris,  or
               standing timber)  during
               summer  within pools,
               backwater areas,  and
               littoral areas.
X
c
                                             3
                                             oo
                                                 0.4 -
                                                 0.2 -
                                                 0.0
                                                    0     10    20    .30    40    50
Figure 2.  Suitability Index graphs for variables V, and V? in the
channel catfish riverine model.   A SI value can range from 0 to 1 with 1
representing an optimum condition (McMahon and Terrell  1982).
                              IV-l-4

-------
Food (CF)
     CF - V2  *  V
Cover (Cc)
     Cc = {V,  x V2 x V18)1/3
Water Quality
           2(V5 + V12 * V14) + V7 x 2(V8)
If Vg,  V12,  V14, V8, V9, or V13 is _<  0.4,  then CWQ equals the lowest
of the  following:  Vg, V12» V14> Vg,  Vg, V13, or the above equation.

     Note:   If  temperature data are unavailable, 2(Vfi) (length of
     agricultural growing season) may be substituted for the term

          2
-------
Habitat Variables
Suitability Indices
Ratio of spawning habitat
  to summer habitat [area that
  is less than 1  m deep and
  vegetated (spring) divided
  by total midsummer area] (V-)
Drop in water level during embryo
  and fry stages (V^)	
Percent of midsummer area with
  emergent and/or submerged
  aquatic vegetation or remains
  of terrestrial plants (bottom
  debris excluded) (V-,)	
      IDS during midsummer (V.)
Least suitable pH in spawning
  habitat during embryo and
  fry stages (V5)	
Average length of frost-free
  season (V)	
Maximal weekly average
  temperature (1 to 2 m
  deep) (V7)	
Area of backwaters, pools, or
  other standing/sluggish
  (less than 5 cm/sec) water
  during summer, as a percent
  of total area (V)	
Stream gradient.(Vg)
Figure 4.  A tree diagram for the northern pike riverine HSI model. Note
that habitat variables are not aggregated for separate life requisite
components (Inskip 1982).
                            IV-1-6

-------
                             CHAPTER  IV-2
         DIVERSITY  INDICES AND MEASURES  OF  COMMUNITY  STRUCTURE

Diversity  is  an  attribute  of  biological  community  structure.    The
concepts  of  richness   and  composition  are  commonly  associated  with
diversity.   Species richness  is  simply  the  number  of  species,  while
composition refers  to   the  relative distribution  of  individuals  among
the  species,  or  evenness.   Odum  (1959) defined  diversity indices  as
mathematical  expressions  which describe the  ratio  between species  and
individuals in  a  hiotic  community.   A  major  advantage  of diversity
indices is  that they permit  the  summarization of large amounts  of data
about  the  numbers  and  kinds  of  organisms  into  a  single  numerical
description of  community  structure which  is  comprehensible and  useful
to  people  not  immediately  familiar  with  the  specific   biota.    Some
diversity  indices  are  expressions  of  the  number  of  taxa,   usually
species, in the community.  Whittaker  (1964)  referred to  these  formulas
as indices  of "species  diversity",  i.e.  the  more  species  - the  greater
the  diversity.     "Dominance   diversity  indices"   (Whittaker,   1964)
incorporate the concepts of both  richness and evenness; thus, diversity
increases  as  the  number  of  species   increases  or as  the  individuals
become more evenly  distributed between the  species.

The  response  of bottom  fauna  to  four  types of pollution  is  represented
in  Figure  IV-2-1   (Keup  1966).    Figure   IV-2-1A  shows  that   organic
pollutants  generally  decrease  the  number  of  species   present  while
increasing  the numbers  of surviving taxa, whereas  toxic pollutants tend
to  reduce  both  numbers and  kinds  of  organisms  (Figure  IV-2-1B).   In
general,  the  effect  of  all   types  of  pollutant  stress  on  community
structure is the  loss of  diversity.   The value of diversity in  natural
communities lies  in the fact  that the presence of many species  insures
the  likelihood  of "redundancy of  function"  (Cairns  et  al.  1973).   As
explained by  Cairns and Dickson  (1971),  in a highly  diverse community,
the  constantly  changing environment will probably  affect  only   a  small
portion of  the  complex bottom fauna   community  at any  time.    Because
there are many different  kinds of organisms present,  the  role of  those
eliminated  as a  result  of natural  environmental  change will  be  filled
by  other  organisms.  Thus  the  food  cycle and  the  system  as  a  whole
remain  stable.    On the  other  hand,  natural  environmental  variation
might  eliminate   a  significant  portion  of a  community  that  has  been
simplified  by pollutant stress.   With  no organism  available to  fill  the
vacated niche, the  functional  capacity of the unstable community  may be
jeopardized.  Generally, maintenance  of  diversity  is  important  because
it enhances the stability of a system.

Diversity indices are commonly computed  as one  tool  among many  in  the
analysis  of  aquatic   (as  well   as   terrestrial)   communities.     Some
prevalent  reasons for  measuring  community  diversity  are  listed  below
(these purposes are by  no means  independent of each other):
     o
To investigate community structure or  functions
 To  establish  its  relationship  to  other  community   properties
such as productivity and stability
To establish its  relationship to environmental conditions
                                 IV-2-1

-------
                         DIRECTION OF FLOW
         A
   o;
   UJ
   ca
          OJ
               /      N

              /        \
                                           OJ
                                           4->
                                           i/>
                                           03
  UJ
  o:
                                           O)
                                           
-------
     0 To compare communities
     0 To evaluate the biotic health  of the  community
     0 To assess the effects of  pollutant  discharges
     0 To monitor water quality  by biological  rather than
       physicochemical means

In analyses  of  freshwater  aquatic  communities, diversity studies  generally
involve  benthic  macroinvertebrates  or   fish.     Several   advantages   and
disadvantages  have  been  given"  for  the study  of these  groups   (Cairns  and
Oickson 1971, Karr 1981),  and are listed  in  Table IV-2-1.   These two  groups
are generally  considered  to be  the  most  suitable  organisms  for evaluation
of community  integrity.   Whereas it  might  be  desirable to  investigate  the
diversity of both fish and macroinvertebrates, the  two  groups generally  are
not used  in  combination  to  calculate a  single  diversity  index  because  of
differences  in  sampling selectivity  and error.

DIVERSITY INDICES

Man^ indices of  diversity  have  been  developed.  Some indices selected  from
the literature  are presented in  Table IV-2-2,  and  the more  common  ones  are
discussed below.

Species Diversity Indices

Of  the  expressions  described  as  species  diversity  indices  (equations  1
through 4 in Table  IV-2-2, plus others),  the  Margalef  formula   is  probably
the most popular.  Once the sampling  and  identification  is  completed,  it  is
an easy matter  to calculate  the  diversity index using the  Margalef  formula
by  substituting  the  number   of   species(s)   and   the  total    number   of
individuals  (n) into the equation below.
The  use  of  this  formula,   and  others  of  the  type,  has  some  important
limitations.   First,  it  is  not  independent  of  sample  size.    Menhinick
(19M) found that  for  sample  sizes  from 64 to 300 individuals the  Margalef
diversity  index  varied from 3.05 to  14.74, respectively.   In that  study,
four-  species  diversity indices  were evaluated  for  variation  with  sample
size and all were  found unsatisfactory  except  for the equation  referred  to
as the Menhinick formula in Table IV-2-2.   The second  limitation  of  species
diversity  indices  is that,  by definition,  they do  not  consider the  relative
abundance  among   species,  and,  therefore,  rare   species  exert   a   high
contribution to  the  index  value.   To  illustrate  this  limitation,  Wi 1 hm
M972) calculated  diversity  by  the  Margalef and  Menhinick  formulas  for
three  hypothetical  communities  each  containing   five  species   and   100
individuals  (see Table IV-2-3).    Communities  A,  B,  and  C  exhibit  a  wide
rancie  of  relative  distribution  of  individuals  between   the  five  species.
Intuitively, community A  is  more diverse  than  community  C,  but  the  two
species diversity  indices  fail to express  any difference.
                               IV-2-3

-------
TABLE IV-2-1. ADVANTAGES AND DISADVANTAGES OF USING MACRO INVERTEBRATES AND
              FISH IN EVALUATION OF THE BIOTIC INTEGRITY  OF FRESHWATER
              AQUATIC COMMUNITIES (CAIRNS AND DICKSOM, 1971; KARR,  1981)

                             MACROINVERTEBRATES
              Advantages

  Fish that are highly valued by humans
  are dependent on bottom fauna as a
  food source.
  Many species are extremely sensitive
  to pollution and respond quickly to
  it.
  Bottom fauna usually have a complex
  life cycle of a year or more, and if
  at any time during their life cycle
  environmental conditions are out.ide
  their tolerance limits, they die.
  Many have an attached or sessile mode
  of life and are not subject to rapid
  migrations, therefore they serve as
  natural monitors of water quality.
        Di sadvantages

  They require specialized
  taxononic expertise for
  identification,  which is also
  time-consumi ng.
  Background life-history
  information is lacking for many
  species  and groups.
  Results  are difficult to
  translate into values meaningful
  to the general public.
                                    FISH

  Life history information is extensive
  for most species.
  Fish communities generally include a
  range of species that represent a
  variety of trophic levels  (omnivores,
  herbivores, insect!vores,
  pianktivores,  piscivores)  and utilize
  foods of both aquatic and  terrestial
  origin.  Their position at the top of
  the aquatic food web also  helps
  provide an integrated view of the
  watershed environment.
  Fish are relatively easy to identify.
  Most samples can be sorted and
  identified in the field, and then
  released.
  The general public can  relate to
  statements about conditions of the
  fish community.
  Both acute toxicity (missing taxa)
  and stress effects (depressed growth
  and reproductive success)  can be
  evaluated.  Careful examination of
  recruitment and  growtn  dynamics among
  years can help pinpoint periods of
  unusual stress.
0 L
Sampling fish communities is
selective in nature.
Fish are highly mobile.  This
can cause sampling difficulties
and also creates situations of
preference and avoidance.  Fish
also undergo movements on die!
and seasonal  time scales.
There is a nigh requirement for
manpower and equipment for field
samp 1 ing.
                                    IV-2-4

-------
 TABLE  IV-2-2.  SUMMARY  OF DIVERSITY INDICES
Descriptive Name

 1.   Simplest possible ratio of
      species per individual
   Formula
   d =1
                               Reference

                               Wilhm, 1967
 2.   Gleason
   d =
                                         log n
                               Menhinick, 1964,
                               Gleason, 1922
 3.    Margalef
   d =
                                          s-1
                                         I n n
                               Margalef, 1951
                               1956
 4.    Menhinick
   d =
                                         (n)
                                            1/2
                               Menhinick, 1964
 5.    Mclntosh
                                         n - (In..2)1/2
   d =
                                           n - (n!
                               Mclntosh, 1967
 6.    Simpson
d =
                                          n (n-1
                                  Simpson, 1949
 7.    Brillouin


H = (ij Hog n!  -  L  log n.!j    Brillouin, 1960
 8.   Shannon-Wiener
   H = -L lp.log2p.J
                               Shannon and
                               Weaver, 1963;
                               Wiener, 1948
      Approximate form of the
      Shannon Index
      . a - -I
      Shannon Index using
      biomass (weight) units
        3^
     - 'L
                                             w .       w .
                               Wilhm, 1968
                                      IV--2-5

-------
 TABLE IV-2-2.  (Cont'd)
 9.    Hierarchical
      Diversity Index
      (HDD
HDI = H'(F)+HyH'GF(S)
                                                                    Pielou, 1969,
                                                                    1975
10.    Hierarchical  Trophic-     HTDI  = H ' (T. )+H '   (T9 )+H
      Based D.I.  (HTDI)
                                               Ti
                                                                    Osborne et al . ,
                                                                    1980
11.    Redundancy (r]
                                     r =
                                                 d
                                         d   - d .
                                          max   mi n
                               Datten, 1962;
                               Wilhm, 1967
12.    Equitability (e)
                                     e =
                               Lloyd and
                               Ghelardi, 196^
13.    Evenness (J,J' ,  v!
                                     J =
                                          max
                               Pielou 1969,
                               1975; Hurlbert,
                               1971
                                           max
                                          d -
                                     v =
                                         d    - d .
                                          max    mi n
14.   Number of moves (NM)
                                          n (s
                                                        Rini
                                "ager,  1972
, r    ^     j. •  i  *     •     T ^
15.   Sequential  Comparison Index
                                            number of runs
                                           number Of soecies
                                           COT, JLnumber of taxa.
                               Cairns  et  al.
                               1968; Cairns  S
                               Dickson, 1971;
                               Euikema et  al.
                               1980
                                      IV-2-6

-------
    TABLE IV-2-2.  (Cont'd)
                                      KEY
H = d s H'  =3= diversity index.
             n = total  number of individuals.
            n. = number of individuals in species i.
             s = total  number of species.
                                                                  ni
            p. = probability of selecting an element of state i  = —.

            R. = rank of species i.
            s' = the species  required  to produce the calculated  d.i.  value  if
                   the  individuals  were distributed among  the  species accord-
                   ing to MacArthur's (1957, 1960) "broken-stick" model.
                                     IV-2-7

-------
TABLE IV-2-3. DIVERSITY OF THREE HYPOTHETICAL COMMUNITIES EVALUATED BY THE
MARGALEF, MEMHINICK,
Community
A
B
C
nl
20
40
1
20
30
1
n3
20
15
1
n4
20
10
1
n5
20
5
96
AND SHANNON-WIENER INDICES
n
100
100
100
s
5
5
5
s-1
In n
0.87
0.87
0.87
n'/2
0.50
0.50
0.50
d
2.
1.
0.
32
67
12
Another shortcoming of species per individual  formulas  is  that  they  are  not
dimensionless , thus substitution  of  alternate  variables for numbers -  sucn
as biomass or energy flow - would produce  values dependent  on  the  arbitrary
choice of units.

The major advantage of using species diversity  indices  is  the  simplicity  of
calculation;  however,  certain  conditions  for  their   proper  use  must  be
considered.   Since these formulas  are  dependent  on   sample  size  (except
possibly, the Menhinick equation), for  intercommunity  comparison  the sample
sizes should be as  nearly identical  as possible.   It  must be  kept  in  mind
that  these  expressions represent only  the  number  of   species  and  not  any
expression of relative abundance.  Finally,  for  use  of  variables  other  than
numbers, the units must be specified and  kept  consistent.

Dominance Diversity Indices

The  most  prominent dominance  diversity  index  (equations  5  through  8  in
Table IV-2-2,  plus  others) is the  Shannon-Wiener formula.   This index  is
used  extensively  in research  projects, as  is  the  Simpson  equation.    The
Shannon-Weiner  diversity  index   evolved   from  information  theory  to  the
functional equation shown  below:
in  which  the  ratio  of' the  number of  individuals  collected  of  species  i
to  the total  number of  individuals  in  the  sample   (n-j/n)  estimates  the
total   population   value   (N-j/N),   which   is  an   approximation   of   the
probability  of  collecting an individual of  species  i  (p-j).   It should  be
noted  that  the  units  of  d using '1092  is the  binary  unit, or bit.   Natural
logarithms  or  log-jg  are  sometimes  substituted  into  the  equation  for
convenience,  in  which case different  index  values  would be  obtained,  with
the  units  of nats or decits,  respectively.   The Shannon-Wiener  diversity
index  is calculated  using base  10 logarithms, for two  simple,  hypothetical
samples  in  Example IV-2-1  (see statistical   analysis  section).   A  formula
for  conversion between differently-based logarithms  is  given below:

                   Tog2Y- =  1 .443  In  Y  = 3.323  loglQY

The  logarithm base and units  should  always  be given  when reporting  data.
                                   IV-2-8

-------
The  dominance  and  species  diversity  indices   discussed  can  be  used  to
measure  the  diversity  of  virtually  any  biological   community   (including
macroinvertebrates  and  fish),  and  their  application  is  limited  only  by
sampling  effectiveness.     Wilhm   and   Dorris   (1968)  evaluated  species
diversity of  benthic macroinvertebrates  using   the  Shannon-Wiener formula
and obtained  values less  than  1.0 in  areas of heavy pollution, values from
1.0 to  3.0  in  areas  of  moderate  pollution, and  values exceeding  3.0  in
clean water areas (values given are in decits).

Disadvantages of  using  the  Shannon  index  (or others  of  the type) include
the  considerable  time,  expense,  and  expertise  involved  in   sampling,
sorting, and  identification of samples.  Calculation of the  index  value can
be mathematically tedious if  done manually,  but  is greatly simplified if a
computer  is  available.    Computer   programs for  computing  d  and  r  are
provided in the literature  (Wilhm, 1970; Cairns  and Dickson, 1971).

The  Shannon-Wiener  formula  has  a  number  of features  which  enhance  its
usefulness.    This index  of  diversity is  much  more  independent  of  sample
size  than  the   species   diversity  indices  (Wilhm   1972).      Since  it
incorporates  the  concept  of dominance diversity,  the relative importance of
each species  collected is expressed and the  contribution of  rare  species to
diversity is  low.  This is illustrated by  the d  values calculated  using the
Shannon  equation  for the three communities  in  Table  IV-2-3.    Also,  the
Shannon  formula  is  dimensionless,  facilitating  the  measurement  of biomass
diversity.     Odum (1959)  recognized  that  the  structure  of  the biomass
pyramid  held  more   ecological   (trophic)   significance  than  the numbers
pyramid  because  it  takes  many small  individuals  to  equal  the  mass of one
large individual.   The Shannon-Wiener  equation  can easily  be  modified  to
accomodate any units of weight as shown below:

                                  W,"     ,W-is
                          a  = -I (-i)W-i)
Wilhn  (1968)  pointed  out that  use  of this  diversity  index  with  units of
energy flow might be even more valuable to the study of community structure
and ^unction.

Hierarchical Diversity

Diversity indices, such  as  the  Shannon-Wiener  index,  can be  partitioned to
reflect the  contribution made  by different  taxonomic and  trophic  levels.
Pielou (1975)  suggested  that  a community  showing  more  diversity at higher
taxonomic levels  (e.g.  genus  and family)  should  be considered  to  be more
diverse than a community with the same  number  of  species but congeneric or
cofanilial.   Osborne et  al  (1980)questioned  the  ecological  significance of
Pielou's  suggestion, but  investigated the  use  of  the  hierarchical diversity
index (HDI)  shown below:

                   HDI  = H'(F) + H'F(G) + H'FG(S)

in which H'(F) is the  familial  component of  the  total  diversity, H'p(G)
is  the  generic  component  of  the  total  diversity,   and  H'pg(S)  is  the
                                   IV-2-9

-------
specific component of the total  diversity.  The equation used by Kaesler et
al .   (1978)  illustrates  the  calculation  of  the  hierarchical  components.
They used

              o  N.           o   fi   N  .             o   fi gij  N.-
where a ,B,T, and <5 are  weighting  coefficients; subscripts  0,  F,  G,  and S
represent  order,  family,  genus,  and  species, respectively;  o,  f,  and g
represent  number  of  orders,  families  within  orders,  and genera  within
families,  respectively;  N  represents  the  number of  individuals;  and  N-j
represents the  number of  individuals  in  the  ith group.   Osborne  et  al .
(1980) concluded that  identification to  the family level  was sufficient to
detect intersite differences  in that study, while the order level (Hughes,
1978)  and  generic  level  (Kaesler  et  al . ,  1978)  were sufficient  in  other
studies.    Determination  that  identification  to  species  or   genus  is
unnecessary for a  particular  study would  reduce  the  time, expertise,  and
expense  required.     A  hierarchical   diversity   index would  be  of  more
ecological value  if  it  were  based  on  trophic   relationships  rather than
taxonomy.   Osoorne,  et  al .  (1980)  presented  the  following  hierarchical
trophic diversity  index  (HTDI):

               HTDI = H'(T]) + H'T1(T2) + H'T1T2(T3)

in  which  H'(T])  is  the  general  trophic  level  component of   the  total
trophic  diversity,   H'y]^)  is  the  functional  group   component  of  the
total   trophic   diversity,   and   ^'TlTZ^s)   ^s  ^e   lowest    taxonomic
unit component of  the total  trophic diversity.  The classifications  used in
the hierarchical trophic-based diversity  index of  Osborne et al .  (1980)  are
listed in  Table IV-2-4A.  Two classification  systems  were investigated by
Kaesler et al . (1978): the trophic classifications appear in Table IV-2-4B.
and  the   functional  morphological  classifications   are   shown   in   Table
IV-2-4C.    All   of  these   hierarchical   diversity  indices  used   benthic
macroinvertebrates as their  group of study.  Hierarchical diversity  indices
based  on  trophic  level  and functional  morphology are  relatively new  and
their  utility will  improve as more experience  is  gained.  These  indices  are
of  potentially  great  ecological  value because  of their  functional  (rather
than structural, e.g. taxonomic) approach to community analysis.

Evenness and Redundancy
When  using  dominance  diversity indices,  it  is  desirable  to  distinguish
between the two  concepts  of diversity incorporated  into  them, since  it  is
theoretically  possible  for a  community  with  a  few,   evenly-represented
species  to  have   the  same  index  value   as   a   community  with   many,
unevenly-represented   species.     For  this   reasons,  relative   diversity
expressions (equations  11  through  14  in  Table IV-2-2, plus others) such  as
eveness  and  redundancy  are  often  used   in  conjunction  with   dominance
diversity indicies.  Redundancy is  an expression  of  the dominance  of  one  or
more  species and  is  inversely  proportional  to the wealth of  species  (Wilhm
and Dorris,  1968).   To  use the redundancy  expression  in conjunction  with
the   Shannon-Wiener   index,  the   theoretical   maximum  diversity   (dmax)
and minimum diversity  (dm-jn) are calculated  by  the  equations:

                    d    =  (-) Clog9n! -  s
                    max    n'      c.

                                   IV-2-10

-------
         TABLE IV-2-4.  FUNCTIONALLY-BASED HIERARCHICAL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS
          A.  Hierarchical trophic classification used for HTDI calculations
       HTI
    (Trophic level

Omni vore
Carni vore

Herbi vore
Detritivore
           H
            T2
    (Functional  group)

Filter Feeders
Collector-Gatherer-
   Shredder-Engul fer
Engulfer-Shredder
Collector-Filterer-
   Engulfer
Engulfer-Grazer
Engul fer-Collector-
   Grazer
Engulfer
Piercer
Sera per-Col lector-Gatherer
Col lector-Gatherer-Shredder
Collector-FiIterer-Gatherer
Col lector-Gatherer
Col 1ector-Fi Iterer
Shredder
Shredder
Col lector-Gatherer
    (Number of individuals)

Number of individuals of each
taxon within each functional
group.
          Trophic classification of macrobenthic invertebrates.  For  any specific
           application, not all possible combinations are likely to  be realized.
     Level of
    Hierarchy       Name
                         Subdivi sions
        I      Functional group
       II      Feeding mechanism
      III      Dependence

       IV      Food habit



        V      Species
                shredders (vascular plant tissues)
                collectors (detrital materials)
                grazers (Aufwuchs)
                predators
                parasites
                chewers and miners
                filters (suspension feeders)
                gatherers (sediment or deposit feeders
                scrapers
                chewers and suckers
                swallowers and chewers
                pi ercers
                attachers
                obiigate
                facultati ve
                herbi vory
                detriti vory
                carni vory
                omni vory
                number of individuals
                                        IV-2-11

-------
   TABLE IV-2-4  .   FUNCTIONALLY-BASED HIERARCHICAL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS (Cont'd)


C.  HBR (head,  body,  respiratory organ) classification of macrobenthic
    invertebrates according to functional  morphology: head position,
    body shape, and respiratory organs.	
     Level  of
    Hierarchy
       Name
                    Subdi vi si ons
        I
       II
Head position
   category)
(feeding
Body shape (current
   of stream)
      III
Respiratory organs
   (substratum)
       IV
Species
hypognathous
prognathous
opi sthorhynchous
vestigial  or other
flattened  irregular
flattened  oval
flattened  elongate
compressed laterally
cyl i ndrical
elongate
short, compact
fusi form
i rregular
hemicylindrical  or subtriangular
simple filamentous gills
compound filamentous gills
platelike  gills
operculate gills
leaflike gills or organs
respiratory dish
respiratory tube
spiracular gills
caudal chamber
piastron
body  integument
tracheal respiration
number of  individuals
                                        IV-2-12

-------

                                        og2tn
                                                  s-D!
Then tne location of d  between  the  theoretical  extremes can be computed by
the  redundancy  formula:         ^
                           r =
                                  max
                                max"  min
Table IV-2-5 illustrates the expression of  redundancy.

     TABLE IV-2-5.  THE SHANNON-WIENER  INDEX AND CORRESPONDING
                    REDUNDANCY VALUES FOR 11 HYPOTHETICAL
                    COMMUNITIES,  (after Patten, 1962).
Communi

Species A

$9 . ...1


Sc 	 1

Sz 	 1

B
2

t
1
1
_

C
2
2
1
1

_

D
3
j
1
1

_

F
2
2
2

-
_
(N -
F
3
2
1

-
_
ties
6)
G
4
1
1

-
_


H
3
3


-
_


I
4
2


-
_


J
5
1


-
_


K
5



-
_
d(bits)2.53  2.25 1.93 1.79 1.61 1.^7 1.25 1.00  0.92  0.65  0.00
R  	0.00  0.13 0.25 0.30 0.38 0.43 0.52 0.61  0.64  0.75  1.00
Expressions  have
apportionment  of
                    also   been
                   individuals
                                developed  to   describe   the  evenness  of
                               among  species  in  a  community.    Evenness
measures have historically taken two  forms.   One is the ratio of diversity
to  the  maximum   possible  diversity,  where   dmax   is  defined  as  the
community in which all species are -equally distributed:

                           J'  '
Where  the  logarithm  is  to  the  same  base  as  used  in  the  corresponding
diversity  index  calculation.   However,  log  s is  only  an approximation of
Jmax
      because   all   species
sampled.  A measure  of  evenness
                                  the
                                 that
                                 d-
                            v  =
                                       community   generally  will   not  be
                                      does  not depend  on  s is shown below:

                                      min
                                     -  d
                                max     rrn n
                  measure  of  evenness  that  the  expression  for redundancy
                  derived by the relationship  r =  1-V; thus,  redundancy may
also  be  thought  of  as  a  measure  of the  unevenness of  apportionment of
individuals among species.
It was  from this
(snown above) was
Secuential Comparison Index

The  sequential  companson  index
index  of  diversity  because  of it
(non-academic)  studies.    The
estinatinn relative  differences
                                   SCI)  is  probably  the  most  widely  used
                                     extensive worldwide  use  in  industrial
                                 SCI   is   a   simplified,   rapid   method   for
                                 in  Diological diversity  and  has been  used
                                  IV-2-13

-------
mainly for assessing the  biological  consequences of pollution.   Use  of  the
SCI  requires  no  taxonomic  expertise  on  the   part  of  the  investigator.
Although  it  has been  used with  microorganisms, the  SCI  is  predominately
used to  evaluate  diversity in benthic  macroinvertebrate  communities.   The
collected  specimens are   randomly  poured  into  a  white  enamel  pan with
parallel   lines  drawn on  the  bottom.   Only  two  specimens  are compared at  a
time.  Comparisons  are based on  differences  in  shape,  color,  and size  of
the  organisms.   If  the   imminent  specimen  is  apparently  the  same  as  the
previous  one,  it is  part  of  the  same "run"; if  it  is  not,  it is  part of  a
new  run.   An easy way  of  recording runs  is  to  use a series  of X's and O's.
For  example,  the specimens  shown in  line  one  of  Figure  IV-2-2 would  be
recorded,  from left to   right  as X  0_ _X £ _X  0_ _X,  or  seven   runs.    The
specimens in line two  would be tabulated  by X X  X _0 X  X  X.   Sample two only
contains  three  runs  and  is obviously  less dfverse.   Ultimately,  it will  be
necessary to  know  the total  number  of  taxa  in  the collection.   This  can
either  be counted   after  determining  the  number  of  runs  or  determined
simultaneously  by underlining the  symbol  of each new taxon  as  shown  above.

Cairns,  et   al.  (1971)   described  the  following  stepwise  procedure   for
calculating the Sequential Comparison Diversity  Index:

1.  Gently randomize specimens in a jar  by  swirling.
?.  Pour  specimens out on  a lined white  enamel  pan.
3.  Disperse clumps of specimens by pouring preservative or  water on
    clumps.
4.   If the sample has  fewer than 250 specimens,  determine  the number  of
    runs  for entire sample and go to Step 12.
5.   If sample  has more than 250 specimens,  determine the  number  of runs  for
    the first  50 specimens.
6.  Calculate DI]_ where DI]_ = numbers of  runs/50.
7.  Plot  DI} against the  number of specimens examined  as  in  Figure
    IV-2-3.
8.  Calculate  the SCI  for  the next 50 specimens.
9.  Determine  the total number of runs  for  the  100  specimens  examined.
10. Calculate  a new DI^ for 100 specimens as in  Step 5 and  plot  the  value
    obtained on the  graph  made in Step  7, where  DIi =  number of  runs/100.
11. Repeat this procedure  in increments  of  SO until the  curve obtained
    becomes asymptotic.   At this  point  enough specimens  have been examined
    so that continued  work will  produce  an  insignificant  change  in the
    final DI}  value.
12. Calculate  final DI-. where

               DIi  =    number of runs
                       number of specimens
13. Record the number of different taxa  observed  in  the  entire  sample.  This
    can be done after deriving the final 01} or  simultaneously  by simply
    noting each new taxon as  it is examined in the determination  of runs.
                                   IV-2-14

-------
2.
                                                                 -I	L
                                                          SO 100 ISO ZOO 250 300 3SO 400 450 SOO
                                                               NUMBER OF SPECIMENS
 Figure IV-2-2.   Determination of runs in SCI
 technique (from Cairns and Dickson, 1971).
                                                 Figure IV-2-3.  DI, and sample
                                                 size (from Cairns and Dickson,
                                                 1971).
 DI.
1.0

0.9

C.8

0.7

C.6


0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2
                  Tf    r

                    A
                                          A =  use  line A to be 95%
                                               confident the mean DI
                                                                     1
                                               is  within 20% of true  value
                                           3
                                              UT Ti  TZ   13  14
                            Number of times  to  repeat SCI
                              examination  on same sample
r—
i
I
! i
/ B = use line B to be 35%
I confident the mean DI.
1 is within 10% of true value
i l i i / i J I I ] ! 1 I ! f
<
ib
  Figure IV-2-4.  Confidence limits for DI,  values  (from Cairns  and  Dickson, 1971)
                                        IV-2-15

-------
14. Determine from Figure IV-2-4 the number of times the SCI examination
    must be repeated on the same sample to be 95 percent confident that the
    mean DI^ is within a chosen percentage of the true value for DIi.
    In most pollution work involving gross differences between sampling
    areas, Line A of Figure IV-2-4 should be used.  For example, suppose
    DI]_ were 0.60.  Using Line A of Figure IV-2-4 the SCI should be
    performed twice to be 95 percent confident that the mean DIj is
    within 20 percent of the true value.
15. After determining N, rerandomize the sample and repeat the SCI
    examination on the same number of specimens as determined in Step
    11.  Repeat this procedure M - 1 times.
16. Calculate DIj by the following equation:

                    DIj = DI] x (number of taxa)

17. Calculate Dly by the following equation:

                    DIj = (DI] ) x (number of taxa)

18. Repeat the above procedure for each bottom fauna collection.
19. After determining the Dly for each bottom fauna collection at each
    sampling station, there is a simple technique for determining if the
    community structures of the bottom fauna as evaluated by the SCI
    (Oly) value are significantly different within a station or between
    stations.  Calculate the 95 percent confidence intervals around each
    Dly value.  If the 95 percent confidence intervals do not overlap,
    then the community structures of the bottom fauna as reflected by the
    DIj values are significantly different.  For example, suppose the
    Dly value for Station 1 were 45 and for Station 2 were 28.  In the
    determination of Dly a decision was made to use Line A in Figure
    IV-2-4, which means that the Dly is within 20 percent of the true
    value 95 times out of 100.  Therefore the 95 percent confidence
    interval for the Dly value at Station 1 would be from 49.5 to 40.5,
    or 10 percent of the Dly value on either side of the determined
    Dly.  Station 2 would have a 95 percent confidence interval for the
    Dly value of from 30.8 to 25.2.  The bottom fauna communities at the
    two stations as evaluatd by the Dly index are significantly
    different.

The   SCI    permits   rapid   evaluation   of   the   diversity   of   benthic
macroinvertebrates.    Some  insight  into  the   integrity   of  the  bottom
community  can  be  gained  from  Dly values.    Cairns  and   Dickson  (1971)
reported  that  healthy  streams with  high  diversity and  a  balanced density
seem  to  have  Dly  values  above  12.0,  while  polluted  communities  with
skewed  population  structures have  given  values  for  Dly of 8.0  or  less,
and intermediate values have been found in semipolluted situations.
                                   IV-2-16

-------
SPECIAL INDICES

Several  expressions  that   are  not  diversity  indices  per _se_  but  which
incorporate the  concept  of diversity have  been  formulated.  These include
numerous  biotic  indices  (Pantle  and Buck,  1955;  Beck,  1955;  Beak,  1964;
Chutter 1971, Howmiller  and  Scott  1977,  Hilsenhoff 1977, Winget  and Mangum
1979),  a  composite  index  of  "well-being"   (Gammon 1976),  and  Karr's  index
(Karr 1981).  These  indices  are  designed to evaluate the biotic  integrity,
or health, of biological  communities and ecosystems.

Biotic  Indices

Beck  (1955)  developed  a  biotic   index   for  evaluating  the   health  of
streams using aquatic macroinvertebrates.   In the  equation

               Biotic index = 2(n Class  I)  +  (n Class II)

where n represents  the number  of  macroinvertebrate species, more weight is
assigned to Class I  organisms  (those tolerant of  little organic  pollution)
than  to  Class  II organisms  (those  tolerant  of  moderate organic pollution
but not of anaerobic  conditions).   A stream nearing septic conditions will
have  a  biotic  index  value  of  zero;  whereas  streams  receiving moderate
amounts  of organic  wastes  will  have  values  from   1  to  6,   and  streams
receiving  little or  no  waste will  have  values  usually  over  10  (Gaufin
1973).

The  biotic  index   proposed  by  Hilsenhoff  uses  the  arthropod  community
(specifically insects, amphipods, and isopods) to  evaluate the  integrity of
aquatic ecosystems  via the formula:

                            BI  = 1C  r\.a./n

where  n^   is  the  total  number  of  individuals   of  the  ith   species   (or
genus),  an-  is the  tolerance value  assigned to  that  species  (or  genus),
and n is  the  total  number  of individuals  in  the sample (Hilsenhoff,  1977;
Hilsenhoff, 1982).  Pollution tolerance  values of  zero  to five  are assigned
to species  (or  genera when species  cannot  be identified)  on  the basis of
previous field studies.  A  zero value  is assigned to species found only in
unaltered  streams of  very  high water quality, a  value  of  5 is assigned to
species  known to  occur  in  severely  polluted  or disturbed  streams,   and
intermediate  values  are   assigned  to  species  occurring   in   intermediate
situations.   Calculation  of this and  other biotic  indices  are methods of
biologically assessing water quality.

Index of Hell-Being

Utilizing  fish  communities, Gammon  developed a  composite  index  of  well-
being   (IWB)  as  a   t00^   f°r   measuring  the  effect  of  various  human
activities on  aquatic communities  (Gammon, 1976; Gammon and  Reidy,  1981;
Gammon  et  al., 1981).  This index was calculated  by:

               l^  =  0.5 In n + 0.5  In w +  dno + dwt

in which  n is the  number  of  individuals captured per  kilometer,  w  is  the
weight  in  kilograms  captured  per km,  d*np is  the Shannon  index  based on
numbers,  and  dwt  is the  Shannon  index  based  on  weights.   (The  Shannon
index was  calculated  using natural logarithms).

                                  IV-2-17

-------
Karr's Index of Biotic Integrity  (IBI)

Karr  (1981)  presented   a  procedure  for  classifying  water  resources   by
evaluating  their  biotic  integrity  using  fish  communities.   Use  of  the
system  involves  three  assumptions:    (1)  the  fish  sample  is  a  balanced
representation of  the fish  community  at the  sample site;  (2)  the  sample
site  is  representative  of  the larger geographic  area  of interest; and  (3)
the scientist charged with  data  analysis and the final  classification is  a
trained',  competent  biologist with considerable  familiarity  with  the  local
fish  fauna.   For each of the  twelve criteria listed in  Table IV-2-6,  the
evaluator subjectively assigns a  minus  (-),  zero (0),  or plus (+)  value  to
the sample.  The grades  are  assigned numerical values -  (-)=!, (0)=3,  (+)=5
-  which  are  summed  over  all   twelve   criteria  to  produce  an   index   of
community  quality.    The  sampled community  is  then  placed  in one  of  the
biotic  integrity  classes  described  in Table   IV-2-7  based  on   numerical
boundaries  such as  those tentatively suggested  by Karr  (1981) and  shown  in
Table IV-2-8.

           TABLE IV-2-6.  PARAMETERS USED IN ASSESSMENT OF FISH
                COMMUNITIES.  (SEE ARTICLE TEXT  FOR  DISCUSSION.)

            Species Composition  and Richness
               Number of Species
               Presence of Intolerant Species
               Species Richness  and  Composition  of Darters
               Species Richness  and Composition  of Suckers
               Species Richness  and  Composition  of Sunfish (except
               Green Sunfish)
               Proportion of Green Sunfish
               Proportion on Hybrid  Individuals

            Ecological Factors
               Number of Individuals in  Sample
               Proportion of Omnivores  (Individuals)
               Proportion of Insectivorous Cyprinids
               Proportion of Top  Carnivores
               Proportion with Disease,  Tumors,  Fin Damage,  and
               Other Anomalies

BIOLOGICAL POLLUTION SURVEY  DESIGN

The  first step  in  planning  any survey  of  water  quality  is  to  identify
specific  objectives and clearly  define what  information is  sought.    For
instance,  the objective of a   use  attainability  analysis  might  be   to
evaluate the water  quality or degree of degradation  of  a body of water,  in
general,  in order to ascertain the accuracy  of the current use designation.
Alternately, the  analysis  objective  might   be to determine the  extent   of
damage  caused  by  a  discharge  or  series  of  discharges.     From  such
information, the  potential  attainable use can be  identified; judgments must
then be made regarding the  benefits/costs  of improving  the degree  of  waste
treatment.
                                  IV-2-18

-------
TABLE IV-2-7: BIOTIC INTEGRITY CLASSES USED  IN ASSESSMENT  OF  FISH  COMMUNITIES
             ALONG WITH GENERAL DESCRIPTIONS OF THEIR ATTRIBUTES

Cl_as_s                Attributes

Excellent            Comparable to the best  situations  without  Influence  of
                     man; all regionally expected species  for the  habitat  and
                     stream  size, including  the most  intolerant  forms,  are
                     present with full array of age and  sex classes;  balanced
                     trophic structure.

Rood                 Species richness somewhat below  expectation especially
                     due to  loss of most intolerant forms; some  species with
                     less than optimal abundances or  size  distribution;
                     trophic structure shows some signs  of stress.

Fair                 Signs of additional deterioration  include  fewer
                     intolerant forms, more  skewed trophic structure  (e.g.,
                     increasing frequency of omnivores); older  age  classes of
                     top predators may be rare.

Poor                 Dominated by omnivores, pollution-tolerant  forms,  and
                     habitat general ists; few top carnivores; growth  rates
                     and condition factors commonly depressed;  hybrids  and
                     diseased fish often present.

Very Poor            Few fish present, mostly introduced or very tolerant
                     forms;  hybrids common;  disease,  parasites,  fin damage,
                     and other anomalies regular.

No Fish              Repetitive sampling fails to turn  up  any fish.
                TABLE IV-2-8: TENTATIVE RANGES ^OR THE  BIOTIC
                _ INTEGRITY CLASSES. _

                    Class                     Index Number

                    Excellent (E)              57-60
                    E-G                        53-56
                    Good  (G)                   48-52
                    G-F                        45-47
                    Fair  (F)                   39-44
                    F-P                        36-38
                    Poor  (P)                   28-35
                    P-VP                       24-27
                    Very  Poor (VP)             < 23
                                    IV-2-19

-------
The next  steps  in  planning the survey  are  to  review all  available  reports
and  records  concerning  the  waste  effluents  and  receiving  waters,   and  to
make  a  field  reconnaissance  of  the  waterway,  noting  all   sources  of
pollution, tributaries,  and  uses  made  of  the water.

Sampling Stations

There  is  no  set  number  of  sampling  stations  that  will  be  sufficient  to
monitor  all  types  of  waste  discharges:  however,  some  basic  rules for  a
sound  survey  design  are  listed   below   (Cairns  and Dickson  1971).    The
following describes an  "upstream-dcwnstream" study.  The  reader  should  also
consult Section IV-"S on  the  reference reach approach to  see  an  alternative
method.

1.    Always   have   a  reference   station  or  stations   above  all   possible
    discharge  points.     Because   the   usual  purpose  of  a  survey   is  to
    determine the  damage that pollution causes  to aquatic  life,  there  must
    be some  basis  for comparison  between  areas  above and  below  the point or
    points of  discharge.   In practice, it  is  usually  advisable to  have at
    least two  reference  stations.   One  should  be  well  upstream from  the
    discharge and  one directly above the  effluent  discharge,  but  out of any
    possible influence  from  the discharge.

2.  Have a station  directly  below each  discharge.

3.  If the  discharge  does not completely mix  on  entering the waterway but
    channels  on one  side,  stations  must  be  subdivided  into  left-bank,
    midchannel,  and   right-bank   substations.      All   data  collected
    biological,  chemical,  and  physical   -  should  be  kept  separate  by
    substations.

4.  Have  stations  at  various distances  downstream from the  last  discharge
    to determine the linear  extent  of  damage to  the  river.

5.  All  sampling   stations must  be ecologically  similar  before the  bottom
    fauna communities found  at  each station can be  compared.   For example,
    the stations should  be similar with  respect to  bottom  substrate (sand,
    gravel,   rock,  or mud),  depth,  presence  of  riffles  and  pools,  stream
    width, flow velocity,  and bank  cover.

6.  Biological  sampling  stations  should be  located  close  to  those sampling
    stations  selected   for  chemical and  physical  analyses  to  assure  the
    correlation of  findings.

7.  Sampling stations  for bottom fauna  organisms should  be  located in  an
    area of  the stream  that  is not  influenced by  atypical  habitats,  such as
    those created  by road  bridges.

8.  In order to  make  comparisons  among  sampling  stations, it  is  essential
    that all stations be  sampled  approximately  at the  same time.  Not  more
    than  2  weeks  should  elapse  between  sampling  at   the first  and  last
    stations.
                                   IV-2-20

-------
 For  a  long-term biological monitoring  program,  bottom organisms  should be
 collected  at  each  station  at  least once during  each  of  the  annual  seasons.
 More frequent  sampling may be  necessary  if water quality of  anv riisrharop
 changes  or if  spills  occur.   The most  critical  period
                                                                    seasons.
                                                               any discharge
                                                                bottom  fauna
changes  or  if  spills  occur.   The most  critical  period  for bottom  fauna
organisms is usually during  periods of  high  temperature and  low  flow of the
waterway.    Therefore,   if  time  and   funds   available   limit  the  sampling
frequency,  then  at  least one  survey  during  this  time  will   produce  useful
information.

Sampling Equi pment

Commonly  used  devices  for  sampling  benthic  macroinvertebrate  communities
include the Peterson dredge, the  surber  square  foot  sampler,  aquatic  bottom
nets, and  artificial  substrate  samplers.    Proper use  of  the  first  three
pieces  of  equipment requires  that  the  operator  exert  the  same amount  of
effort  at each  station  before comparisons can  be  made.  This  subjectivity
can  cause  error,  but  can   be  minimized   by  an   experienced  operator.
Artificial  substrates standardize sampling to some extent by  providing  the
same type  of  habitat  for colonization  when  placed in  ecologically  similar
conditions.  A simple type of  artificial substrate sampler  is  a  wire  basket
containing  rocks and debris.   Others  consist of masonite plates  or  plastic
webs  which  can  be  floated  or  submerged.    Additional   advantages   of
artificial  substrate samplers  are  quickness  and ease  of use.
Fish sampling equipment  includes  electrofishing  gear,
seine,  purse  seine),  towed nets  (otter trawl),  gill
chemical  toxicants  (rotenone,  antimycin).    As
sampling  effort  must  be  put  forth_ at  each
equipment.   Also, measures  should  be  taken  to
fish sampling.

Number of Samples
                                                       encircling gear (haul
                                                       nets,  maze  gear,  and
                                                 discussed  above,  the  same
                                                  station  when  using  this
                                                  reduce  the selectivity  of
If comparisons are to  be  made between stations in a  pollution  survey,  each
station must be sampled equally.   Either  an  equal  number  of  samples  must  be
taken  at  each  station  or an  equal  amount  of  time  and  effort  must  be
expended.

Organisms are  not randomly  distributed  in  nature,  but  tend  to occur  in
clusters.    Because  of this,  it  is  necessary  to  take replicate  samples  in
orde<~ to obtain a composite sample that is  representative  of  that station.
There is no  "cookbook  recipe"  which defines the  number of samples  to  take
in  a  given  situation.    Cairns and  Dickson  (1971)  have  found  practical
                                  than three artificial  substrate  samplers,
                                  least  three  Surber  square  foot  samples
                                  samples  required to  describe the  bottom
                                     Naturally,  increasing  the  number  of
                                  reliability  of  the  data.    The  data  of
          samples  taken  at a given  station  are  combined  to  form a  pooled
         It has been found that a plot of the  pooled diversity  index versus
experience to  show  that  not  less
3  to  10  dredge  hauls,  and  at
represent  the  minimum number  of
fauna  of  a  particular  station.
replicate  samples  increases  the
replicate
sample.
                                  IV-2-21

-------
cumulative sample units  becomes  asymptotic,  and that  once  this asymptotic
diversity index  value  is found,  little  is gained  by  additional  sampling.
Ideally,  a  base  line  study  would  be  conducted to determine  the  optimum
number of samples for a pollution survey.

STATISTICAL ANALYSES

This  section  describes some  of  the statistical  methods of  comparing the
diversity indices calculated for different sampling stations.
Hutcheson's t-test

Hutcheson  (1970)  proposed  a t-test for testing  for  difference between two
diversity indices:
                                  Hl ' H2
                              t =
                                   Hl ' H2
Where H}-H£  is simply  the difference  between  the two  diversity  indices,
and
            s
                                           2   ]1/2
                                               J
The variance of H may be approximated by:
                         I  f1  log   f1  - (If. log f.)/n
                                      n
Where  f-;  is  the frequency  of  occurrence
number  of
associated
                               of  species  i  and n
 individuals  in  the  sample.    The  degrees   of
with the preceding t are approximated by:
                             ^22    ,.22
is  the
freedom
total
 (df)
                       =  (S
                             1
                              n.
                                                  n.
Convenient  tables  of  filog2fi   are   provided  by  Lloyd,  et  al.   (1968),
and t-distribution tables  can  be  found in any statistics textbook  (such  as
Dixon and Massey, 1969;  Zar,  1974;  etc.).  Example IV-2-1 demonstrates  the
calculation  of  the  Shannon-Wiener  index  (H) for  two  sets  of  hypothetical
sampling  station  data, and then  tests for  significant  difference  between
them using Hutcheson's t-test.
                                  IV-2-22

-------
Example IV-2-1.   Comparing Two Indices of Diversity (adapted from Zar
1974)7             ~~~

H0: The diversity index of station 1 is the same as the diversity
      index of station 2.

HA: The diversity indices of stations 1 and 2 are not the same.  The
      level of significance (CL) = 0.05

Speci es
1
2
3
4
5
6

number of
individual s( i)
47
35
7
5
3
3
Station 1
percentaae( i)
47
35
7
5
3
3

ff log f .
78.5886
54.0424
5.9157
3.4949
1.4314
1.4314

i i
131.4078
83.4452
4.9994
2.4429
0.6830
0.6830
n. n
7T 1o9 n
-0.1541
-0.1596
-0.0808
-0.0651
-0.0457
-0.0457
              100               100        144.9044      223.6613  -0.5510
                                Station 2
             number of                  f   ,  .            .  2 f   nf
  Species  individualsf  f)   percentagef  i) M  log fi   ri I09  fi  7P
1 48
2 23
3 11
4 13
5 3
6 2
48
23
11
13
3
2
80.6996
31.3197
11. 4553
14.4813
1.4314
0.6021
135.6755
42.6489
11.9294
16.1313
0.6830
0.1813
-0.1530
-0.1468
-0.1054
-0.1152
-0.0457
-0.0340
               100               100        139.9894     207.2494  -0.6001
                                   IV-2-23

-------
HI = 0.5510                          Hp = 0.6001


Sf; = 0.00136884                      SJ] = 0.00112791
 Hl                                   H2

S     = 0.0499
 M1"H2

t = -0.98


df = 198.2 = 200


From a t-distribution  table:   t.
                               Q ntr?} ?00
Therefore, since the t value is  not  as great as the critical value  for the
95 percent level  of  significance  (CL = 0.05), the  null  hypothesis  (H0)  is
not rejected.

Analysis of Variance

Analysis of  variance  (ANOVA)  can be used  to test  the null  hypothesis  that
all  means are  equal,  e.g.  H0: u^=U2 = .. .=U|<,  where  k  is  the  number  of
experimental  qroups.   "Single factor   or  "one-way" ANOVA  is  used  to  test
the  effect   of  one  factor  (sampling  site)  on  the  variable  in  question
(diversity) in Example IV-2-2.   Two-way  ANOVA can  be used  for  comparison of
spacial and temporal  data.

In  Example   IV-2-2,  each  datum  (X-j,-)  represents  a  diversity  index  that
has  been  calculated  for  j   replicate  samples  at   each  of   i   stations.
Also, x.  represents  the  mean  of  station   i,  n^-  represents the   number  of
replicates in sample i, and N(=£n.) represents the  total  number  of  indices
calculated in the survey.

After   computing  the  mathematical   summations,  the  ANOVA   results   are
typically  summarized  in  a  table  as   shown.    The  equality  of  means  is
determined by the F  test.

                                   IV-2-24

-------
        CL> groups df, error df = group  MS
                                 error  MS

  The critical  value for this test  is obtained  from  an  F-distribution table
  based  on  the degrees  of freedom  of  both  the  numerator  and  denominator.
  Since  the  computed F  is  at least  as large  as  the  critical  value,  H0  is
  rejected, e.g.   the diversity  index means  at  all  stations  are not  equal.

  Example IV-2-2.  A Single Factor Analysis  of  Variance (adapted from Zar
  1974).

  H0: Ul = u2 = u3 = u4  = u5

  H^: The mean diversity indices of  the five  stations  are  not  the same

    Q = 0.05
Station 1
2. £2
3.32
3.64
3.46
2.91
3.10
Station
x .
i
n.
Station 2
3.96
4.08
3.79
3.71
4.36
4.24
1
3.21

6
Station 3
4.10
4.41
4.64
4.02
3.86
3.63
2 3
4.02 4.11

6 6
Station 4
4.63
4.21
4.35
4.88
4.37
4.01
4
4.41

6
Station 5
5.63
5.41
5.94
6.27
6.00
5.73
5
5.83

6
   I  x  .
   =   U
n.
      .
      ' J
19.25
          /n.   61.76
                I  x
                =   '
24.14
              97.12
         /n  = 580.84
                    .. = 129.49
24.67
            101.43
                                                 c =
26.45
             116.60
34.98
            203.93
                             1
                 i = 583.21
                                                      II     12
                                                = 558.92
total  sum of  squares =  [  [  x^ -C
                            ' J
                       1  J
                    24.29


                    IV-2-25

-------
  groups  sum of squares =
                                n.
                                               - C = 21.92
  error sum of squares = total  ss - groups ss = 2.37
  total  degrees of freedom = N  - 1 = 29
  groups degrees of freedom = k - 1 = 4
  error degrees of freedom = total df - groups df = 25
  mean  squared deviations from  the mean (MS) = ss/df
  groups MS =  21.92/4 = 5.48
                                                error MS = 2.37/25 = 0.09
             Summary of the Analysis of Variance
Source of Variation
                                   SS
                                              df
MS
total
groups
error
F = groups MS
error MS
24.29
21.92
2.37
5.480
0.095
29
4
25
57.68


5.480
0.095


          F 0.05(1), 4, 25  = 2'76
          Therefore, Reject H0 :  u^u 2=u 3=u « = ur

Multiple Range Testing

The single factor analysis of variance tests whether or not all  of  the  mean
diversity indices are  the  same,  but gives no  insight  into the  location  of
the differences  among stations.    To  determine  between  which  stations  the
equalities  or  inequalities  lie,  one  must resort  to  multiple   comparison
tests (also known as multiple range tests).  The most commonly used methods
are  the  Student-Newman-Keul s test  (Newman   1939,   Keuls 1952)  and   the
Duncan's test (Duncan 1955).

Student-Newman-Keul s Test

Example  IV-2-3  demonstrates  the  Student-Newman-Keul s  (SNK)  procedure  for
the  data presented  in  Example  2.    Since  the  ANOVA  in Example  IV-2-2
rejected the null hypothesis  that all  means are  equal,  the SNK test  may  be
applied.  First, the  diversity index means are ranked in  increasing  order.
Then,  pairwise  differences  ( xg-x/\ )  are tabulated  as
IV-2-2 .   The value of p is determined  by the  number  of
of means being tested.  Using  the  p value and  the error
from the ANOVA, "studentized  ranges,"  abbreviated ^.
                                                          shown  in  Example
                                                         means in the  range
                                                         degrees of freedom
                                                         '      are obtained
from  a  table of
calculated by:
                  q-distribution  critical  values.    The standard  error  is
                   SE =  (S2/n)1/2  =  (error  MS/n)1/2
If the  k  group sizes  are  not equal,  a
For each comparison involving unequal n,
by:
                                         slight modification  is necessary.
                                         the standard error is  approximated
                      SE =
                                           1/2
                                  IV-2-26

-------
Example IV-2-3.  Student-Newman-Keuls  Multipie  Range Test  with Equal Sample
                 Sizes.   This  example  utilizes  the  raw  data  and analysis of
                 variance  presented  in Example  IV-2-2.
Ranks of sample means  (i
Ranked sample means (x.)
1
3.21
2 •
4.02
                                               3
                                               4.11
                                                             4
                                                             4.41
                                                                 5
                                                                 5.83
            SE =  (error MS/n)1/?  =  (0.095/6)1/2  =  0.125
Comoa
(B vs.
5 vs
5 vs
5 vs
5 vs
4 V S
4 vs
4 vs
3 vs
3 vs
2 vs
MS on
A
1
• j.
. L
. w
t
. 1
, 2
» •-•
. 1
. 2
. 1
Di f Terence
5.83-3.21=2.62
5.83-4.02=1.81
".83-4.11=1.72
5.83-4.41=1.42
4.41-3.21=1.20
4. 41-^.02=0. 39
Do Not Test
4.11-3.21=0.90
Do Not Test
4.02-3.21=0.81
SE
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.

0.

0,

126
125
126
126
126
126

126

126
q
20.79
14.37
13.65
11.27
9.52
3.10

7.14

6.43
P
5
4
3
2
4
3

3

2
in.
4.
3.
J *
2.
3.
2

3.

2.
05,24,p*
166
901
532
919
901
532

532

919
Concl usi
Reject
Reject
Reject
Reject
Reject
Accept

Reject

Reject
on
HO'
HO:

Ho:
H0:
H0:

HO:

HO:

u5=u1
u 5 = u £
U5=U3

U4 = u-j
U£ = U2

IJ3 = U1

U9 = U1
 Since qn oc  0(-    does  not  appear  in the q-distribution table, qn n!- ?/,    is  used.
        J.UO,£3,p                                               U.uO,<-H,p

Overall  conclusion:  u-
                 -,
                     u9  =  LU = u,
The q value is  computed  by:
                                =  (XB - XA)/SE
If the  computed
ther H
          0
            = u/\
                     q  value  is  greater
                     is  rejected.
                                      than or  equal  to the  critical  value,
In  Example 3,  after  accepting  H0:u,i=U2  there  is  no need  to test  4  vs.
3 or 3 vs. 2.   The  conclusions drawn in the example  are  that the community
at  Station  1  has a  si gni fi cantly - di fferent mean diversity  index  from  all
other  sampled  communities; likewise, the  Station 5 mean  is  different from
the  others.    However,  the   communities  at  Stations 2,  3,  and  4  have
statistically  equal  diversity  index  means.     These  conclusions  can  be
visually represented  by
different with a common
                              underlining  the means  that
                             line  as  shown  below:
                                                      are  not  significantly
                  station    1234
     meen diversity  index    3.21    4.02    4.11   4.41
                                                    5
                                                    5.83
Conversely,   any   two  means   not  underscored   by   the  same   line  are
sigri ficantly different.

Duncan's Multiple Range Test

The  theoretical basis  of the Duncan's  test  is somewhat  different  from the
Stucent-Newman-Keul  test,   although  the   procedures  and  conclusions  are  quit
similar.     Duncan's  test  makes   use  of   the   concept  of   Least  Sigm'fican
                                       IV-2-27

-------
Difference  (LSD)  which  is  related  to  the  t-test.
discussed previously.  The LSD is calculated by:
                                                 a  form  of  which  was
                           LSDa =
                                (2S2/n)1/2
where
       is  the
replications,  and
freedom   (MS   and
variance).   After
    mean   square   for
 t  is  the  tabulated  t
  df   for   error  are
  determining  p as  in
             error,
             value
  n
for
             is   the  number   of
            the  error degrees  of
calculated  in   the   analysis   of
the  SNK  procedure,  R values  are
                               and
obtained from a table dependent on the level of significance, error  df,
p.  The  shortest  significant  difference  (SSD)  is  computed by the  equation:

                               SSD = R(LSD)

Example  IV-2-4  demonstrates  Duncan's procedure for  hypothetical  data.   As
before,  the difference  between  means   is  calculated  for  every possible
pairwise  comparison  of means.   This  difference  is  then compared  to  the
corresponding SSD value and conclusions  are drawn.   If the difference  is at
least  as  large  as the SSD, then  the null  hypothesis - that  the two means
are  equal   -  is  rejected; if  the  difference  is   less  than  SSD,   H0  is
accepted.   The  results  are visually  represented  as  described  for the  SNK
test.
Example IV-2-4.  Duncan's Multiple Range Test.

H0: Ul=u2=u3=u4
H^: The mean diversity indices of the four sampling stations are  not
the same
   d= 0.05
n = 4
Ranks of sample means (i)
Ranked sample means (x-j  )
  LSD
0.05
               . 05
                       error MS = 0.078
 1
 5.3


= 0.447
                    2
                    5.7
                                       3
                                       5.9
error df=9

  4
  6.3
Compari son
(B vs.
4 vs.

4 vs.
3 vs.
3 vs.
2 vs.


mean di
visual
A )
1

3
1
2
1


versi
Di f ference
(XB - "
6.3-5.
6.3-5.
6.3-5.
5.9-5.
5.9-5.
5.7-5.

station
ty index
X{\ )
3=1. 0
7=0.6
9=0.4
3=0.6
7 = 0.2
3=0.4

1
5.3
representation
P
4
3
2
3
2
2

2
5.7


R
a
i
i
i
i
i
i

3
5.9


SSD
,df,p
.07
.04
.00
.04
.00
.00

4
6.3

=R(LSD)
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.




48
46
45
46
45
45




Conclusion
reject
reject
accept
reject
accept
accept




Ho
Ho
HO
Ho
HO
HO




:U4=U]
:u4=u2
:u4=u3
:u3=Ul
:u3=u2
:U2=U1



                                    IV-2-28

-------
COMMUNITY COMPARISON INDICES

Introduction

Whereas  the  statistical   analyses   discussed  above  can  discern  significant
differences  between  diversity  indices  calculated  at   two  or  more  sampling
stations,  community  comparison  indices  have  been  developed  to  measure  the
degree  of  similarity or  dissimilarity  between  communities.  These  Indices  can
detect   spatial   or  temporal   changes   in   community  structure.   Polluted
communities presumably  will  have  different species occurrences  and  abundances
than  relatively  non-polluted  communities, given  that   all  other factors  are
equal. Hence, community comparison indices  can be  used  to  assess the impact of
pollution on aquatic biological  communities.

There  are  two basic types  of  community  comparison  indices:  qualitative  and
quantitative. Qualitative  indices  use binary  data: in  ecological  studies,  the
two possible attribute  states  are  that a  species  is present or  is  not present
in  the  collection.   This  type  of  community similarity   index is used  when  the
sampling data consists  of species  lists.  Kaesler  and Cairns  (1972)  considered
the jse  of presence-absence data to be the only  justifiable  (and  defensible)
approach when comparing a variety of organism  groups   (e.g. algae  and aquatic
insects).  Also,  qualitative similarity  coefficients  are simple to  calculate.
When  data  on  species abundance are  available, quantitative  similarity Indices
can De  used.   Quantitative coefficients incorporate species abundance as  well
as  occurrence in  their  formulas,  and thus,  retain  more information than
indices  using binary data. An  annotated  list  of  community  comparison indices
of both types appears in Table IV-2-9.

Qua 11 tative, Sirnijaunty^Jjdices

Although  the terminology used  in  the  literature  varies  considerably,   the
qualitative similarity  indices  in  Table IV-2-9  (1 - 6) are  represented using
the symbolism of the  2X2  contingency  table shown  in  Figure  IV-2-5.  In  the  form
of  the  contingency  table  shown, collections A  and B are  entities  and all  of
the species represented  in a collection are the  attributes  of that  entity.

Indices 1 through 4  in  Table  IV-2-9  are constrained  between  values  of  0 and 1,
while equation  6  has   a potential  range of  -1 to   1.  The   minimum value
represents  two  collections with  no   species  in  common  and  the maximum value
indicates structurally identical communities.

According to Boesch  (1977), the Jaccard, Dice, and Ochiai  coefficients are  the
most  attractive   qualitative  similarity   measures  for  biological   assessment
studies. The  Jaccard coefficient  (1)  is  superior for  discriminating between
high'y  similar  collections.  The  Dice  (2)  and  Ochiai   (4)  indices  place  more
emphasis on common  attributes  and  are better at discriminating  between  highly
dissimilar  collections  (Clifford  and Stehpenson,  1975;  Boesch,  1977;  Herricks
and Cairns, 1982). Thus,  the nature  of  the data  determines which index is  most
suitable.   The  Jaccard  coefficient  has been widely  used by  some workers  in
stream  pollution  investigations  (Cairns  and  Kaesler,  1969;  Cairns  et  al.,
1970.   Cairns  and  Kaesler",  19/1; 'Kaesler  at  al., 1971;  Kaesler  and  Cairns,
1972.  Johnson and Brinkhurst, 1971;  Foerster et  al., 1974).   Peters  (1968)  has
written  BASIC  computer  programs   for  calculating  Jaccard,  Dice,  and  Ochiai
i ndi ces.
                                    IV-2-29

-------
                                        oo
                                        LO
                                        QJ
                                        C
                                                                                                                  un
                                                                                                                  CTi
                                                                                                                              CM
                                                                                                                              in
       QJ
       O
       C
       QJ
       i_
       QJ
      i_
       QJ
      cc
•o
 i.
 re
 u
 ro
 O
 c
 ro
^
 QJ
 Isl
                         •O
                          C
                          re
                          o
                         to
                                                      in
                                                      cr.
                                                                    CTi
u
Cfl
QJ
O
                                                                                cri
 QJ
 O
m
 OJ
 o
ca
"O
 c
 re

 >!
 re
 i.
CO
                                                           QJ
                                                          ^
                                                           ro
                                                                                                                                .Q
                                                                                                                                •r-
                                                                                                                               Q.
                                                                                                                              •i—
                                                                                                                               E
LiJ
O
Q
O
CO
                         c\j
               o
              ii
r«H



-C
4-
re
SBH^-
CM

1









T3 re
4-
U
+
JO
"^
re
^j

F»H
I— 1
*"• ^
o
4-
re ro

^«*
X!
4-
re
i — i
CM U
~-s JD
F- 1 1
1 	 1 jQ
»— re
u
4-
re

M-^.
JD
4-
re
L-_J
Ei u
"^L_, 	
— . JD
•O 'i~
4. . —
I"* rt
«L« Jul
.— • «f—
. — . X
u
4- -
re re
^_« *r~
. — • X
•o • —
4- C
O •--
^-* E
.^v.
.0 t— j c
-f
re CM
o.
•— . i
J2
**— •—
x jo
•^
4- X
ro
•i- i
X
— • re

X
-j . —

c. — 3 :
— ro
jD -t-
•r- Q.

u— j
+
Ln
re •
•r- O
X


-— O ^H
i 	 i n n n
                                                                                                                   ^s
                                                                                                                    ro
S
O
0
>-
\—


$

C
— 2
z E
ro
2:
2:
o
o

u_
o

>-
o:
<
s
s
^3
CO


I
O-i
1
CM
1
>•

LU
— 1
=3
<
1—
E
0
o

u-
o

4-J
c
QJ
•^
o
•f—
u_
u-
QJ
E
re
z

QJ
>
*^
4->
0.
S_
CJ
1/1
QJ
O
QJ
O
O

•c
S.
re
o
(j
re


•
i— i
.^^
c
o
c
QJ
L-
o
u->

f
•r-
.*:
ISI
5
O
C
ro
.*:
QJ
N
O
"^--

X
QJ
•c
C
i— <

QJ

re
S

QJ
^~
O.
£
•r-
to

s_
a>
c
QJ
jc
o
•r—
S

T3
C
re

i — X
ro QJ
.* -o
O C
00 i—

«
OO












*— •
re
^
3
V)
4->
O
^-^

X
OJ
X3
C
>— 1

•f—
re
•r—
£:
!_)
O

.
«d-






















X
eu
•o
c
t — 1

S-
flj
cn
ro
u.

.
uo




4->
C
QJ
.^
O
•?•
14-
>4-
QJ
0
O

c
o
.^
4-»
re
?"-
OJ
i_
s_
o
o

•M
c
•r~
o
Q.

.
<£>
O
•r-
4->
re
•p—
u
o
VI
VI
<

u-
o

4->
C
QJ
•^
O
•f—
14-
W-
QJ
O
CJ>

^—
r-~
re
•o
c
CD
^.




*->
c
QJ
0

U-
14-
QJ
O
O

>,
4->
•r—
L.
re
P—
*P»
E
*r-
OO

in
•^
4-J
^
3
O
1
>,
re
s_
CO

•
r^








>>
+J

C
re

•^-
E
»r—
V)
l/l
•^>
O

in 4->
•^ c
+-> QJ
S_ •!-
3 U
O •>-
1 >4-
>51*-
re QJ
s- o
CD O



>,
4?

cr
3

JS
o
c_>

*+-
o

>,
4-7
•^*
i-
ns

*^-
E

uo

QJ
CD
re
4->
C
QJ
O

QJ
Q.



                                                            IV-2-30

-------
                 Ol
                                                                                               01
 ro
 O)
Q.

"O
 C
 ro

 H
 ro
.C
JK:
 C

Q_
                                  en
                                  LT)
                                  Ol
ro
4->

to

s_
o
                                                  VD
                                                  CTl
                                                   C
                                                   !_
                                                   O
                                                                  O
                                                                  trt
                                                                  O
                                                                 CO
                                                                              IO
                                                                              CTi
                                                                               re
                                                                              _*:
                                                                               O
                                                                                              O
                                                                                              to
                                                                                 fO
                                                                                 01
                                                                                 c
                                                                                 oo
                                                                                              JO
                                                                                            IX
              fO
            c
            i
                                                                            CVJ
                J°
               to
                   II

                    _d
                     ro
                  to
                                             3:

                                              !
                                                                              X

                                                                              I
                                 i:

                                  J3
                                   rO
                                to
                                                                              •9
                                                                               ro
                                                                            10
                                                                                                 IX

                                                                                                   I

                                                                                                   -Q
                                                                                                   •i—
                                                                                                  X
                                                                                                     /o
                                                                                                  IX
                                                                                                 ro
                                                                                               CO
OJ
OJ!
 l
               X
               OJ
              •o
               c:
 c
 o
 t/1
 i_
 ro
 QJ
O.

"O
                               X
                               O)
                              T3
                              S_
                              o
                                                 CL
                                                 ro
                                               I.
                                               O
                                o
                                u~
                                o
                                               GJ
                                              T3
                                               C
                                  C

                                  O
                                               QJ
                                               O
                                               c
                                               ro
                                               +J
                                               i/l
                                                                                             Qj c
                                                                                             s- o
                                                                                             !^ l^
                                                                                             O i.
                                                                                            co fa
                                                                                                01
                                                                                            4-> Q.
                                                                                             O  C
                                                                                            s:  CD
                                                                                             I  T—
                                                                                            O  OJ
                                                                                            S-  O
                                                                                            Q- CJ
             CO
                                             IV-2-31

-------
TABLE IV-2-9 (continued)






Key:   S         = similarity between  samples.


      D         = dissimilarity between  samples.


      a,b,c,d  = (see Figure IV-2-5).


      x.  ,  x.K = number of individuals  of species  i  at Station  A  or  B.
       ia   ID

      p.  ,  p..  = relative abundance  of  species  i at  Station A or  B.
       i a   ID

      X  , X,    = total  number of individuals  at Station A  or B.
       a    D

      n         = total  number of different taxa.


      X  , X    = Simpson diversity  index for  Station A or  B.
       a    D

      H  ,       = Shannon-Wiener diversity index of Station A and  B combined.
       ab                               J

      H         = maximum possible value of H  , .
       max                                  ab

      H  .      = minimum possible value of H  b.
                      *1a + *1b log xia * xib
                      _


             ab " "   Xa + Xb       Xa + Xb



                 _ (Xa ^ Xb) log (Xa + Xb) - I x.a log x.a -  \ x-b log
            Hmax
            H .   =
             min
                                    X  + X.
                                     a    b
                                        IV-2-32

-------
                                      COLLECTION A
CQ


O
t—M
t—
O
         c
         
-------
The  Fager coefficient (5)  is  simply  a  modification of the  Ochiai  index.
Because  a  correction factor  is  subtracted from  the  Ochiai  index,  the Fager
coefficient may range from  slightly  less  than  zero  to slightly  less than one;
this makes it  less  desirable.   The Fager  index has  been used a  great  deal  in
marine ecology.

Both  the  Sokal  and  Michener  index (3) and the  Point Correlation Coefficient
(6) include the double-absent term d. A number of authors (Kaesler and Cairns,
1972;  Clifford  and  Stephenson,   1975;   Boesch,  1977)  have  criticized  the
approach of considering two  collections similar  on  the basis of species being
absent from both.

Pinkham  and   Pearson   (1976)  illustrated  the  weaknesses  of  qualitative
comparison indices.   The  basic  shortcoming  is  that  two communities  having
completely different  species  abundances  but the  same  species  occurrence will
produce  the  maximum  index   value,  indicating  that  the  two collections  are
identical.

Quantitative  Comparison  Indices

Quantitative  indices  (7 -  12) consider species  abundance  in addition  to mere
presence-absence.    Incorporating species abundance precludes  the over-emphasis
of  rare species,  which  has been a criticism  of  the Jaccard coefficient
(Whittaker and Fairbanks,  1958).  Quantitative  measures are not  as sensitive to
rare  species  as  qualitative indices  and emphasize dominant  species  to  a
greater  extent.    Distance  (11),   information  (9,  10),  and  correlation  (12)
coefficients   weight  dominance  even  more  than  other quantitative  indices.
Quantitative    indices   also   avoid  the   loss   of   information   involved  in
considering  only   presence-absence  data   when  species  abundance  data  are
available.   However,  data   transformations  (e.g.,  to logarithms,  roots,  or
percentages)   may  be  desirable  or  necessary  for the  use  of  some quantitive
comparison indices.   Calculation  of quantitative indices  is more complicated
than qualitative coefficients, but  can  be  facilitated  by computer application.

The Bray-Curtis index (7)  is one of the most widely used quantitive comparison
measures.  Forms of this  index  have been  referred to as "index of associaton"
(Whittaker, 1952),   as "dominance affinity"  (Sanders, 1960),  and as "percentage
similarity of  community"  (Johnson and Brinkhurst,  1971;  Pinkham and Pearson,
1976; Brock,  1977).   The  simplest  and  probably most commonly used form of the
Bray-Curtis index is the Percent Similarity  equation:
                          Sab  =2,min(pia,pib)

where the  attributes  have been  standardized  into a proportion  or  percent of
the  total  for  that entity  (collection).   The  shortcoming  of the  Percent
Similarity  coefficient was illustrated by Pinkham  and  Pearson  (1976)  as shown
below.
                                    IV-2-34

-------
                                      TAXA

                             ABODE
Station A

Station B
40     20     10     10      10

20     10      5      5       5
In this hypothetical comparison, all  species  are
A  as  at  Station B  but  their relative abundance
maximum similarity  value of  1.0  is  registered.
situation  is  germane  to  pollution assessment
difference  between  two  sampling stations  is  the
eutrophication.
                     twice as abundant at Station
                     is  identical; therefore, the
                      The authors  felt  that this
                     surveys in  which  the only
                     relative  degree of cultural
In  Table  IV-2-9,  the  Bray-Curtis  index  is  displayed  as  both  a  measure of
similarity and dissimilarity.  Any community similarity index can be converted
to a dissimilarity measure by the  simple equality:

                                   D  =  1 - S

Of course, values obtained by a dissimilarity expression are inversely related
to similarity values;  they increase with decreasing similarity.

Pinkham and  Pearson  (1976)  presented  a community  similarity  index  (8)   that
would  overcome  the shortcomings  of  other  indices  (e.g.   1,3,7,12)  that   were
discussed in  the  article.    Their similarity  coefficient can  be  calculated
using  either  actual  or   relative  (percent)  species  abundance,  although   they
suggested using actual abundance  whenever possible.   The  authors also offered
a  modified  formula that includes  a weighting factor   for  assigning  more
significance to dominant  species:
                      'ab
                                             x
-------
the Morisita  index ranges from  zero  for no  resemblance  to  one for  identical
collections.  The  Horn  Index  of   Overlap   is   a  manipulation  of   Shannon's
information theory equation that closely resembles the expression of  community
redundancy developed  by Margalef:

                      R = (K     - H)/  (H     - H  .  )
                          v max         max    mm


The observed  value  in Horn's  index (Hab)  is the Shannon index calculated for
the sum  of the two collections  being  considered.  The maximum diversity  value
(Hmax) would  occur if  the two collections  contained  no species in common, and
the minimum  diversity value   (Hmin) would  be attained  if the two collections
contained  the  same  species  in the  same  proportions.   It  should be noted that
the equations  given  for  Hab,  Hmax,  and Hmin  in the key  to  Table  IV-2-9 are
adapted  from  those  given by Perkins  (1983)  since those  appearing  in the
original   article  (Horn,  1966) are apparently  inconsistent   with  the Shannon
index.   The Morisita  and the  Horn  indices   have been  used  in aquatic ecology
studies (Kohn, 1968;  Bloom et al.,  1972;  Livingston,  1975;  Heck, 1976).

If  two   entities   (i.e.   communities)   are  thought   of  as  points  in  an
n-dimensional   space whose dimensions  are determined  by their attributes  (i.e.
species occurrence and  abundance  ),  then the  linear distance between the two
points  in the  hyperspace can be  construed as  a measure  of dissimilarity
between  the  two entities.   The two  distance formulas shown  in  Table IV-2-9
(11) are simply forms  of the  familiar  geometrical distance formula,
which has been  expanded  to  accomodate  n dimensions.  Sokal  (1961)  divided the
distance  by  n  to produce  a mean  squared  difference,  which  he  felt  was  an
appropriate  measure  of  taxonomic distance.   Values computed  by  the distance
formulas  may  range  from zero for  identical  collections  to infinity; the
greater the  distance the less  similar the  two  comunities  are.   Because the
difference  in  species  abundance  is  squared in  the numerator,  the distance
formulas  are  heavily  influenced  by  abundant  species  and may over-emphasize
dominance.     The similarity   of  disparate  communities  with   low   species
abundances  may  be   overstated,  while the  resemblance  of  generally  similar
communities   with   a  few  disproportionately  nigh   species  abundances  may  be
understated.  To  avoid  indicating misleading resemblance, it may  be  necessary
to transform data  (e.g.  to  squared  or cubed roots)  before computing  taxonomic
distance.

The  Product-Moment  Correlation  Coefficient  (12)  is  a  popular  resemblance
measure that ranges  from -I  (completely dissimilar) to  +1 (entirely  similar).
Several undersirable  characteristics  of this measure have been cited  (Sneath
and  Sokal,  1973;   Clifford  and  Stephenson,  1975;  Boesch,  1977).    Deceptive
resemblance   values  can   result  from outstandingly  high  species abundances  or
the  presence   of   many  species  absences,   and  non-identical  communities can
register  perfect  correlation  scores.   Pinkhair and  Pearson (1976)  demonstrated
how  the  Product-Moment  Correlation Coefficient,  like  the  Percent  Community
Similarity  Index,   indicates  maximum similarity  for two  communities having the
same relative species composition  but  different  actual species  abundances.
                                      -2-36

-------
Experimental Evaluation of Comparison  Indices

Brock  (1977)  compared  the  Percent  Community  Similarity   Index  (7)  and  the
Pinkham and Pearson  Similarity  Index  (8)  for  their  ability to detect changes
in  the  zooplankton  community  of Lake  Lyndon  B.  Johnson,  Texas,  due to a
thermal   effluent.     For  this   study,   the   Pinkham   and   Pearson   index  was
considered too sensitive  to  rare  species and  not sensitive enough to  dominant
forms,  whereas  the  Percent  Similarity   coefficient  was  more  responsive  to
variation   in   dominant   species  and   relationships   between  dominant  and
semi-dominant  forms.   Linking dominance to function, the author concluded that
the  later  index  may   better  indicate  structural-funcitonal  similarity between
communities.

Perkins   (1983)  evalutaed  the  responsiveness   of eight  diversity  indices  and
five  community  comparison indices  to  increasing copper concentrations.   The
indices     were    calculated   for    bioassays   conducted    using   benthic
macroinvertebrates  and  artificial  streams.  The  indices  evaluated  by Perkins
correspond to equations presented in Tables IV-2-2 and IV-2-9 except:  Perkins
tested the  Bray-Curtis  dissimilarity  index; Perkins'  Biosim  index  is Pinkham
and Pearson's index,   and  the distance  formula  tested by Perkins  (not  included
in this  report)  is  shown  below.
                        D -
The results of  the  study  appear
are presented  for comparison.
   x. -x.,
     T3  ib
                                    Xia+xib
                                                1/2
in Figure IV-2-6; the diversity index results
The diversity  indices  did  not clearly  demonstrate  the  perturbation caused by
increasing  copper  concentrations.     The  Shannon  and  Brillouin  formulas
increased initially,  in  spite of  a  decreasing number  of  species,  because of
increasing  evenness  of species distribution.   Other than  the  increasing
diversity indicated  at  the  lower  copper  concentrations,  these  two  indices
refected  perturbation  effectively   by  decreasing  rapidly  with  increasing
poVutant concentration.   The Mclntosh, Simpson, and  Pielou (evenness) indices
(not shown for  28  days  in  Figure IV-2-6)  resembled the trends demonstrated by
the  Shannon   and  Brillouin  formulas   albeit   less  dramatically. Because  the
results obtained for those  three  indices  were less pronounced,  they were more
difficult to  interpret  than  the Shannon  and Brillouin  findings.

The  community   comparison  indices were found  to  be  good  indicators  of  the
perturbation   of macroinvertebrate  communities  caused  by  copper  pollution.
Although the  Bray-Curtis  index was considered the most  accurate after 14 days,
all of  the comparison  indices tested  effectively  reflected community response
after  28 days  (see  Figure  IV-2-6).   Note  that  by definition the Biosim,
Monsita, and  Percent  Community  Similarity   indices  decrease  as  similarity
dec-eases, while the  Distance and Bray-Curtis dissimilarity indices increase.
It  has  frequently  been  suggested  that  it  may  be   desirable  to  apply  several
indices in a  pollution  assessment study  (Peters,  1968;  Brock,  1977;  Perkins,
1983).
                                   IV-2-37

-------
              OS"  10  15
              Log Cu*"lfig/!)
                                  l=Shannon
                                  2=Brillouin
                                  3=P1elou
                                  4=Simpson
                                  5=McIntosh
                                  6=Menhinick
                                  7=Species(xlO)
                                  8=Equitabi1 it.y
                                                             (b)
      81-
    <5
    S 5:
    a
    I 4I
'0
           05  " "iO

            LogOT fyug/D

               (c)
                                                     i.o

                                                      91

                                                      3
                          l=Distance
                          2=Bray-Curtis
                          3=% Similarity
                          4=Morisita
                          5=Biosim
2.0
                                                     Log
                                                         d)
Figure IV-2-6.
          Evaluation of diversity  indices  and community comparison  indices
          using bioassay data: a,c=after  14 days; b,d=after 28  days  (from
          Perkins, 1983).
                                      IV-2-38

-------
Numerical  Classification or Cluster  Analysis

A common use of similarity  indices  is in numerical clasification of biological
communities.   Numerical classification, or  cluster  analysis,  is  a technique
for  grouping  similar  entities  on the  basis  of the  rsemblance of  their
attributes.   In instances  where  subjective classification  of  communities  is
not  clear-cut,  cluster analysis  allows   incorporation  of  large  amounts  of
attribute  data into an  objective classification procedure.   Kaesler and Cairns
(1972)  outlined  five  steps involved  in  normal   cluster  analysis.   First,  a
community   similarity  index  is  chosen  based  on  pre-determined  criteria  and
objectives.   Second,  a matri-x  of  similarity coefficients  is  generated  by
pairwise comparison of  all  possible  combinations  of  stations.   The third step
is the  actual  clustering based  on  the  resemblance coefficients.   A number of
clustering procedures are  discussed  in  the literature  (Williams,  1971; Sneath
and  Sokal, 1973;  Hartigan,  1975;  Boesch,  1977).  In the  fourth step,  the
clustered    stations   are  graphically   displayed  in   a   dendogram.   Because
multi-dimensional   resemblance  patterns are  displayed   in  two  dimensions  and
because the similarity  coefficients are  averaged,  a significant amount  of
distortion can  occur.   For this  reason,  a  distortion measure should  be
evaluated  and presented  as  the fifth  step  in  the  cluster analysis.   The
Cophenetic Correlation Coefficient (Sokal  and Rohlf,  1962)  is a popular metric
of display  accuracy.   An additional step  in  any  cluster analysis application
should  be  interpretation  of  the  numerical  classification  results since  the
technique   is designed  to simplify complex data and  not  to produce ecological
interpretation.

SUMMARY

The ability of a water  resource  to sustain a balanced  biotic community is one
of tne  best  indicators  of  its potential for beneficial use.   This  ability  is
essential  to the community's health.   Although several papers have criticized
the jse of diversity  indices (Hurlbert,1971;  Peet,1975;  Godfrey,1978), Cairns
(1977) stated that  "the diversity index is probably the best  single  means  of
assessing   biological  integrity   in   freshwater  streams and  rivers".    Cairns
concluded   that  no  single method will  adequately  assess  biological  integrity,
but rather  its quantification requires  a mix  of  assessment methods suited for
a specific  site  and  problem.   The  index  of diversity  is  an  integral  part  of
that   mix.    Community  comparison  indices  are  also  useful  in assessing  the
biological   health   of  aquatic   systems.    By  measuring  the  simiarity  (or
dissimilarity)   between  sampling   stations,   community   comparison   indices
indicate relative  impairment of the  aquatic resource.
                                  IV-2-39

-------
                               CHAPTER  IV-3
                              RECOVERY  INDEX
It  is  important to  examine the  ability of  an  ecosystem to  recover  from
displacement due to  pollutional  stress  in  order  to  evaluate the  potential
uses of  a water body.    Cairns  (1975)  developed  an index  which  gives an
indication of the ability of the system  to  recover after  displacement.  The
factors and rating system for each factor are:

(a)  Existence  of   nearby  epicenters   (e.g.,  for  rivers  these  might be
tributaries) for providing  organisms to  reinvade  a damaged system.
Rating System :  l=poor, 2=moderate, 3=good

(b) Transportability or mobility of disseminules  (the disseminules might be
spores, eggs, larvae,  flying  adults  which  might  lay eggs,  or other  stages
in the life history of an organism which permit  it  to move to a new  area).

Rating System :  l=poor, 2-moderate, 3=good

(c)  Condition  of   the  habitat   following   pollutional   stress  (including
physical  habitat and chemical quality).
Rating system :  l=poor, 2=moderate, 3=good

(d) Presence of residual  toxicants following  pollutional  stress.
Rating System :  l=large amounts, ?=rnoderate  amounts, 3=none

(e) Chemical-physical environmental quality  after pollutional stress.
Rating  System  :     l=in  severe   disequilibrium,   ?=partially   restored,
                 3=norma1

(f) Management or organizational capabilities for control of damaged  area.
Rating system :  l=none, 2-some, 3=strong enforcement  possible.

Using  the  characteristics  listed  above,   and  their   respective   rating
systems,  a recovery index can  be  developed.  The equation for the recovery
index follows:

     Recovery Index = a xbxcxdxexf
     400+ = chances of rapid recovery  excellent
     55-399 = chances of  rapid recovery  fair  to good
     less than 55 = chances of rapid recovery poor

This  index  and the  rating  system was  developed by  Cairns based  on his
experience with the Clinch  River.  For a full description of the  rationale
for the rating factor, the  reader should refer to Cairns  (1975).
                              IV-3

-------
                                  CHAPTER IV-4

                          INTOLERANT SPECIES ANALYSIS
NICHE CONCEPT

The ecological  niche  of a species  is  its  position and  role  in  the biological
community.  Hutchinson  (1957) described  niche  as  a multidimensional  space,  or
hypervolume, that is delineated  by  the  species'  environmental  requirements and
tolerances.  Physical,  chemical,  and biological  conditions  and  relationships
constitute the dimensions of the  hypervolume,  and  the  magnitude  of each dimen-
sion  is  defined by  the  upper  and lower limits of  each  environmental  variable
within which a  species  can  persist. If any one of  the  variables  is outside  of
this range the organism will  die, regardless of other environmental conditions.

TOLERANCE

The "Law  of Toleration" proposed by  Shelford  (1911) is  illustrated  in Figure
IV-4-1.  For  each species and  environmental variable there  is  a  range  in the
variable  intensity  over which  the  organism functions  at or near  its  optimum
level. Outside the maximum and  minimum  extremes  of  the  optimum range there are
zones of  physiological  stress,  and,  beyond, there  are zones  of  intolerance  in
which the  functions of  the  organism are inhibited. The  upper and lower toler-
ance  limits  (also called incipient  lethal   levels)  are intensity  levels of the
environmental variable that  will  eventually cause the death  of  a stated frac-
tion of test organisms,  usually 50 percent.

VARIABILITY OF TOLERANCE

The tolerance of  an organism for a  lethal  condition is  dependent on  its gene-
tic constitution  -  both  its species and  its  individual genetic makeup  - and
its early  and recent environmental  history (Warren  1971).  Acclimation  has  a
marked effect on  the  tolerance  of  environmental  factors such as temperature,
dissolved oxygen, and some toxic substances (see Figure  IV-4-2).  Tolerance  is
also  a  function of  the  developmental stage of the organism and  it may change
with  age  throughout  the  life  of the animal.  Because  of this variability,  no
two organisms have exactly the same tolerance for a lethal condition and toler-
ance limits must be  expressed in terms of an "average"  organism.

INTERACTIONS INFLUENCING TOXICITY

An organism's tolerance  for  a particular lethal agent  is dependent not  only  on
its own  characteristics  but  also on  the environmental   conditions. The inter-
actions  between  lethal  and  nonlethal factors  are  well   documented  and  are ad-
dressed  elsewhere in  this handbook  (Chapters  II-5  and  III-2). Briefly,  these
nonlethal effects include:
                                    IV-4-1

-------
                 Lower limit of tolerance
                                 Upper limit of tolerance •
                                                              Zone of
                                                            physiological
                                                               stress
  Zone of
physiological
   stress
   Low
Figure IV-4-1.
                                      GRADIENT-
 Law of toleration  in  relation to distribution and
 level--often a normal  curve (modified  by Kendeigh
 Shelford (1911)).
                                                           -»-High
copulation
(1974) from
                                 10    -    20       2

                             Acclimation temperature (C)
Figure  IV-4-2.   The zones  of  tolerance of brown  bullheads (Ictalurus nebulosus
                 and chum salmon  (Oncorhynchus  keta)  as delimited  by incipient
                 lethal temperature and influenced  by acclimation  temperature
                 (after Brett  1956).
                                         IV-4-2

-------
   Hardness. Increasing hardness decreases  the  effect  of  toxic  metals on aqua-
     tic organisms by forming less-toxic complexes.
   pH.  The dissociation of weak acids and bases is controlled by pH and either
     the molecular or ionic form may be more toxic.
   Alkalinity and Acidity. These modify  pH  by  constituting  the  buffering capa-
     city of the system.
   Temperature. Increasing temperature  enhances  the  effect  of toxicants by in-
     creasing the rates of metabolic processes.
   Dissolved  Oxygen.  Decreasing  dissolved  oxygen concentration  augments  the
     exposure and  absorption  of toxicants by  increasing  the  necessary  irriga-
     tion rate of respiratory organs.

When two or  more  lethal agents are  present, several  types  of interactions are
possible: synergistic, additive, antagonistic,  or no interaction.

INTOLERANT SPECIES ANALYSIS

The  tolerance  ranges  for  environmental variables  differ widely  between  spe-
cies. Thus,  the  range  of  conditions  under  which  an organism can  survive  (its
niche)  is  broader for  some  species  than it is  for others. Fish  species  with
narrow tolerance ranges are relatively  sensitive to  degradation  of water qual-
ity  and  other  habitat  modifications,  and their populations decline  or disap-
pear under those circumstances  before  more  tolerant  organisms are  affected.  In
general, intolerant  species  can be identified  and used in  evaluating environ-
mental  quality. The  presence  of  typically   intolerant  species  in  a  fish  sam-
pling survey  indicates that  the  site  has  relatively  high  quality;  while  the
absence of intolerant  species  that,  it is judged, would  be there  if  the envi-
ronment  was unaltered indicates that  the habitat is degraded.

LISTS OF INTOLERANT FISH SPECIES

While the  tolerance  limits of  a fish  species  for a  particular environmental
factor can be  defined  relatively precisely  by  toxicity bioassays, its  degree
of tolerance may  vary  considerably  over  the range of  physical, chemical,  and
biological  variables  that may be encountered in  the  environment. The  variables
that  are  the  object of  intolerant   species  analysis  are  intentionally  left
vague in order to  accommodate the  variety of  situations  precipitated by man's
activities. A species  may  be  intolerant of  alterations in water quality or  in
habitat  structure,  such as  those listed below.

         Water  Quality Changes            Habitat Alterations

         increased turbidity               substrate disruption
         increased siltation               cover removal
         increased water temperature       changes in  velocity  and discharge
         increased dissolved  solids        removal  of  instream  and streamside
         organic  enrichment                  vegetation
         lowered  dissolved  oxygen          water level  fluctuation
                                          impoundment  and  channelization
                                          blockage  or hinderance  of migration
                                    IV-4-3

-------
Many species can be  identified that  are  relatively  intolerant  of  anthropogenic
alterations of the aquatic environment compared to  other  fish,  Appendix  C  con-
tains  a  list  of fish  species,  nationally,  which  are  relatively  intolerant  to
one or more of the environmental  changes  shown above.  The  information in  Appen-
dix C  is based  on  literature sources  (Wallen  1951;  Trautman  1957;  Garlander
1969,  1977;  Scott and Grossman 1973;  Pflieger 1975;  Moyle  1976; Timbol  and
Maciolek  1978;  Smith 1979; Muncy  et  al. 1979; Lee et  al.  1980;  Morrow  1980;
Johnson and Finley 1980; U.S. EPA  1980;  Karr  1981;  Haines 1981; and Ball  1982)
and on the professional judgment of State and  University biologists.

The darters and  sculpins are listed  only  by  genus in  Appendix C.  Identifica-
tion of  those taxa  to species  would  have  been inconvenient  (together,  Ammoj^
crypta,  Ethegstoma,  Percina, and  Cottus  contain   150  species  in the  United
States)  and largely  unnecessary because, with  a  few  possible  exceptions,  all
of  the species  of   darters  and sculpins  can be  considered  intolerant.  Karr
(1981) recognized the  johnny darter  (Etneostoma nigrum)  as the  most  tolerant
darter  species   in  Illinois  and  Ball  (1982) did" not categorize the  johnny
darter as  an  intolerant forage  fish. Other  darter species  that  appear to  be
relatively more tolerant of turbidity, silt,  and detritus than  others  in  their
genus are listed below:

         mud darter                        Etheostoma asprigene
         bluntnose darter                 E .  chjongsomum
         slough darter                   F'.  gracile
         cypress darter                   ET proe1iare
         orangethroat darter              F.  spectabiTe
         swamp darter                     F. TusTfprme""
         river darter                     Fercina  shumardi

The list in Appendix C  is  intended to be used by  knowledgeable biologists  as a
rough  guide to  the  relatively  intolerant  fish species in  their  state.  Site-
specific editing is  left to persons  familiar  with  the local  fish  fauna and en-
vironmental conditions.  Local  editing of  the provided data  should produce  a
workable list  for intolerant  species  analyses  of  the streams in  that area.
                                    IV-4-4

-------
                OMNIVORE-CARNIVORE  (TROPHIC STRUCTURE) ANALYSIS
 INTRODUCTION
Water  pollution  problems  nearly  always   involve  changes  in  the  pathways  by
which  aquatic  populations  obtain  energy and  materials  (Warren  1971).  These
changes  lead to differential success  of  constituent  populations which affects
the  composition of  the aquatic  community.  Anthropogenic  introduction  of or-
ganic  substances  or  mineral  nutrients directly  increases the  energy  and ma-
terial  resources  of the system,  but  other pollution problems - such  as  pH  or
temperature  changes,  toxic materials,  low dissolved  oxygen,  turbidity, silta-
tion,  et  cetera -  also lead to changes  in trophic pathways.  Thus, the health
of  a system  can  be evaluated  through a  study  of its  trophic  structure. The
following  material  concentrates on stream and  river  systems.   Lakes will  have
different  structural aspects.

TROPHIC STRUCTURE

The  ecosystem has been described  as  the  entire  complex of interacting physi-
cochemical and  biological  activities  operating in a relatively  self-supporting
community  (Reid  and Wood  1976). The biological  operations of  an ecosystem can
be viewed  as  a series of compartments which are described  by three general  cat-
egories: producers, consumers,  and decomposers. The producers include all  auto-
trophic plants  and  bacteria  (both  photosynthetic and  chemosynthetic) which,  by
definition,  are capable  of  synthesizing organic  matter from  inorganic  sub-
strates. The  consumers  are  heterotrophic  organisms  that  feed on  other organ-
isms,  and  are  typically   divided  into  herbivores and  carnivores.  Herbivores
(primary consumers)  feed  principally  on  living plants  while  carnivores  (sec-
ondary, tertiary,  and quarternary consumers)  feed principally on  animals  that
they  kill. Another  type  of  consumer,  ,the omnivore,  feeds nearly  equally  on
plants  and animals,  and occupies  two  or  more  trophic  levels. The decomposers
include all organisms that release enzymes which break down dead  organisms.

Food  chains  are sometimes used  to simply represent  feeding  relationships  be-
tween trophic levels  (e.g.,  plant  > herbivore  > carnivore). Ecosystems common-
ly contain three to five  links in their  food chains.  Diagramming  all of  the
pathways of  energy and material  transfer in  a community  entails  many inter-
connecting food chains,  forming a complex food web.

The concept of trophic  structure,  first  formally  discussed by  Lindeman (1942),
is a method of  dealing  with  the pathways  of  energy and material  transfer  which
focuses on functional  compartments  without  considering  the specific  feeding
relationships. The pathways  between functional  compartments are  illustrated  in
Figure IV-5-1. Trophic  structure is commonly represented by trophic or ecolog-
ical  pyramids. An ecological  pyramid is  a diagramatic representation of the  r-
elationships  between trophic  levels  arranged  with the producers making up the
base and the  terminal  or  top carnivore at the apex.  An  ecological  pyramid may


                                    IV-5-1

-------
                                      HERBIVORES .
                                                       CARN1VORFS
                                                     1C.)- (C.)-(C,)
              PRODUCERS
                                     DECOMPOSERS

Figure IV-5-1.   Trophic pathways  of an ecosystem  (after Reid and Wood  1976)
                                  S-5
                        , C.-1.5

                          C.-11
-


C.-37
P-809
                                       kcal/m'

                                         (•1
                          S-5060
                                           C,-383
                               C,-3368
                                      P-20,810
Figure  IV-5-2.
                   kcal/m'/YEAR


Ecological  pyramids for Silver  Springs, Florida,  indicating (a)
biomass and (b)  productivity.   P=producers; C=consumers; S=sapro-
phytes or  heterotrophs (after Odum 1957).
                                        IV-5-2

-------
represent  the  number of  Individuals  that  compose  each trophic  level,  or,  of
more ecological  significance,  the  biomass or productivity of  each  level (Fig-
ure IV-5-2). Because energy transfer between trophic levels is less than 100 p-
ercent efficient the  pyramid  of productivity must  always  be  regular in shape,
while  pyramids  of  numbers  and biomass may  be  partially inverted  in  some  in-
stances  (Richardson 1977).

TROPHIC STRUCTURE OF FISH COMMUNITIES

Fish communities generally  include a  range  of  species  that  represent a variety
of  trophic  levels.  The trophic  classification  system  shown below  was  used  in
the assessment of fish  fauna  of the  Illinois and Maumee River basins (Karr and
Dudley 1978, Karr et al. 1983).

    (1) Invertivore - food predominantly (>75%) invertebrates.
    (2) Invertivore/Piscivore -  food a  mixture  of invertebrates and  fish; rela-
       tive proportions often a function of age.
    (3) Planktivore - food dominated by  microorganisms  extracted  from the water
       column.
    (4) Omnivore - two or more major (>2b% each) food types consumed.
    (5) Herbivore - feed mostly by  scraping algae and diatoms from rocks,  and
       other stream substrates.
    (6) Piscivore - feed on other fish.

Schlosser  (1981, 1982a,  1982b)  used  the trophic  structure of  fish  communities
to  investigate  differences  in  Illinois stream  ecosystems. His  categorization
scheme appears in Table 1.

In  addition  to  representing a  range  of trophic  levels,  fish  utilize  foods  of
both aquatic  and terrestrial  origin,  and  occupy a  position  at the  top  of  the
aquatic  food web in  relation  to plants and  invertebrates. These  facts  enhance
the ability  of  fish communities to provide an  integrative view  of  the  water-
shed environment (Karr 1981).

BIOLOGICAL HEALTH

Degradation of water quality and habitat  affects the availability of many food
resources, resulting in changes  in the  structure and functions,  and, thus,  the
health of  the aquatic  community.  Structural characteristics   include the  num-
bers and kinds  of  species  and  the  number  of  individuals  per species.  These
parameters  can   be  evaluated  relatively  quickly  via   compilation   of  species
lists,  calculation of  diversity indices,  and identification of  indicator  spe-
cies.  The  importance  of  evaluating  the impact of pollution on community func-
tions   -  such as  production,  respiration,  energy flow,  degradation,  nutrient
cycling,   and  other  rate  processes -  is  becoming  increasingly   evident,  and,
ideally,   any  study  of  community  health  should include  both structural  and
functional assessment.  However, use  of functional methods  has   been  hindered
because they are often expensive, time-consuming, and not well  understood.
                                    IV-5-3

-------
      TABLE IV-5-1.
TROPHIC GUILDS USED BY SCHLOSSER (1981,  1982A,  1982B)
TO CATEGORIZE FISH SPECIES
Herbivore - detritivores (HD)
Omnivores (OMN)
Generalized Insectivores (GI)
Surface and Water Column
Insectivores (SWI)


Benthic Insectivores (BI)


Insectivore - Piscivores (IP)
                  HD  species  fed  almost
                  toms or detritus.
      entirely  on  dia-
                  OMN  species  consumed  plant  and  animal
                  material. They differed from GI  species
                  in that,  subjectively,  greater than  25
                  percent  of  their diet  was composed  of
                  plant or detritus material.

                  GI species fed on a  range  of animal  and
                  plant  material   including   terrestrial
                  and  aquatic  insects,  algae,  and  small
                  fish.  Subjectively,  less   than  25  per-
                  cent  of their diet was  plant  material.
                  SWI species  fed
                  or  terrestrial
                  surface.
on  water column  drift
insects  at   the  water
                  BI  species  fed  predominantly
                  ture forms of benthic insects.
              on  imma-
                  IP species fed on  aquatic  invertebrates
                  and small fish. Their  diets  ranged  from
                  predominantly fish to  predominantly  in-
                  vertebrates.
                                    IV-5-4

-------
Examining the  trophic structure  of  a community  can provide insight  into  its
production and consumption dynamics. A trophic-structure  approach  to the study
of the  functional  processes  of stream ecosystems has  been  proposed by Cummins
arid  his  colleagues (Cummins  1974,  1975; Vannote  et al. 1980). Their concept
assumes  that  a continuous  gradient  of  physical  conditions in a  stream,  from
its  headwaters to  its mouth,  will illicit a  series  of  consistent  and predict-
able responses within the  constituent  populations. The  River Continuum Concept
identifies structural  and functional  attributes  that  will   occur  at  different
reaches  of  natural   (unperturbed) stream ecosystems.  These attributes  (sum-
marized  in Table  IV-5-2) can  serve  as a reference  for  comparison to measured
stream data. Measured data  which are commensurate with  those  predicted by  the
river continuum model  indicate that  the studied system  is  unperturbed,  while
disagreement  between  actual  and  expected data indicates that  modification  of
the  ecosystem has  occurred (Karr and  Dudley 1978).

EVALJATIQN OF BIOLOGICAL HEALTH USING FISH TROPHIC STRUCTURE

Karr (1981) developed  a  system for assessing  biotic  integrity  using fish  com-
munities, which  is discussed  in Chapter IV-2:   Diversity  Indices. Three  em-
pirical  trophic metrics  are incorporated into  Karr's  index  of  biotic integrity
(IBI).  They are:

   (1)  the proportion of individuals  that are omnivores,
   (2)  the proportion of  insectivorous  individuals  of the  Cyprinidae family,
       and
   (3)  the presence of top carnivore  populations.

Karr (1981) observed that the  proportion of  omnivores  in a  community increases
as the quality of  the aquatic environment declines.  Nearly  all  major consumer
species  are  omnivorous  to  a  degree  (Darnell 1961),  so populations  are  con-
sidered  to  be truly  omnivorous  only  if they  feed  on  plants  and  animals  in
nearly  equal  amounts  or  indiscriminately  (Kendeigh 1974). Recall that  Karr  and
Schlnsser used 25  percent  of  plant  material   ingested as  the level for distin-
guisiing  between  omnivores and  other trophic guilds.  Presumably,  changes  in
the  food  base  due  to  pollutional stress  allow the euryphagic  omnivores to  be-
come dominant  because their opportunistic foraging ecology makes them more  suc-
cessful  than more  specific  feeders.  Omnivores are often  virtually absent  from
unmodified streams.  Even  in  moderately   - altered  streams  omnivorous  species
usually constitute a  minor  portion  of the community. For this  reason,  the  bi-
ologist  responsible for  assessment must  be familiar  with the  local  fish fauna
and  aquatic habitats  in  order  to  be  able to  interpret  subtle disproportions  in
trop'iic structure.  In general, Karr  (1981)  has  found samples with  fewer than
20 percent of  individuals as  omnivores  to  be representative of good  environ-
mental  quality, while those with greater than 45 percent  omnivores  represent
badl./ degraded sites.

Karr (1981)  reported that a strong inverse correlation exists between the abun-
dance of  insectivorous cyprinids  and omnivores.  Thus,  communities  containing  a
large proportion  of insectivorous members of  the  minnow  family  (>45%)  tends  to
indicate relatively high environmental  quality.
                                    IV-5-5

-------
          o
          •o
co
                                
                                                            o
                                                            a;
                                                                       o
                                                                       0
                                                 i/>  i.
                                                 i.  CP
                                                 CU  N
                                                 Q. «3
                                                 re  t-
                                                 w  01
                                                 o •—•
                                                 co
                                                                                              in
                                                                                              0)
                                                                                                          C
                                                                                                          re


                                                                                                          Q.
                                  U  IT


                                  C  O
                                  O  -P

                                  •P  O
                                  .*  QJ
                                  C  r—
                                  re  r—

                                  i—  O
                                  Q-  O
ght and
temperature
regimes
                                               1/1

                                                T5    JD  E
'     re  4->
Q.  — < (/I
a.
o
s_
•4->
o
S-
OJ
^->
(U
                                                                        a> -r-
                                                                       r- -O
                                                                       *j re
                                                                       +•> JC
                                                                          a;
                                                                          S-
                                                                       >, 3  C
                                                                      r- 4J  O
                                                                      *r™ re »»~
                                                                       re s_ -(->
                                                                      •o 01  re
                                                                                   CD
                                                                                                       •o
                                                                                                        re
                                                                                                                  3
                                                                                                                  4J
                                                                                                                  re
                                                                                                   r—  O.
                                                                                                   -DE
                                                                                                   re  01
                                                                                                   4-= -W
                                                                                                   co
iS
                                                    "o
                                                     CD
                                                     (/I
                                                     »
                                                    LO
           a:
           ^~
           CL.
                                                                        o
0.

I

s
3
                                                                                                        (J
                                                                                             a.
                                                                                             o
                                                                                                         a;
                                                                                                               V
       -
  es ^_
  CVJ
   i

  LO
   I
  UJ
  _J
  CD
Primary

energy
source
     a>
     4->
     re     a)
     r—  S- .C
     3  
     O  4->
     .^  ^J £ ,_ ^->
     4-j  re O  re  c
     i_  e j- •!-  a»
     re     <+-.  u  E
     at o     -u  c
         •r- -—  in  O
     CD  cs:  a;  s-
     in  re o  i- -r~
     s-  cno..  s-  >
     re  i- o  cu  c
     o  o—  •»->  a>
     o
                                                       s_
                                                       re
                                                       -r-  0
                                                           CJ
                                                       ,
 re  o> i—
•—  4J *J
 3  -M  m
 O  «3  O
-.EE

 s_  u   -
 re  T- ,—
 Q-C s
    re o
 01  OIQ.
 c v. u.
•r- O •	
                                                                            O)
                                                                           •—      C
                                                                           -C2      O
                                                                            re     -i-
                                                                            S-  >, *J
                                                                            o>  i-  u
                                                                           "O  (0  3
                                                                           ••-  E T3
                                                                            in -r-  O
                                                                            C  !_  S_
                                                                            O  O.  O-
                                                                           CJ
FROM from
upstream
                 (C
                 d) o>
                 S- N
                 •P-i-
                 co en
                                       a>      E
                                      +->  in  re
                                       re  E  a> 4.
                       r—  t3  4)
                        re  re  s-
                       CO
                                   m
                                                    PO
                                             3T3 1 —
                                            >r-  OJ OJ «3
                                            -O  N 1-   I
                                             0) -t- -P ^p
                                            s  • — •
                                            *
                                    in - —
                                 OJ S- CM
                                 CTXD ,— i
                                 S- >   1
                                 re-r— i~^.
                                 _J s- -—
                                 ¥
  
  S-
 h
 g
subd
                                                                                                                  re
                                                                                                                  o
                                                                                                                  Q-CSJ
                                                                                                                  &'
                                                                                                                   re  QJ
                                                                                                                      c
                                                                                                                   01  .C
                                                                                                                   E  O)
                                                                                                                   re  3
                                                                                                                   a>  i«i

-------
Faucsh et  al.  (unpublished  manuscript)  investigated  the regional  applicability
of the  IBI.  Results from the  two least disturbed watersheds  in the  study  --
the Embaras River,  Illinois and the Red  River,  Kentucky — confirmed the fixed
scoring criteria proposed by Karr (1981)  for omnivores and insectivorous  cypri-
nids. At  most  of the  undisturbed  sites  in each  stream,  omnivores  constituted
20 percent or  less of all  individuals  and at least   45 percent  of  individuals
were insectivorous cyprinids.

The presence of  viable,  vigorous  populations of  top  carnivores  is  another in-
dicator of a relatively  healthy,  trophically diverse community  used  in  Karr's
index. As  described earlier,  top  carnivores constitute  the  peak of  the  eco-
logical pyramid, and, therefore, occupy  the  highest  trophic  level  in that  par-
ticular community.  Degradation of environmental  quality   causes  top  carnivore
populations to  decline and  disappear. Theoretically, since top  carnivore  pop-
ulations  are  supported  (directly  or  indirectly) by  all  of the  other (lower)
trophic levels,  they  serve  as a  natural monitor of  the overall  health  of the
community. Because  of  their position  atop  the food  chain,  terminal  carnivores
are  most  vulnerable to  detrimental   effects  of  biomagnified toxicants.  Also,
predation  by top  carnivores keeps  the populations of forage and  rough fish  in
check, thereby  functioning  to  maintain  biotic integrity.   As always,  it  is as-
sumed that the  project  biologist  will  use considerable personal knowledge  of
local ichthyology  and  ecology  in  adjusting expectations of top  carnivore  spe-
cies to stream  size. The top carnivore  populations  must  be  evaluated in rela-
tion to  what  would  be there  if  the  habitat were  not  modified. Defining the
baseline is a major problem in  any study of pollutional stress.  In  determining
the baseline community,  the biologist may  rely  on the faunas  of  similar, unal-
tered habitats  in the  area, literature  information,  and personal  experience  --
remembering the concepts of  the river  continuum model.

The  results  of  research conducted throughout  the midwest tend to  support the
theoretical basis  of  the omnivore and  top carnivore metric approaches  to as-
sessing  biotic  integrity (Larimore  and Smith  1963, Cross  and  Collins  1975,
Menzel and Fierstine 1976,  Karr and  Dudley 1978, Schlosser  1982a,  Karr  et al.
1983).  Fausch   et  al.   (unpublished  manuscript)  evaluated  five  watersheds  in
Illinois,  Michigan,  Kentucky,  Nebraska,  and  North and  South Dakota  using the
IBI,  and  found that scores accurately   reflected watershed  and  stream  condi-
tions.

However, experts in the field recognize  that the omnivore  - top  carnivore anal-
ysis may  not  be  applicable in every  situation  on  a nationwide  basis.  Reser-
vations over use of this approach seem to be based on three variables.

   (1) Type  of  pollutional  stress -  e.g.,  the trophic metrics  proposed by  Karr
       (1981) were  largely  derived from  agricultural  watersheds  in  which sedi-
       mentation and nutrient  enrichment are the predominant forms  of anthro-
       pogenic  stress;  other  pollution  problems such as toxic waste  discharge
       could conceivably have a different impact on  fish trophic  structure.
                                    IV-5-7

-------
   (2) Type of  aquatic habitat  -  e.g.,  headwater  streams,  large rivers,  and
       flowing  swamps  represent  very different environments which are  charac-
       terized by a variety of trophic pathways and food sources.

   (3) Type  of  ambient fish  fauna  -  e.g.,  no or very  tolerant top  carnivores
       might be  present naturally,  or no  or  very intolerant  omnivores.

LIST OF OMNIVOkES AND TOP CARNIVORES

Examples of resident omnivore and top carnivore fish species  are  listed  nation-
ally in Appendices B-l and B-2,  respectively.  These tables were  compiled based
on information  found  in  the  literature  (Morita,  1963;  Carlander, 1969,  1977;
Pflieger,  1975;  Moyle,  1976; Timbol  and Maciolek,  1978; Smith,   1979;  Morrow,
1980;  Lee  et al.,1980;  Karr et  al.,  1983).  The  purpose of the lists  is  to
provide  a  framework  for  assessing  omnivore  and  top  carnivore  populations.
However, because of  the  geographic  variability in  feeding habits, the  gaps  in
available  foraging data,  and the  dynamic   nature  of  range  boundaries,  some
members  of the   list  may  not  occupy the  specified trophic  compartment in  a
particular area,  while other  species that  belong  on the list  may  have  been
overlooked. The  list  is  intended  to be used  by knowledgeable biologists  who
are  capable  of  adding and deleting  species  where necessary  to produce  a list
which is appropriate for the particular area  of study.
                                    IV-5-8

-------
                                CHAPTER  IV-6
                              REFERENCE  SITES
Introduction
     The  goal  of  this  section  is  to  suggest  an  objective,  ecological
approach that  should  aid States in determining the ecological  potential  of
priority   aquatic    ecosystems,    evaluating   and    refining    standards,
prioritizing  ecosystems for  improvements, and  comprehensively  evaluating
the  ecological quality  of  aquatic  ecosystems.    The objectives  of  this
section are  to demonstrate  the need for  regional  reference  sites and  to
demonstrate how they  can be  determined.   To do this the need for  some  type
of control or  reference  sites will  be discussed and alternate types will  be
outlined,  the concept  of  ecological regions  and methods  for  determining
them will  be  described, aspects  that should  be  considered when  selecting
reference  sites will  be  listed, and the limitations of the  regionalization
method will be discussed.

     Although   correlation  between  a   disturbance   and   the   resulting
functional or  structural disorder can stimulate  considerable  insight,  the
disorder  that results  from disturbing  a  water  body  can  be  demonstrated
scientifically only  by comparing  it  with  control or  reference sites.    To
scientifically  test  for functional  or  structural  disorder, data  must  be
collected  when  the  disturbances are  present  and  when  the disturbances  are
absent but everything  else is  the same.    Disorders that  are unique to  the
disturbed  areas  must  be  related  to the  disturbances but  separated  from
natural variability.   This  requires  carefully  selected  reference  sites,  but
it is  difficult or  impossible  to  find pristine  control or  reference sites
in most  of  the  conterminous  United States.   Also,  it  is  unlikely  that
pristine  reference  sites  would be  appropriate  for  most  disturbed sites
because they  would  differ in  ways  besides  the distrubance,  as  will   be
discussed  later.

     The most  commonly used reference sites are upstream and downstream  of
the recovery  zone of  a point source.  However,  these  sites provide  little
value where diffuse pollution is a problem, where channel modifications  are
extensive,  where  point  sources  occur  all  along  the  stream,  where   the
stream's  morphology  or  flow changes  considerably among  sites,  or where
various combinations  of these  disturbances  occur.   Hughes  et al.  (1983)
suggest a different  approach,  which reduces  the  problems  of   upstream-
downstream reference  sites.   Their  approach  is  based  on  first determining
large,  relatively-homogeneous,  ecological   regions   (areas  with   similar
land-surface  form,  climate, vegetation,  etc.)  followed by  selection  of  a
series of  reference  sites  within each region.   These  sites could  possibly
serve as  references  for  a  number of polluted  sites on  a  number of  streams
thereby economizing  on  and  simplifying  concurrent  or future  studies.    A
modification  of Hughes et  al.'s approach  has been tested  on  two  polluted
streams in Montana (Hughes  MS)  and the  approach is  being rigorously tested
on 110 sites in Ohio  (Omernik and  Hughes 1983).
                                  IV-6-1

-------
     The logical basis for  Omernik  and  Hughes'  aoproach was developed from
 alley (1976), Green  (1979), Hall et  al.  (1978),  and  arren (1979).  Their
logic  fits  well  with  the  proposed  water  quality  standards  regulation
(Federal   Register  1982)   that   suggests   grouping   of  streams  wherever
possible.  Bailey stressed  that  heterogeneous lands, such as those managed
by  the U.S.  Forest   Service,  must  be  hierarchically  classified  by  their
capabilities.     He   added  that   classification   should   be  objective,
synthesized  from  present   mapped  knowledge,  and  based   on  the  spatial
relationships of several environmental  characteristics rather  than  on one
characteristic or on  the similarity of the characteristics  alone.

     One of Green's ten principles for optimizing  environmental assessments
is that wherever there are  broad environmental patterns, the area should be
broken  into  relatively  homogeneous  subareas.     Clearly,   this  principle
applies to most  States.   Hall  et al.  found  that  studies  that incorporate
several variously-impacted  sites  were more useful than separate intensive
studies  of  one  or  two sites  and  more practical  than long-term  pre- and
post- impact studies.

     Warren   proposed  that   a   watershed/stream   classification   should
integrate climate, topography,  substrate, biota, and culture at all levels,
as  opposed  to  considering  them separately.   He  also   stated  that  the
integration  and  classification  should  be  hierarchical  and  be  determined
from the potentials of the  lands and waters  of interest,  rather than from
their present conditions.   Streams  within  Warren's proposed classification
would  have increasingly  similar  ecological   potentials as   one  moved  down
through the hierarchy to ever smaller watersheds or ecological regions.

The Concept of Ecological Regions

     The  ecological  potential   of   a   reference   or  disturbed  site  is
considered to be the  range  of  ecological  conditions  present in a number of
typical,  but relatively-undisturbed  sites  within  an ecological  region.
Such  relatively-undisturbed sites,  can  be found  even in  the channelized
streams of  the  Midwest  Corn Belt  (Marsh and Luey 1982).    One  should not
suppose that  such  sites  represent  pristine  or  undisturbed  controls,  only
that they are the best that  exist given  the  prevalent land use patterns in
an ecological region.  Because of the major  economic and  political strains
required,  we  do  not  believe that  resource managers  or even knowledgeable
and concerned citizens  will change  those  general  land use patterns  much.
But such persons will  need  to know the best conditions they  can expect in a
water body in order to decide whether the economic and noneconomic benefits
of  a  particular  water  body   standard   are  worth  their  economic  and
noneconomic  costs.   To make such determinations  rationally, the reference
sites  must  also  be typical  of  a region.   That is,  their  watersheds  must
wholly reflect the predominant climate,  land-surface form,  soil, potential
natural  vegetation,  land   use,   and  other   environmental   characteristics
defining  that  region,   and the  site  itself  must   contain  no  anomalous
feature.   For example,  a  cobble-bottomed  stream  in  an entirely forested,
highly  dissected  watershed   would  not  be  typical  of   the  sand  and
gravel-bottomed streams  in  the  agricultural  prairies of  the  Midwest, nor
could it be  a useful  predictor of  such  an  agricultural stream's ecological
potential, even  though such a watershed and stream might be  found in such a
region.
                                  IV-6-2

-------
     Although all  aquatic ecosystems  differ  to some  degree,  the basis  of
ecological  regions  is  that  there  also  is  considerable  similarity among
aquatic  ecosystem characteristics  and  that  these  similarities  occur  in
definable geographic patterns.   Also,  the variabilities in the present  and
potential conditions of the chemical and  physical environment  and  the biota
are  believed  to be less  within an area  than  among different  areas.    For
example,  streams  in the  Appalachian   Mountains,  are more  similar to  each
other  than  to  those  in the  Corn  Belt  or those  on  the  Atlantic  Coastal
Plain.    It  is  assumed   that   streams  acquire  their similarities   from
similarities  in their  watersheds and  that streams draining watersheds  with
similar  characteristics will  be more  similar  to  each  other  than to those
draining  watersheds with  dissimilar characteristics.   Thus,  an  ecological
region  is  defined  as  a   large area  where  the   homogeneity  in climate,
land-surface  form,  soil,  vegetation,  land  use,  and  other   environmental
characteristics  is  sufficient  to  produce  relative homogeneity  in  stream
ecosystems.

     The  concept  of  an ecological  region  is  an out-growth of  the work  of
vegetation    ecologists,    climatologists,   physiographers,    and     soil
taxonomists,  all  of   whom  have sought  to  display  national  patterns  by
mapping   classes  of   individual   environmental   characteristics  (USDI
Geological  Survey  1970).   James (1952)  discusses  the  value of integrating
or  regionalizing  such environmental   characteristics  and   Warren  (1979)
provides  an excellent  rationale  for  classifying ecological  regions,   but
Bailey's  ecoregion  map  (1976)   cones  the  closest   to actually  doing   so.
However,  Bailey's map  incorporates a  hierarchical  approach,  concentrating
on an  individual  environmental  characteristic at each level, and does  not
yet  incorporate land-surface form  or  land use.   Hughes and Omernik  (1981b)
agree  with  Warren that it  is  most useful to  integrate these features  at
every  level in  the  hierarchy  of  ecological  regions.   Such  an approach
facilitates  the mapping  of  ecological  regions  at  a   national,  state,  or
county level with increasing resolution  (but decreasing  generality)  at  each
lower  level.

     Ecological  regions should  improve States'  abilities to manage  aquatic
ecosystems  in  at least four  ways  (Hughes and Omernik  1981b):   (1)   They
should provide  ecologically-meaningful  management  units.  Such units allow
objective and logical  synthesis  of  existing  data  from  ecologically-similar
aquatic  ecosystems   and,   using that   synthesis,   extrapolation   to  other
unstudied  ecosystems   in  the  same ecological  region.    (2)  They  should
provide an  objective,  ecological basis to  refine use classifications and  to
evaluate  the  attainment of uses for  aquatic  ecosystems.   This is  because
they  provide  an  ecological  basis  for  determining  typical  and   potential
states  of  aquatic  ecosystems  located  in  similar   watersheds.    (3)   They
should  provide  an  objective   ecological   basis   to  prioritize   aquatic
ecosystems  for  improvements or for attainability analyses.  Given  knowledge
of  the  typical  and  potential   conditions of  aquatic  ecosystems  in   the
separate  ecological  regions of a State,  that State can  rationally  determine
what  to  expect  from improvements  and  thereby know  where  it  will  get   the
greatest  ecological returns for  its  investments.   (4) They should simplify
setting  site-specific  criteria  on  site-specific  biota, as allowed  by  the
proposed  water quality regulation.   Rather than set  separate  criteria for a
large  number  of  sites at  enormous  expense,  a  State could  use criteria
obtained  from a series of sites that  typify potential  conditions in  each
ecological  region of that  state or neighboring states.

                                  IV-6-3

-------
     The process of  selecting  reference  sites  can  be broken into two major
phases with  most  of  the  work done  in an  office.   First,  the ecological
regions,  and most-typical  area(s)  of  interest  are  determined.   Second,
various  sizes  of   candidate  watersheds   and  reaches  are  evaluated  for
typicalness  and level of disturbance in order to select reference sites.

Determining  Ecological Regions

     There   are  several   methods  for   determining  ecological  regions.
Trautman  (1981) suggested  that one factor,  physiography,  could be used to
determine patterns of stream types and fish assemblages in Ohio.  Lotspeich
and Platts  (1982)  believed regions should  be  determined  from  two factors,
climate and  geology.  Bailey  (1976)  used  three factors, climate, soil, and
potential natural  vegetation,  in his ecoregion map of the United States but
suggested adding land-surface  form  and lithology  if  smaller ecoregions are
mapped.   Warren (1979)  proposed  that  five factors,  climate,  topography,
substrate,  biota  and culture, should  all  be  incorporated in   watershed
classification.   Hughes and  Omernik   (19Slb), Omernik  et  al.  (1982), and
Omernik  and  Hughes  (1983)   overlaid  maps  of  land-surface   form,  soil
suborders,  land  use, and  potential  natural  vegetation in  studies  of the
Corn  Belt and  Ohio, but   suggest  using  precipitation,   temperature,  and
lithology if major  differences in these  factors  are suspected.  Lotspeich
and  Platts,   Bailey,  and  Warren  all  emphasized  the  use  of   hierarchical
ecoregions,  moving   from   broad   national   regions   thousands  of  square
kilometers in size to small watersheds  a  few square  kilometers in area.  A
much  different  approach to  determining  ecological  regions is  the  stream
habitat  classification   of Pflieger  et  al.   (1981).    They  used  cluster
analysis  of  fish  collections  from throughout Missouri  to  group localities
having similar fish  faunas.  Where States have computerized  fish collection
data from a  thousand  or more  sites,  cluster analysis is a useful approach,
however only  a handful of  States have  such data.

     Because  of  the  diversity  of  methods  for   determining  ecological
regions,  the  limited  testing  of their  applicability  to aquatic  ecosystems,
and  the  limited  number   of   large  computerized  data  files,  States  are
encouraged to select  a  method  that  allows the greatest potential for  later
modification.    The  method   of  Hughes  and  Omernik  requires  no   prior
collection  data  and  appears  to  allow  more  modification  than  the others.
The greater  number  of characteristics used  to determine  regions increases
the opportunity that  those regions  will   have a variety  of uses by several
agencies  and greater value in  predicting  impacts  of managment  actions.
Therefore, their method is outlined by the following steps:

1. Select, the area  and  aquatic characteristics  of  interest.  In many  cases
   the area  of  interest  will   be a State, but  wherever major environmental
   characteristics or watersheds do not coincide with state  borders, States
   may find  it  useful and  economical  to work cooperatively  and  incorporate
   portions  of neighboring States.  Aquatic characteristics  of  interest may
   include fish and  macro-invertebrate assemblages  and  various aspects of
   the chemical and  physical environment  affecting those assemblages.

                                  IV-fi-4

-------
Select  broad environmental  characteristics  most  likely  to  control the
aquatic characteristics  of interest.   Environmental  characteristics to
consider are  climate (especially  mean  annual  precipitation  and  summer
an.d winter  temperature  extremes),  land-surface form  (types  of plains,
hills, or mountains), surficial geology (types  of soil parent material),
soils (whether wet or dry, hot  or  cold,  shallow or  deep, or low or  high
in  nutrients),  potential  natural  vegetation  (grassland,  shrubland, or
forestland,  and  dominant  species),  major   river  basins  (especially
important   in   unglaciated   areas  for   limiting   fish   and   mollusk
distribution), and land  use  (especially  cropland,  grazing land, forest,
or  various  mixes   of   these).     National   maps   of   most   of   these
characteristics  are  available  in  USDI-Geological  Survey  (1970),  but,
often,  larger-scale  State maps can  be  obtained from  State  agencies or
university departments.

Examine maps  of  the selected  environmental  characteristics  for classes
of  characteristics that  occur  in  regional  patterns.   When original  maps
differ  in  scale  or when finer  resolution  is  required,  a  mechanical
enlarger/reducer, photocopy machine,  photo-enlarger,  or  slide projector
can be used to produce maps  of  the desired scale.   Select those classes
of  characteristics  that  best   represent  tentative  ecological   regions.
For example,  is  the  predominant class of  land-surface  form flat  plains
or  high hills;  is   the   predominant  potential  natural   vegetation oak
forest  or  ash  forest?     List   the   predominant   class  of  all  the
characteristics considered for  each  tentative  ecological   region.

Overlay  the  selected environmental  characteristics  mapped at  the  same
scale and  outline  the most-typical  areas  in  each  tentative  ecological
region.   The maps are examined  in  combination  on a light table and  lines
are  drawn  on  a  sheet   of clear  plastic  or  transparent  paper   (e.g.
albanene).     Most-typical  areas   are  those  areas  in  each  tentative
ecological   region  where  all  the  predominant  classes of  environmental
characteristics in that  region  are present.   These  can be considered as
most-typical    areas   because   they   contain   all    the   classes   of
characteristics that will  be used to determine that  ecological  region.
For example,  if  the  predominant classes of  land  use,  potential natural
vegetation, and land-surface form  in an  ecological  region are cropland,
grassland,  and  plains,   respectively,  only  the portion  of that  region
where  cropland,  grassland,  and  plains  all  occur  together  would be
most-typical.   This  overlay  approach  and  some  of   the  environmental
characteristics  are  similar  to  those  used  by  McHarg   (1969) in his
examination  of  the   values  of   various  land uses  in  the  Potomac   River
Basin.

Determine  which  environmental   characteristics  best  distinguish between
regions.   Where  the major  characteristics abruptly differ at  the  same
place  (e.g.  hilly forestlands  vs.  prairie  croplands)  this  is   easily
done, but where there are  gradual  transitions  (e.g.  from flat to  smooth
and irregular plains with decreasing amounts of croplands and increasing
forestlands) it  is  more  difficult  and  the  boundries  are  less  precise.
At.  one  boundary the distinguising  characteristic  may  be  land-surface
form  and surficial  geology, at another  it  may be  land  use or  a   river

                                IV-6-5

-------
   basin divide.  Thus, this boundary determination  is a  subjective -  not  a
   mechanical or McHargian  -  process  and it requires considerable judgment
   and  knowledge  of  the  key  environmental  characteristics   along   the
   tentative  boundary.   See  Figure  IV-7-1   for  an  example  of  a   final
   product.   Fianlly,  the  regional  lines are  transferred  to  a base map of
   the  area  of  interest.    On  a State  level,  most of this  work  should be
   done using map scales of  1:500,000 to 1:7,SOO,000.   The base  map should
   then  be circulated  among  knowledgeable  professionals to  evaluate  the
   significance of the ecological regions as drawn.

   For  cases  where top-priority  aquatic ecosystems are anomalies, or  where
the State  is  interested in  only  a few  sites,  it may be more appropriate to
use   a   slightly   different   approach   based  only   on   the  watershed
characteristics of  the sites  in question.    For  such cases,  rather   than
analyze  the   entire  State,   researchers   can   determine   the  climate,
land-surface  form,   soils,  potential  natural  vegetation, land  use,   river
basin,  etc.  of  the  watershed upstream  of  the  site of interest.   The  same
classes of characteristics elsewhere in  the State  or neighboring  States  can
then  be determined from maps.   The  rest of  the regionalization  process is
the  same  as  described  above.    The  major  difference  in   this  approach is
that, because of the spatially-narrower  objective, fewer  ecological regions
will  be  determined,  consequently,   the  product  would   have  only   local
applicat ion.

Determining Candidate References Reaches

     The  most-typical   areas  are  considered  the   most-logical   places to
locate  reference  reaches   for  several   reasons:     (1)  Such  areas  should
contain a  narrower range of  land  use  or disturbance potentials compared to
the  entire region or  other regions.   Hence,  there  should  be  a narrower
range of aquatic ecosystem  conditions  in these most-typical  areas compared
to the  entire region or other  regions.   (2) Such  areas are  more likely to
be free  of major  anomalies that  might   produce undisturbed  sites that  are
also  atypical,  such  as  an  entirely  forested, mountainous watershed  in  a
region  typified by shruhlands  and  plains.    (3) Such areas can potentially
represent  the greatest  number  of streams  in  the  ecological  region because
they  drain  watersheds  having  all the predominant  classes of environmental
characteristics that were used to identify the  region.  (4) Such  areas  best
represent  the  prevailing  land use  of the  ecological  region  and the   best
background  conditions  likely.   For  example, there is  little likelihood of
transforming an area dominated by rangeland into forest!and, therefore,  the
predominant land use in the watershed of a  reference reach in such an  area
should be  grazing.

     For the above reasons, if watersheds of reference or  benchmark reaches
are to  have the broadest  possible applicability,  they should fall entirely
within the most-typical areas of ecological regions.  Thus, the size of  the
most-typical area will  determine the  maximum  size  of such watersheds.    The
smallest watersheds  should  include  the  smallest intermittent  or permanent
streams and  ponds that support spawning or  rearing  or valued  populations.
Valued  populations  may  include  sport,   commercial,  rare,  threatened,
endangered, forage,   or intolerant species of any phylum.

                                  IV-6-6

-------
Ref 1 ni ng jthe Number^ of Canji date Reference Reaches

     Regardless of  how  candidates  for  reference  watersheds are determined
there are  several  important  aspects  to consider when  selecting  reference
reaches:

1.  Human  Disturbances.    Obviously,  watersheds  that  contain  dense  human
   populations, concentrations  of  mines or  industry,  several  or  important
   point  sources,  or major  and atypical  problems  with  diffuse  pollution
   (e.g. acidification,  soil  erosion, overgrazing, mine wastes,  landslides)
   should  be  eliminated   from consideration   as   reference   watersheds.
   Intentional  stocking of sport fishes  and  incidental releases  of aquarium
   and bait organisms have extended the  ranges  of many aquatic species.   If
   these introductions are only local,  knowledge  of such populations  should
   be   considered   when   selecting   least-disturbed  watersheds    because
   introduced  stocks  of species  are  one  of the most  detrimental  changes
   that humans  initiate in aquatic  ecosystems.  Where  human disturbances
   are mapped this step should  be done  for the  entire State.

2. Size:  Because of the gradual change  in many stream characteristics  from
   headwaters  to  rivers  (Vannote  et  al.  1980),  plus  application   of
   MacArthur and  Wilson's   (1967)  theory of  island  biogeography  to  lakes
   (Rarbour and Brown 1974),  it is important  to  consider  the  size  of the
   reference reaches  when  they are  to   be  compared  with  a priority  water
   body.   Although stream  order  (Strahler  1957) has  often  been  used  by
   biologists to approximate  stream  size,  Hughes  and  Omernik  (1981a,  1983)
   give several  reasons why  watershed  area  and  mean  annual  discharge are
   preferable measures.   Limnologists typically use surface area and  volume
   to  estimate  lake   size.    Although  regional   differences  make  any
   generalizations difficult,  the  stream  order of priority  and  reference
   reaches should not differ  by more  than  one  order  in  most  cases and the
   watershed  areas  usually  should  differ   by  less  than  one  order   of
   magnitude.

3. Surface water hydrology.   While  determining  size,  the  researcher  should
   also briefly examine the types  of  the watersheds,  streams, or  lakes for
   anomalies.   Large scale topographic  maps will  usually reveal  whether the
   streams  are  effluent or   influent,  i.e.,  whether  the   net  movement  of
   water if from the streams  to the ground water  or  the  reverse.  The  same
   maps reveal  drainage  lakes,  lake type  (kettle,  solution,  oxbow,   etc.),
   amount  of  ditching  or  canalization,  and drainage  pattern   (dendritic,
   trellis, aimless, etc.).

4. Refugia.  Parks, monuments,  wildlife refuges,  natural  areas, preserves,
   state  and  federal  forests,  and  woodlots  are  often  indicated  on  large
   scale  topographic  maps  and  locations  of others  can   be  obtained  from
   state  agencies  charged  with their  administration.    Such  refugia are
   often  excellent   places   to  locate  reference   sites  and   reference
   watersheds.

                                  TV-6-7

-------
5. Groundwater hydrology.   Reports from the State water resource agency and
   the State office of the U.S.  Geological  Survey  reveal  whether lakes are
   influent  or  effluent.    The  direction  of  water  movement  in  lakes  is
   extremely  important  in determining  their  nutrient  balance,  causes  of
   eutrophication, and possible  results  of lake restoration efforts.   For
   example,  in  shallow  effluent  lakes  with  small   watersheds   the  major
   source of nutrients is  the atmosphere and hence uncontrollable.

6. Runoff per unit area.  This is  extremely important in  estimating stream
   size.   The  summarized runoff  data  are published  in  U.S.  Geological
   Survey  reports  for each  State.   These  data  can  be  used  to estimate
   isolines  of  runoff  per unit  area  or existing  runoff  maps  produced  by
   State water resource agencies  can be  used.   For  a national  example, see
   USDI - Geological  Survey  (1970).

7. Water  chemistry.    These data  can  be  used to  estimate background  or
   typical  conditions.  Most  are not  summarized,  but they  can  be located
   using NAWDEX  and  are  available from computerized  data  bases  such  as
   WATSTORE and STORET and from  State  water reports  of  the U.S. Geological
   Survey and State water resource agencies.

8. Geoclimatic history.  The historical geomorphology and  climate determine
   the  basin divides  and  historical   connections  among  water  bodies  and
   basins.    The absence  of  such  connections  and the  locations  of  basin
   divides   and  major  gradient  changes  determine   centers  of   origin  or
   endemism.   Regionally,  continental   glaciation,  ocean  subsidence,  and
   pluvial   flooding,  and locally,  stream  capture,  canals, and headwater
   flooding  all  provided passages  across  apparent  barriers  that  allowed
   range extension,  and,  in large part,  determine  the present  ranges  of
   primary   freshwater fish  and   mollusks.    This  information  is  usually
   available from  university geology  departments  and often  from the state
   geologist.

9. Known zoogeographic patterns.    These  are best  revealed by maps in books
   and  articles  on the biota  of  the  state,  e.g.  Smith   (1983), Trautman
   (1981),   or  Pflieger (1975).   Such  patterns  may  also be  predicted  by
   present   river  basins  where the basin  divides  are  substantial  and the
   river mouths distant.

      After  considering  the broad  watershed and regional  aspects  of the
candidate watersheds,  the highly-degraded  or unusual watersheds should  be
easily  rejected.   Candidate reaches  can  then  be  selected  and  ranked  or
clustered by expected  level  of  disturbance.  At  this  level  of  resolution,
the researcher  should study air  photo mosaics and  large-scale  (1:24,000-
1:250,000)  maps of  the candidate reaches.   Stream  gradient, distance from
other  refugia,  barriers  (falls,  dams)  between reference  reaches and other
refugia, distance  from the  major  receiving water,  number  of  mines,  and
buildings,  amount of channelization, and presence of established monitoring
or gaging  sites  should all  be  considered.   The list  of  candidate reaches
should  be  distributed to  other  professionals  to  query  them  about  their
knowledge  of disturbance  levels,  previous  or   concurrent  studies,  fish
stocking schedules,   fish  catch  per  unit  effort,   spawning  or  hatching
pulses, valued species, etc.

                                   IV-6-8

-------
Selecting Actual Reference Sites

      All the preceding  research can, and  should, be  done  in  an  office.   It
is  then  useful  to view and photograph  the  reduced number  of  candidate
reaches  from  the air.   A small  wing-over  airplane  flying 300-1500 meters
above the ground is ideal for this or recent  stereo pairs  of  air photos  can
suffice.  The  candidate  reach should be examined  at  several  access points
to assess typical  and least-disturbed conditions, i.e.,  the absence of farm
yards,  feed  lots, livestock  grazing,  irrigation  diversions,  row crops,
channelization,  mines,   housing  developments,  clearcuts,  or  other  small
scale disturbances should  be rejected,  though the candidate  reaches may  be
moved  upstream  of  them.   The  main  reasons  for this  aerial view  are   to
determine what the candidate watersheds and  reaches typically  look  like,  to
characterize  relatively  undisturbed  conditions, and  to  help  select actual
reference  sites.   The  photographs  are   also  useful  as  visual   aids   in
briefings and public  meetings.   This phase  is  not essential  if the chief
state ecologist  has developed  this  knowledge of present conditions through
years of experience statewide.

      Finally, the remaining candidate  reaches can be  assessed  and ranked
for disturbance  from  the ground.   Three to  four candidate reference sites
in  each  reach  should be examined  for typical  natural  features,  least-
disturbed channel  and riparian characteristics,  and  ease of  access.    The
concept  of  typicalness   of  natural   features  is   similar  to  that   of
typicalness of watershed features; for  example, riffle-pool  morphology  and
swift current would not  be  typical  of  coastal  plain or  swamp streams  and
such anomolous sites  should  not be included  as  reference sites.

      One of  the  best  indicators  of  least-disturbed sites  is  extensive,
old,  riparian forest (see  Section  II-6).    Another   is  relatively-high
heterogeneity  in  channel  width  and  depth  (shallow  riffles,  deep  pools,
runs, secondary  channels,  flooded  backwaters,  sand bars,  etc.).   Abundant
large woody debris  (snags, root wads, log jams, brush piles), coarse bottom
substrate  (gravel, cobble,   boulders),  overhanging  vegetation,  undercut
banks,   and   aquatic  vascular   macrophytes   and   additional   substrate
heterogeneity  and  concealment  for  biota.    Relatively  high  discharges;
clear, colorless,  and odorless  waters;  visually-abundant  diatom,  insect,
and fish  assemblages; and  the  presence of  beavers   and  piscivorous  birds
also indicate relatively-undisturbed sites.

      In order to  confidently ascertain whether a  designated  biotic use  of
a priority aquatic ecosystem is  attainable  it  is necessary  to (1) clearly
define that  use in objective, measurable,  biotic conditions and  (2) examine
those conditions  in  at  least  three  least-disturbed  reference  sites.    We
have described a process to  locate  and rank  a number  of least-disturbed
reference sites.    However, there are several limitations to that approach.
To date this process  has  only  been  tested on streams with watersheds  less
than  1600  km?.    Major   lakes  and  rivers  can be  examined  in the  same
manner, but a multistate or national analysis  will   be  needed  and greater
allowances  for variability  in  the  level of  disturbance and  the  degree   of
typicalness   may   be  necessary  because  large  ecosystems  encompass  more
variability, they  are more likely to receive major  point sources,  and  they
are rarer to begin with.

                                  IV-6-9

-------
      Where  priority  aquatic  ecosystems  are  unique  it  will  be  more
difficult to find reference sites.   For  example,  if the priority system  is
a  forested  watershed with  a  high-gradient  stream in  Iowa,  where  such  a
system  is  rare,  it  would  be  necessary  to  seek  reference  sites   in
neighboring States.   Where  a stream  passes  through  extremely dissimilar
ecological regions, reference streams should do likewise.  For  example,  the
Yampa River of Northwestern Colorado passes  from  spruce-forested mountains
through sagebrush tablelands  and  should  not be compared with  a river that
flows through only one of those regions.

      Stream reaches  above  barriers, such  as  the  falls on  the Cumberland
River or  the relatively  steep gradients  of the Watauga  River  at the North
Carolina-Tennessee border, should  not  be compared  with those below  because
few purely aquatic species  have  passed  those historical  barriers.   Streams
that had  glacial or  pluvial connections  (such  as  the Susquehanna and James
Rivers) may have more species  in  common  than neighboring rivers of  either,
the  neighboring  rivers  have  similar  environmental  conditions.    Gilbert
(1980)  provides  a   clear  discussion   of  these  possible  zoogeographic
anomalies using  examples  from the eastern United  States.   Decisions about
reference sites must also take such  knowledge into  consideration.

      Finally, ecological  regions  and  reference sites  as  described herein
are believed most  useful  for making comparisons  between broad  assemblage-
level   patterns  or patterns  between  widely-ranging  and  common  species   of
importance, not  between the  presence  or  absence  of  specific  uncommon   or
localized species viewed separately.  That is, multivariate approaches such
as  ordination  and  classification  or biotic  indices  such  as  K.arr's (1981)
are most  applicable and researchers  should not expect  to discriminate among
sites that vary only slightly.

Summa ry

      The  final  product  of  this  approach is  a  map  like that  of Figure
IV-7-1.   Data  from  the  reference  sites   in  each  ecological   region  can   be
compared  with  those  from  disturbed  sites in  that  region.    For   aquatic
ecosystems  that   cross   boundaries  between   ecological   regions,  state
ecologists  ought  to  examine  data   from  the   reference  sites in those
respective regions.  Comparisons should  he limited  to  ecosystems of  similar
size.

      Rather  than  an  ad  hoc,  best  -   biological  judgment   approach,  a
regionalization approach as described  provides  a  rational, objective means
to  compare  similarities  and  differences  over  large  areas.    The   regions
provide ecologically-meaningful management units and  they would help in  the
organization  and  interpretation of  State water  quality  and  NPS  reports.
Data  from the  reference  sites provide  an objective,  ecological  basis   to
refine use classifications and, when compared with  more  disturbed sites, to
evaluate  the  attainment  of uses.   Knowledge of potential  conditions  in  a
region  provides  an  objective, ecological  basis to  predict effects   of land
use changes  and pollution controls,  to  prioritize  aquatic  ecosystems  for
improvements, and to  set site-specific criteria.  Regular monitoring of  the
reference sites  and  comparisons  with historical  information  will provide  a
useful  assessment   of   temporal   changes,  not   only  in  those   aquatic
ecosystems, but in the ecological  regions  that they model.

                                   IV-6-10

-------
 I   NORTHWEST FLAT PLAINS




 H   WESTERN ROLLING PLAINS



m   NE and SW IRREGULAR



Iff  DISSECTED SOUTHEAST
    Most Typical Areas



    Generally Typical Areas



 •  Study Watersheds
                                      IV-6-11

-------
0 SECTION V: INTERPRETATION

-------
                                   CHAPTER V

                                 INTERPRETATION
INTRODUCTION

There  are  many  use  classifications  which might be  assigned  to a water  body,
such  as  navigation,  recreation,  water  supply or  the  protection  of  aquatic
life. These need not  be  mutually  exclusive. The water  body  survey  as  discussed
in this manual  is  concerned only  with aquatic  life  uses  and  the protection  of
aquatic life in a water body.

The water body  survey  may  also  be referred  to as  a use attainability  analysis.
The objectives in conducting a water body survey are to identify:

   1.  What aquatic  protection  uses  are  currently  being  achieved in  the  water
       body,

   2.  What the causes are of any impairment  to attaining the designated  aqua-
       tic protection uses, and

   3.  What  the aquatic protection  uses  are  that  could  be attained,  based  on
       the physical, chemical and  biological characteristics of the water  body.

The types of analyses  that  might  be  employed  to address these three  points  are
summarized  in Table V-l.  Most  of these  are  discussed in detail elsewhere  in
this manual.

CURRENT AQUATIC  PROTECTION USES

The actual  aquatic  protection use of  a  water body is   defined  by the resident
biota. The  prevailing  chemical   and  physical  attributes  will determine what
biota may be present,  but  little  need  be  known of  these attributes to describe
current uses.  The  raw findings  of  a biological  survey may  be  subjected  to
various measurments  and  assessments,  as  discussed  in Chapters  IV-2,  IV-4,  and
IV-5.  After performing  a   biological  inventory,  omnivore-carnivore  analysis,
and intolerant  species analysis,  and  calculating  a  diversity  index  and  other
indices of  biological  health,  one  should  be  able  adequately to describe  the
condition of the aquatic life in the water body.

It will  be  helpful  to digress  at  this juncture briefly to discuss water body
use classification  systems and their  relationship to  the  water body  survey.
Classification systems vary widely from state  to state.  Some  consist  of as  few
as  three  broad  categories, while  others  include  a  number  of more  sharply-
defined categories. Also, the use classes may  be based on geography,  salinity,
recreation, navigation,  water  supply  (municipal, agricultural, or  industrial),
or aquatic life. Often an  aquatic protection  use must  be categorized  as either
                                      V-l

-------
 TABLE  V-l.   SUMMARY OF TYPICAL WATER BODY EVALUATIONS (from EPA,1983, Water Quality Standards Handbook).
        PHYSICAL EVALUATIONS
        CHEMICAL EVALUATIONS
    BIOLOGICAL EVALUATIONS
"  Instream Characteristics
   - size (mean width/depth)
   - flow/velocity
   - total  volume
   - reaeration rates
   - gradlent/pools/rlff les
   - temperature
   - suspended solids
   - sedimentation
   - channel modifications
   - channel stahllIty

"  Substrate composition and
    characteristics

0  Channel  debris

0  Sludge deposits

0  Riparian characteristics

0  Downstream characteristics
*  dissolved oxygen

0  toxicants

0  nutrients
   - nitrogen
   - phosphorus

"  sediment oxygen demand

°  salinity

"  hardness

0  alkalinity

0  PH

0  dissolved solids
Biological Inventory (Existing Use
  Analysis)
- fish
- macroinvertebrates
- microinvertebrates
- phytoplankton
- macrophytes

Biological Condition/Health Analysis
- Diversity  Indices
- HSI Models
- Tissue Analyses
- Recovery Index
- Intolerant  Species Analysis
- Omn1vore-Carnivore Analysis

Biological Potential Analysis
- Reference  Reach Comparison
                                                   V-2

-------
a warmwater or coldwater  fishery.   Clearly,  little  information  is  required
to  place  a  water  body  into  one  of  these  two  categories.    Far  more
information  may  be  gathered  in  a water  body  survey  than  is  needed  to
assign  a classification,  based on existing  classes,  but  the  additional
data may be  necessary to  evaluate  management  alternatives and  refine  use
classification  systems  for  the protection  of  aquatic life  in the  water
body.

Since  there  may not  be  a spectrum of aquatic  protection  use  categories
available  against which  to compare the findings of the biological  survey;
and  since  the objective  of  the survey  is  to  compare  existing uses  with
designated uses,  and existing  uses with  potential  uses,  as  seen in  the
three  points listed  above, the  investigators may  need  to  develop their own
system   of  ranking  the   biological   health   of  a  water   body  (whether
qualitative or quantitative)  in order to  satisfy the  intent of the  water
body  survey.   Implicit  to the water body  survey  is  the  development  of
management strategies or  alternatives  which  might result  in enhancement  of
the biological health of  the  water  body.  To do  this  it would  be necessary
to  distinguish  the  predicted results  of  one strategy from another,  where
the strategies are  defined in terms of  aquatic  life.   The existing  State
use classifications  will  probably  not  be  helpful at  this  stage,   for  one
may  very well  be  seeking  to  define  use  levels  within   an  existing  use
category,  rather  than describing  a shift  from  one  use  classification  to
another.   To  conclude,   it  may  be helpful  to  develop  an  internal  use
classification system  to  serve  as  a  yardstick  during the  course of  the
water   body  survey,  which   may  later  be  referenced  to  the   legally
constituted use  categories of  the  state.   Sample  scales of aquatic  life
classes  are presented in  Table  V-?  and v_3.

CAUSFS  OF  IMPAIRMENT OF AQUATIC  PROTECTION  USES

If  the  biological  evaluations  indicate that the  biological health of  the
system  is  impaired  relative to  a "healthy"  or least  disturbed   control
station  or reference aquatic ecosystem  (e.g.,  as  determined by reference
reach comparisons),  then  the  physical  and chemical  evaluations  can be used
to  pinpoint the  causes  of that impairment.  Figure V-l  shows some of  the
physical and chemical parameters that  may be affected  by  various causes  of
change  in a water body.   The  analysis  of  such  parameters  will  help clarify
the magnitude  of impairments  to  attaining  other  uses,  and  will   also  be
important to the third step in  which potential  uses are examined.

ATTAINABLE AQUATIC PROTECTION USES

The third element to be  considered  is  the assessment  of  potential   uses  of
the water  body.   This  assessment   would  be  based on  the findings of  the
physical, chemical  and biological information which has been  gathered,  but
additional  study  may   also   be necessary.    Procedures   which might  be
particularly helpful  in  this stage include  the  Habitat  Suitability  Index
Models  of  the Fish  and   Wildlife  Service,   that  may   indicate  which  fish
species  could  potentially occupy a given  habitat;  and the Recovery  Index
of  Cairns  et  al.   (1977) which  estimates  the  ability  of  a  system  to
recover  following   stress.     A   reference   reach   comparison  will   be
particularly  important.    In  addition  to  establishing   a   comparative

                                    V-3

-------
           TABLE  V-2.   BIOLOGICAL HEALTH CLASSES WHICH COULD BE USED
                       IN  WATER BODY ASSESSMENT (Modified from Karr, 1981)

     Class	Attributes	

Excellent          Comparable to  the best  situations  unaltered by man; all re-
                   gionally expected species for the  habitat  and stream size,
                   including the most  intolerant forms,  are  present  with full
                   array  of age and  sex clases; balanced trophic structure.

Good               Fish and  macroinvertebrate  species richness  somewhat  less
                   than the best  expected  situation,  especially due to loss of
                   most intolerant  forms; some species with  less than optimal
                   abundances or  size  distribution  (fish);  trophic   structure
                   shows  some signs  of  stress.

Fair               Fewer  intolerant  forms  of fish and  macroinvertebrates are
                   present. Trophic  structure  of the  fish community  is  more
                   skewed  toward  an increasing  frequency  of  omnivores;  older
                   age classes of top  carnivores may be rare.

Poor               Fish community  is  dominated  by  omnivores; pollution-toler-
                   ant forms and habitat  generalists;  few  top carnivores;
                   growth  rates  and condition  factors commonly depressed; hy-
                   brids  and diseased  fish may be present.  Tolerant macroinver-
                   tebrates are often  abundant.

Very Poor          Few fish present, mostly introduced or  very tolerant forms;
                   hybrids  common;  disease,  parasites,  fin  damage,  and other
                   anomalies  regular.   Only  tolerant  forms   of  macroinverte-
                   brates  are present.
Extremely Poor
No  fish,
life.
very tolerant  macroinvertebrates,  or  no  aquatic
                                      V-4

-------
Table V-3;  Aquatic Life Survey Rating System (EPA, 1983 Draft)

A reach that is rated a five has;

-A fish community that is well balanced among the different levels
 of the food chain.
-An age structure for the most species that is stable, neither
 progressive (leading to an increase in population) or regressive
 (leading to a decrease in population),
-A sensitive sport fish species or species of special concern always
 present.
-Habitat which will support all fish species at every stage of their
 life cycle.
-Individuals that are reaching their potential for growth.
-Fewer individuals of each species.
-All available niches filled.

A reach that is rated a four has:
-Many of the above characteristics but some of them are not
 exhibited to the full potential.  For example, the reach has a well
 balanced fish community; the age structure is good, sensitive
 species are present; but the fish are not up to their full growth
 potential and may be present in higher numbers; an aspect of the
 habitat is less than perfect (i.e. occasional high temperatures
 that do not have an acute effect on the fish); and not all food
 organisms are available or they are available in fewer numbers.

A reach that is a three has:
-A community is not well balanced, one or two tropic levels
 dominate.
-The age structure for many species is not stable, exhibiting
 regressive or progressive charisteristics.
-Total number of fish is high, but individuals are small.
-A sensitive species may be present,  but is  not flourishing.
-OtT~er less sensitive species make up the majority of the biomass.
-Anadromous sport fish infrequently use these water as a migration
 route.
A reach that is rated a two h_as;

-Few sensitive sport fish are present, nonsport fish species are
 more common than sport fish species.
-Snecies are more common than abundant.
-Age structures may be very unstable for any species.
-The composition of the fish population and  dominate species is very
 changeble.
-Anedromous fish rarely use these waters as  a migration route.
-A small percent of the reach provides sport fish habitat.

A reach that is a one has:
-The ability to support only nonsport fish.  A occasional snort fish
 may be found as a transient.

A reach that is rated a zero has:
-No ability to support a fish of any sort,  an occasional fish may be
 found as a transient.


                                V-5

-------
                             SOURCE OF MODIFICATION























ry
LLJ
f—
LU
s:
«c
cc.
i
i_
4-1 13
C E
OJ —
Sk
(Q •^-«
OJ -—
t. ,
r— O*. i-
i- ^

V> O V1



I


I
T
1
I
I
I
I
I

0






I



I
I
D
I







• — -c
•c c
U- C 13
•4- 13
0 •— 0.
CO. —
3 O 3
OC S- Co.
u o
P— t*- -^- --^
re W *4— 4^ (/)
i. O O 13 <1J
3 C 1-4 •—
•M 
33 O) tn
U *J C C 31-
•^ VI 13 C "C OJ
W 13 ^D 13 CO.
cr- o. u x: — is
**. — rs <_) • — Q-
C


I


I I

I I
I
I
I I
I I I
I I
D
I 1 I

I I
I I
I
I I
I
I

r
I I
I I D
000
I I
C
I
I I I I
I I
I

C




D

4-)
X
a;
i —
I
I
I


I




I
I

I



I






I


0
I


I

I


•c
c
13
01
= g1
5 =
•^* "3
C i—
•i~ O.
Lu 0
1-
i — 4->
13 U
*j a>
01 . —
z: LU
C







I
I






I
I
I
I
I
I
T
i

I
0
D
D
0


I






&
3
V

O
u
4^
&>
a-




I
I
I
I


I

I
0

I

I

I
I



I

0
D
D








C-0

T3
C
'C
C
O
1.
1—1
0



I

I
I
*

I
I
I
I





I
I

I
I
I
0
D
D
0







^.
C

"C
c
T

4~>
C

^
a_
c




i




i
i
i




i
i
i
i
i
i

i
D
0
0
D


I

I


Meat Produc
Production
rushing
4- O
•O 0;
C f4 Ol
13 -r- £

>-, — — 1
s- *J _.
-f- i_ -C

'_)

W
I/)
fl

a.
C



I

I
I


I
I
I


1
I
I
I

I
I
I
r
I

0
0
0


I

T


Figure V-l.   Potential  Effects  of  Some  Sources of Alteration on Stream Parameters;
             0 = decrease,  I  -  increase, C = change.
                                 V-6

-------
baseline community, defining a  reference  reach  can  also  provide insight to the
aquatic  life  that  could  potentially  occur if  the  sources of  impairment  were
mitigated.

The analysis of all information that has been assembled may lead to the defini-
tion of  alternative  strategies for the  management  of the water  body  at  hand.
Each  such  strategy  corresponds to  a  unique  level  of  protection  of  aquatic
life,  or  aquatic   life  protection  use.  If  it  is determined  that an  array  of
uses are  attainable,  further analysis  which  is beyond the scope  of the  water
body  survey  would be  required to  select  a management  program for the  water
body.

A  number  of  factors  which  contribute  to the health  of  the aquatic  life  will
have been  evaluated  during the course  of  the  water body  survey.  These may  be
divided  into  two  groups:  those which  can be  controlled or manipulated,  and
those which cannot. The factors which cannot be  regulated may  be attributable
to  natural phenemona   or  may  be  attributable  to  irrevocable  anthropogenic
(cultural)  activities.  The  potential  for enhancing  the  aquatic  life  of  a
water  body essentially  lies  in those factors  over which some control may  be
exerted.

Whether or not  a  factor can be  controlled  may  itself be  a subject  of contro-
versy for  there may be  a  number of  economic judgments or institutional consid-
erations which are implicit  to  a definition of  control.  For example, there are
many cases  in  the West where  a wastewater discharge  may be  the  only  flow  to
what would otherwise be an intermittent stream.  If  water rights  have  been es-
tablished  for that discharge then  the discharge  cannot  be diverted  elsewhere,
applied to the  land  for example, in order  to reduce  the  pollutant load to the
stream. If a stream does  not  support  an anadromous  fishery because of  dams and
diversions which  have  been  built for  water supply   and  recreational  purposes,
it is unlikely that a concensus  could  be reached to restore the fishery by re-
moving the physical  barriers - the dams -  which  impede  the migration  of  fish.
However,  it  may be  practical   to  build fish  ladders and by-passes  to  allow
upstream and  downstream migration.  In  a  practical  sense  these dams represent
anthropogenic  activity  which cannot  be  reversed.  A  third example  might  be  a
situation  in  which dredging to  remove  toxic sediments  in a  river  may pose  a
much greater  threat  to  aquatic  life  than  to  do nothing.  In doing nothing  the
toxics may remain  in the  sediment  in a  biologically-unavailable  form, whereas
dredging might  resuspend  the toxic  fraction, making  it  biologically available
and also facilitating wider distribution in the  water body.

The points touched upon above  are  presented  to suggest   some of  the phenomena
which may  be  of  importance in a water body survey,  and  to suggest the need  to
recognize  whether  or  not  they  may  realistically be manipulated. Those  which
cannot be  manipulated  essentially  define the  limits of   the highest potential
use that  might  be realized  in  the  water body.  Those that can be manipulated
define the levels  of improvement that  are  attainable,  ranging  from the current
aquatic life uses to those that  are possible within the  limitations  imposed  by
factors that  cannot be  manipulated.
                                    V-7

-------
SECTION VI: REFERENCES

-------
                                  CHAPTER VI


                                  REFERENCES
CHAPTER II-l:  FLOW ASSESSMENTS
Bovee, K.,  1982.  A Guide to  Stream Habitat Analysis Using  the  Instream Flow
Incremental  Methodology, FWS/OBS-82/26.  U.S.  Fish and  Wildlife  Service, Fort
Collins,  CO.

Hilgert,  P., 1982. Evaluation of  Instream  Flow  Methodologies for Fisheries  in
Nebraska. Nebraska Game & Park  Commission  Technical  Bulletin No. 10,  Lincoln,
NB.

Tennant,  D.L.,  1976.  Instream Flow Regimens for Fish, Wildlife, Recreation and
Related Environmental  Resources, pp. 359-373.  In J.F. Osborn, and C.H. Allman,
eds. Proceedings  of  the Symposium  and  Specialty Conference  in  Instream Flow
Needs. Vol.  II,  American Fisheries  Society,  Bethesda, MD.


CHAPTER II-2: SUSPENDED  SOLIDS AND  SEDIMENTATION

Atchinson,  G.J.,  and  B.W.  Menzel,  1979.  Sensitivity  of  Warmwater  Fish
Populations  to  Suspended Solids  and Sediments.  In Muncey, R.J. et al.  "Effects
of Suspended Solids  and Sediment  on Reproduction and  Early  Life of Warmwater
Fishes."  U.S. EPA, Corvallis,  OR, EPA/600/3-79-049.

Benson, N.G.,  and  B.C.  Cowell,  1967.  The Environmental  and Plankton Diversity
in  Missouri  River Reservoirs,  pp.  358-373.   In  Reservoir  Fishery  Resources
Symposium. Reservoir  Comm.,  Southern Div.,  Am. Fish.  Soc., Bethesda, MD.

Butler, J.L.,  1963. Temperature  Relations in Shallow  Turbid Ponds. Proc. Okla.
Acad. Sci. 43:90.

Cairns, J. Jr.,  1968. Suspended  Solids Standards for  the Protection of Aquatic
Organisms. Eng.  Bull.  Purdue University  129:16.

Chew, R.L., 1969.  Investigation of  Early  Life History  of Largemouth  Bass  in
Florida.  Florida Game and Fish Comm.  Proj.  Rept. F-024-R-02.  Tallahassee, FL.

Ellis, M.M., 1969. Erosion  Salt as  a Factor  in Aquatic Environments. Ecology
17:29.

European   Inland Fisheries Advisory  Committee,  1964.  Water  Quality Critria for
European   Freshwater  Fish:  Report   on   Finely  Divided  Solids  and  Inland
Fisheries. EIFAC Tech. Paper(l)  21  pp.

Iwamoto,  R.N., E.O.  Salo, M.A.  Madeq,  R.L.  Comas and R.  Rulifson,  1978.
Sediment   and Water Quality:  A Review of  the Literature Including a Suggested
Approach   for Water Quality  Criteria  With  Summary  of  Workshop and Conclusions.
EPA 910/9-78-048.

-------
Swingle, H.S.,  1956.  Appraisal  of Methods  of  Fish Population Study  Part  IV:
Determination of Balance in  Farm Fish Ponds. Trans. N. Am. Wild. Conf. 21:298.

Trautman, M.G.,  1957.  The Fishes  of  Ohio.  Ohio State  Univ.  Press,  Columbus.
683 pp.

U.S. EPA.  1976. Quality Criteria  for  Water.  U.S. EPA,  Washington,  D.C.  U.S.
Government  Printing  Office,  055-001-01099.


CHAPTER II-3: POOLS, RIFFLES  AND SUBSTRATE COMPOSITION

Edwards, E.A.,  et al.,  1982.  Habitat Suitability  Index  Models:  Black Crappie.
U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service, Ft. Collins, CO. FWS/OBS-82/10.6.

Edwards, E.A.,  et al.,  1982.  Habitat Suitability  Index  Models:  White Crappie.
U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service, Ft. Collins, CO. FWS/OBS-82/10.7.

Hickman,  T.  and  R.F.  Raleigh,   1982.  Habitat  Suitability  Index  Models:
Cutthroat   Trout.   U.S.  Fish   and   Wildlife   Service,  Ft.  Collins,   CO.
FWS/OBS-82/10.5.

Hynes,  H.B.N.,  1970.  The  Ecology of  Running   Waters.  University of  Toronto
Press, Toronto.

Lagler, Karl F., et  al., 1977. Ichthyology.  John Wiley & Sons, NY.  506 pp.

La  Gorce, J.  (editor),  1939.  The  Book  of Fishes. National Geographic Society,
Washington,  D.C. 367 pp.

McMahon, T.E.,  1982.  Habitat  Suitability Index Models:   Creek  Chub.  U.S.  Fish
and Wildlife Service, Ft. Collins,  CO. FWS/OBS-82/10.4.

McMahon, T.E.  and  J.W. Terrell, 1982. Habitat  Suitability  Index Models:
Channel  Catfish.   U.S.  Fish   and   Wildlife   Service,  Ft.  Collins,   CO.
FWS/OBS-82/10.2.

Migdalski,   Edward C.  and G.S. Fichter,   1976. The  Fresh  and  Salt  Water  Fishes
of  the World. Alfred A. Knopf, NY.  316 pp.

Odum, E.P.,  1971. Fundamentals of  Ecology. W.B.  Saunders  Co. 574 pp.

Stalnaker,   C.B.  and  O.L.   Arnette   (editor),   1976,  Methodologies  for  the
Determination  of  Stream  Resource  Flow Requirements:  An  Assessment.  U.S.
Fish and Wildlife Service,  FWS/OBS-76/03.

Stuber,  Robert  J.,  et al.,   1982.  Habitat Suitability  Index  Models:  Bluegill.
U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service, Ft. Collins, CO. FWS/ OBS-82/10.8.

Whitton, B.A.,  (editor),  1975. River Ecology.  University of  California  Press.
724 pp.
                                     VI-2

-------
CHAPTER II-4:  CHANNEL  CHARACTERISTICS AND EFFECTS OF CHANNELIZATION

Arner, D.H., et al. 1976. Effects of Channelization on the Luxapalila River on
Fish,  Aquatic  Invertebrates,  Water Quality,  and Furbearers.  U.S. Fish  and
Wildlife Service,  Washington,  D.C. FWS/DBS-76/08.

Barclay, J.S., 1980.  Impact  of Stream Alterations on  Riparian  Communities in
Southcentral  Oklahoma.   U.S.   Fish  and  Wildlife  Service,  Albuquerque,  NM.
FWS/OBS-80/17.

Brown,  S.,  et  al.,  1979.  Structure   and  Function of  Riparian  Wetlands.  In
Strategies  for  Protection  and Management  of  Floodplain  Wetlands  and  Other
Riparian Ecosystems, Johnson,  R.R., and McCormick, J.F.  (editors), U.S.  Dept.
of Agriculture,  Washington,  D.C., Tech. Rept. WO-12, pp. 17-32.

Bulkley, R.V., 1975. A Study  of  the Effects of Stream Channelization and Bank
Stabilization  on Warm Water Sport Fish in Iowa: Subproject No. 1.  Inventory of
Major Stream Alterations in  Iowa. U.S. Fish and Wildlife  Service, Washington,
D.C. FWS/OBS-76/11.

Bulkley,  R.V.,  et  al.   1976.  Warmwater Stream Alteration  in   Iowa:  Extent,
Effects on  Habitat, Fish, and  Fish  Food,  and Evaluation  of Stream Improvement
Structures  (Summary Report). U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service, Washington,  D.C.,
FWS/OBS-76/16.

Cairns, J.,  Jr.,   et  al.,  1976. The  Recovery  of  Damaged Streams.  Assoc.  SE
Biol. Bull., 13:79.

Chow, V.T.,  1959.  Open Channel  Hydraulics. McGraw-Hill Book Co., NY. 680 pp.

Chutter, F.M.,  1969. The Effects of  Silt and Sand on the  Invertebrate Fauna of
Streams and  Rivers. Hydrobiologia, 34:57.

Cummins, K.W.,  1973. Trophic Relations  of Aquatic Insects. Ann.  Rev. Entomol.,
18:183.

Cummins, K.W.,  1974.  Structure and  Function of Stream Ecosystems. Bioscience,
24:631.

Cummins, K.W., 1975. Ecology  of  Running  Waters: Theory and Practice. In  Proc.
Sandusky River Basin  Symposium,  in  Baker,   D.B.,  et  al.,  (editors) Heidelburg
College, Tiffin,  OH.

Cummins, K.W., and  G.H. Lauff, 1969.  The Influence of Substrate Particle Size
on the Microdistribution  of  Stream Macrobenthos. Hydrobiologia, 34:145.

Etnier, D.A.,  1972. Effect of Annual Rechanneling on Stream Population. Trans.
Amer. Fish.  Soc.,  101:372.

Frederickson, L.H.,  1979.  Floral  and  Faunal Changes   in  Lowland Hardwood
Forests in  Missouri  Resulting  from  Channelization,  Drainage, and  Impoundment.
U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service, Washington,  D.C. FWS/OBS-78/91.


                                    VI-3

-------
Gammon, J.R.,  1979. The  Effects  of Inorganic Sediment on  Stream  Biota.  Water
Poll. Con. Res. Series,  108050 DWC  12/70, U.S. EPA, Washington,  D.C.

Gorman,  OJ.,   and Karr,  J.R.,   1978.  Habitat  Structure  and  Stream   Fish
Communities. Ecology,  59:507.

Griswold, B.L.,  et  al.,  1978. Some  Effects  of Stream Channelization  on  Fish
Populations, Macroinvertebrates,  and  Fishing in Ohio  and  Indiana.  U.S.  Fish
and Wildlife Service,  Columbia, MO, FWS/OBS-77/46.

Huggins, D.G.,   and R.E.  Moss,  1975.  Fish Population Structure  in Altered  and
Unaltered Areas of a Small  Kansas USA Stream. Trans. Kansas  Acad. Sci.,  77:18.

Huish, M.T., and  G.B. Pardue, 1978. Ecological  Studies of  One  Channelized  and
Two  Unchannelized Swamp Streams  in  North  Carolina.  U.S.   Fish and  Wildlife
Service, Washington, D.C. FWS/OBS-78/85.

Hynes, H.B.N.,  1970.  The Ecology  of  Running Waters.  Univ. of  Toronto Press,
Toronto, 555 pp.

Karr,  J.R.,  and  I.J.  Schlosser,   1977.  Impact  of  Nearstream   Vegetation  and
Stream  Morphology  in  Water Quality  and Stream Biota. U.S.  EPA, Athens,  GA,
Ecol. Res. Series, EPA-600/3-77-097.

King, D.L., and  R.C. Ball, 1967. Comparative Energetics  of a  Polluted  Stream.
Limnol. Oceanog., 12:27.

King,  L.R., 1973.  Comparison  of  the  Distribution  of  Minnows  and  Darters
Collected in 1947 and  1972 in Boone  County,  Iowa. Proc.  Iowa  Acad.  Sci.,  80:
133.

King,  L.R., and K.D. Carlander, 1976. A  Study of  the  Effects  of Stream
Channelization   and Bank   Stabilization  on  Warmwater  Sport   Fish   in  Iowa:
Subproject  No.  3. Some  Effects  of Short-Reach  Channelization  on Fishes  and
Fish Food Organisms in Central Iowa Warmwater Streams. U.S. Fish  and Wildlife
Service, Washington, D.C. FWS/OBS-76/13.

Lavandier,  R.,  and Caplancef, J.,  1975. Effects  of  Variations  in  Dissolved
Oxygen on the Benthic  Invertebrates of a Stream in the Pyreenees.  Ann.  Limnol.
11.

Leopold, L.B.,   et  al.,  1964.  Fluvial   Processes  in  Geomorphology.  W.H.  Freeman
and Co., San Francisco,  CA.

Leopold,  L.B.,  and W.B. Langbein, 1966. River Meanders.  Scientific  American
214:60.

Lund,  J.,   1976.  Evaluation  of  Stream  Channelization  and  Mitigation  of  the
Fishery  Resources of  the  St. Regis  River,  Montana.   U.S.  Fish  and  Wildlife
Service, Washington, D.C. FWS/OBS-76-07.

Maki, T.E.,  et  al.,  1980.  Effects of Stream Channelization on Bottomland  and
Swamp   Forest   Ecosystems.   Univ.   of   North  Carolina,  Chapel  Hill,   NC,
UNC-WRRI-80-147.
                                    VI-4

-------
Marzolf, G.R., 1978. The  Potential  Effects  of Clearing and Snagging on Stream
Ecosystems. U.S.  Fish and  Wildlife  Service,  Washington,  D.C. FWS/OBS-78-14.

Meehan,  W.R.,  1971. Effects  of Gravel  Cleaning  on  Bottom Organisms  in the
Southern Alaska Streams.  Prog.  Fish-Cult.,  33:107.

Minshall, G.W., and  P.V.  Winger,  1968.  The Effect of Reduction in Stream Flow
on Invertebrate Drift.  Ecology,  49:580.

Minshall,  J.W.   and  J.N.  Minshall,   1977.   Microdistribution   of  Benthic
Invertebrates in a Rocky  Mountain Stream. Hydrobiologia,  53:231.

Montalbano,  F.,   et  al.,  1979.  The  Kissimmee  River  Channelization:   A
Preliminary Evaluation of  Fish  and Wildlife Mitigation  Measures.  In Proc.  of
the Mitigation Symp., Colorado  State Univ.,  Ft.  Collins,  CO, pp. 508-515.

Morris,  L.A.,  et   al.,   1968.  Effects   of  Main  Stream  Impoundments  and
Channelization  Upon the  Limnology of  the  Missouri  River,  Nebraska.  Trans.
Amer. Fish. Soc.,  97:380.

Nebeker,  A.V.,  1971.  Effect   of  Temperature  at  Different  Altitudes  on the
Emergence  of  Aquatic  Insects  from  a Single  Stream.  Jour.  Kansas. Entomol.
Soc., 44:26.

O'Rear,  C.W.,  Jr.,  1975.  The  Effects   of  Stream  Channelization  on  the
Distribution   of  Nutrients  and  Metals.  East Carolina  Univ.,  Greenville, NC,
UNC-WRRI-75-108.

Parrish, J.D., et  al.,  1978.   Stream Channel  Modification in Hawaii. Part  D:
Summary Report. U.S. Fish  and Wildlife Service,  Columbia,  MO FWS/OBS-78/19.

Pfleiger,  W.L.,   1975.  The Fishes  of  Missouri.  Missouri  Dept.  Conserv.,
Jefferson City, MO.

Possardt, E.E., et  al., 1976. Channelization Assessment,  White River, Vermont:
Remote  Sensing,   Benthos,  and Wildlife.   U.S.   Fish   and Wildlife Service,
Washington, D.C.  FWS/OBS-76/07.

Schmal,  R.N.,  and  D.F.  Sanders,   1978.  Effects  of  Stream  Channelization  on
Aquatic  Macroinvertebrates, Buena  Vista Marsh,  Portage  County, WI.  U.S. Fish
and Wildlife  Service, Washington, D.C. FWS/OBS-78/92.

Simpson, P.W., et  al.,  1982.  Manual  of  Stream Channelization Impacts on Fish
and Wildlife. U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service, Kearneysville, WV FWS/OBS-82/24.

Swenson, W.A.,  et  al.,  1976.  Effects  of  Red  Clay  Turbidity on  the Aquatic
Environment.   In  Best  Management   Practices  for  Non-Point  Source  Pollution
Control Seminar,  U.S. EPA, Chicago,  IL, EPA  905/9-76-005.

Tebo,  L.B.,  1955.  Effects  of  Siltation,  Resulting from  Improper  Logging,  on
the Bottom Fauna  of a Small Trout  Stream  in the Southern Appalachians.  Prog.
Fish-Cult. 17:64.
                                     VI-5

-------
Vannote, et  al.,  1980.  The River  Continuum Concept. Can. Jour.  Fish.  Aquat.
Sci., 37:130.

Wallen, E.I.,  1951.  The Direct Effect  of Turbidity on  Fishes.  Oklahoma  A&M,
Stillwater,  OK, Biol.  Series No. 2, 48:1.

Walton, O.E.,  Jr.,  1977.  The  Effects of  Density,  Sediment Size,  and Velocity
on Drift of  Acroneuria abnormis  (Plecoptera). OIKOS, 28:291.

Wharton, C.H.,  and  M.M. Brinson,  1977. Characteristics  of Southeastern River
Systems. In  Stategies for Protection  and Management of  Floodplain Wetlands and
Other  Riparian  Ecosystems,   Johnson,  R.R.  and  J.F.  McCormick  (editors),
U.S.D.A.,  Washington,  D.C., Tech. Report WO-12, pp. 32-40.

Whitaker,  G.A.,  et   al.,  1979.  Channel   Modification   and  Macroinvertebrate
Diversity  in Small  Streams. Wat  Res. Bull.,  15:874.

Williams,  D.C.,  and  J.H.  Muncie,  1978.  Substrate Size Selection  by  Stream
Invertebrates and the Influence  of Sand, Limnol. Oceanog. 73:1030.

Winger, P.V.,  et  al., 1976. Evaluation  Study  of  Channelization  and Mitigation
Structures  in  Crow  Creek, Franklin  County,  Tennessee  and Jackson  County,
Alabama. U.S. Soil  Conservation  Service, Nashville, TN.

Wolf,  J., et  al., 1972.  Comparison  of  Benthic Organisms  in  Semi-Natural  and
Channelized  Portions  of  the Missouri River.  Proc. S.D. Acad. Sci., 51:160.

Yang,  C.T.,  1972.  Unit  Stream  Power  and  Sediment Transport. A.S.C.E.,  Jour.
Hydraulics Div., 98:1805.

Zimmer, D.W.,  1977.  Observations of  Invertebrate Drift  in  the  Skunk  River,
Iowa. Proc.  Iowa Acad. Sci., 82:175.

Zimmer,  D.W.,  and R.W.  Bachman,  1976.  A Study  of  the Effects of  Stream
Channelization  and  Bank   Stabilization   on Warmwater   Sport  Fish  in  Iowa:
Subproject  No. 4. The  Effects of  Long  Reach  Channelization on  Habitat  and
Invertebrate  Drift  in  Some   Iowa  Streams.   U.S.  Fish  and Wildlife  Service,
Washington,  D.C. FWS/OBS-76/14.

Zimmer, D.W.,  and R.W. Bachman, 1978. Channelization and Invertebrate Drift in
Some Iowa  Streams. Water Res.  Bull. 14:868.
CHAPTER II-5:  TEMPERATURE

Brungs, W.A.  and Jones, B.R.,  1977.  Temperature  Criteria  for Freshwater Fish:
Protocol and Procedures,  U.S. EPA,  Duluth, EPA-600/ 3-77-061.

Butler,  J.N.,  1964.   Ionic  Equilibrium,  A  Mathematical  Approach,  Addison-
Wesley, Reading, MA.

Carlander, K.D., Handbook of Freshwater Fishery Biology, Vols. I (1969) and II
(1977). Iowa State  University Press,  Ames,  Iowa.

                                     VI-6

-------
Cherry, D.  and  Cairns, C.,  1982.  Biological  Monitoring, Part  V  - Preference
and Avoidance Studies,  Water  Research,  16:263.

Hokanson,  K.,  1977.  Temperature Requirements  of Some  Percids  and Adaptations
to the Seasonal  Temperature Cycle,  J. Fish. Res. Board Can., 34:1524-1550.

Karr, J.R. and Schlosser,  1978.  I.J., Water Resources and the Land Water Inter-
face, Science 201:  229-234.

Klein, 1., 1962. River  Pollution,  II. Causes and Effects, Butterworths, London.

Machenthun,   K.M.,  1969.  The  Practice  of Water  Pollution  Biology,  U.S.  DOI,
Federal Water Pollution Control  Agency,  U.S.G.P.O., Washington, DC.

Metcalf and  Eddy, Inc., 1972.  Wastewater Engineering, McGraw-Hill.

Morrow,  J.E.,   1980.  The  Freshwater  Fishes  of  Alaska,  Alaska  Northwest
Publishing Company,  Anchorage.

Scott, W.,  and  Grossman,  E.,  1973. Freshwater  Fishes  of Canada,  Fish.  Res.
Board Can.,  Bulletin 184.

Stumm, W.  and Morgan, 1970. J. Aquatic  Chemistry, Wiley-Interscience, New York.

Warren,  C.E.,  1971.  Biology   and Water  Pollution  Control,  W.B.  Saunders
Company,  Philadelphia.


CHAPTER II-6: RIPARIAN  EVALUATIONS

Behnke, A.C., et al.,  1979.  Biological  Basis  for Assessing Impacts of Channel
Modification: Invertebrate Production,  Drift  and  Fish  Feeding  in Southeastern
Blackwater River.  Environmental  Resources Center,  Rep. 06-79.  Georgia  Inst.
Techn., Atlanta.

Behnke, R.J.,   1979.  Values   and  Protection  of  Riparian  Ecosystems.  In  The
Mitigation Symposium:  A  National  Workshop  on Mitigating  Losses  of  Fish  and
Wildlife  Habitats.  Gustav  A. Sandon,  Tech.  Coordinator,  U.S.D.A.,  Rocky  Mt.
For. and Rng. Exp.  Stn.,  Ogden,  UT,  Gen. Tech. Rept., RM-65 p. 164-167.

Bolen,  E.G.,    1982.  Playas,   Irrigation   and   Wildlife  in   West   Texas.
Transactions, North  American  Wildlife Conference.

Brinson,   M.M.,  B.L. Swift,  R.C.  Plantico  and  J.S.  Barclay,   1981.  Riparian
Ecosystems:   Their   Ecology   and   Status.   U.S.   Fish   and  Wildlife  Service
FWS/OBS-81/17.

Campbell,    C.J.,   1970.   Ecological    Implication   of  Riparian  Vegetation
Management.  J. Soil  Water Conserv.  25:49.

Grouse,  M.R.  and  R.R.  Kindschy,  1981. A  Method  for Predicting Riparian
Vegetation Potential. Presented  at Symposium on Acquisition and Utilization of
Aquatic Habitat  Inventory Information.  Portland, OR.

                                    VI-7

-------
Cowardin,  L.M.,   et   al.,   1979.  Classification  of  Wetlands  and  Deepwater
Habitats of  the  United  States.  U.S.  Fish  and Wildlife Service,  Washington,
D.C. FWS/OBS-79/31.

Council  of Environmental Quality, 1978. Our  Nation's  Wetlands.  An Interagency
Task   Force   Report.   U.S.   Government.   Printing   Office,   Washington,   D.C.
(041-011-000045-9).

Greeson, P.E., et  al.,  editors,  1979. Wetland Function  and  Values:  The  State
of Our Understanding.  American Water Resources Association,  Minneapolis,  MM.

Hawkins, C.P.,  M.L.  Murphy  and N.H.  Anderson,   1982.  Effects  of Canopy,
Substrate  Composition  and  Gradient  on  the  Structure  of  Macroinvertebrate
Communities in Cascade Range Streams of Oregon. Ecology 63:1840.

Johnson, R.R. and D.A. Jones,  1977.  Importance, Preservation  and Management  of
Riparian Habitat: A Symposium.  U.S.D.A.  For.  Serv.,  Gen.  Tech. Rep. RM-43. Ft.
Collins, Co.

Johnson,  R.R.   and   J.F.   McCormik,  1978.   Strategies  for  Protection  and
Management  of Floodplain Wetlands and  Other Riparian Ecosystems. U.S.D.A. For.
Serv., Gen. Tech. Rep. WO-12, Washington, D.C.

Karr,  J.R.  and  I.J.  Schlosser,   1977.   Impact  of  Vegetation  and  Stream
Morphology  on Water Quality and  Stream  Biota. U.S.  EPA  Cincinnati,  Ohio EPA/
3-77-097.

Karr,  J.R.  and  I.J.  Schlosser, 1978. Water Resources and  the Land-Water
Interface.  Science 201:229.

Lotspeich,   F.B.,  1980.  Watershed  as the  Basic  Ecosystem: This  Conceptual
Framework  Provides  a  Basis  for  a   Natural  Classification  System.   Water
Resources Bulletin,  American Water Resources Association, 16(4):581.

Moring,  J.R., 1975. Fisheries Research Report  No.  9,  Oregon  Dept.  of Fish and
Wildlife, Corvallis.

Mueller-Dombois,  D.  and H. Ellenberg,  1974.  Aims  and Methods  of Vegetation
Ecology. John Wiley and Sons, NY.

Peterson, R.C. and  K.W. Cummins, 1974.  Leaf  Processing  in  a Woodland Stream.
Freshwater Biology 4:343.

Platts,  W.S.,  1982. Livestock  and Riparian-Fishery  Interactions:  What  are the
Facts? Trans. No. Amer. Wildlife  Conf. (47),  Portland, OR.

Ross,  S.T.  and  J.A.  Baker, 1983.  The Response  of  Fishes  to  Periodic  Spring
Floods in a Southeastern Stream.  The American  Midland  Naturalist 109:1.

Schlosser,  I.J,,  1982. Fish Community  Structure and Function Along Two Habitat
Gradients in a Headwater Stream.  Ecological Monographs  52:395.
                                     VI-8

-------
Sedell, J., et al., 1975. The Processing of Conifer and Hardwood Leaves in Two
Coniferous Forest Streams.  I. Weight  Loss  and Associated Invertebrates.  Verh.
des. Inter. Vereins.  Limn.  19:1617.

Sharpe, W.E.,  1975.  Timber Management  Influences  on Aquatic Ecosystems  and
Recommendations for Future  Research. Water Res. Bui. 11:546.

U.S.   EPA,   1976.   Forest   Harvest,   Residue   Treatment,   Reforestation   and
Protection of Water Quality. U.S. EPA,  Washington, D.C. EPA 910/9-76-020.

Van  der Valk, A.6.,  C.B.  Davis,  J.L.  Baker  and  C.F. Beer,  1980.  Natural
Freshwater Wetlands  as Nitrogen  and  Phosphorus  Traps for Land Runoff  p.
457-467. In Wetland Functions and Values: The State of Our Understanding,  P.E.
Greeson, et al. (editors) Amer.  Water  Res. Asso. Minneapolis, MN.


CHAPTER III-l: WATER  QUALITY INDICES

Brown,  R.M.,  et  al.,  1970.  "A  Water  Quality  Index - Do We  Dare?"  Water  and
Sewage Works, p.  339.

Dinius, S.H.,  1972.  "Social  Accounting System for Evaluating  Water Resources"
Water Resources Res.  8(5):1159.

Harkins,  R.D.,  1974.  "An  Objective  Water  Quality  Index"  Jour.  Water  Poll.
Cont. Fed. 46(3):588.

Kendall, M.,  1975.  Rank  Correlation Methods, Charles Griffen and Co., London.

U.S. EPA,  1978. "Water Quality Indices: A Survey of Indices Used in the United
States," U.S. EPA,  Washington, D.C., 600/4-78-005.


CHAPTER III-2: HARDNESS,  ALKALINITY, pH AND SALINITY

Andrew, R.W., et al.,  1977. Effects of Inorganic Complexing on the Toxicity of
Copper to  Daphnia  magna.  Water Research,  11: 309.

Calamari,  D.  and Marchetti, R.,  1975.  Predicted and Observed Acute Toxicity of
Copper and Ammonia to Rainbow Trout (Salmo gairdneri Rich.).  Progress in Water
Technology, 7: 569.

Calamari,  D., et al.,  1980. Influence of Water Hardness on Cadmium Toxicity to
Salmo gairdneri Rich. Water Research.  14: 1421.

Carroll, J.J., et al.,  1979.  Influences  of Hardness Constituents  on the Acute
Toxicity of Cadmium to Brook Trout  (Salvelnus fontinalis). Bulletin of Environ-
mental Contamination  and Toxicology, 22:  575.

European  Inland  Fisheries  Advisory Commission.  1969.  Water  Quality  Criteria
for European  Freshwater  Fish  -  Extreme pH Values and  Inland  Fisheries. Water
Research,  3:  593.


                                    VI-9

-------
Graham, M.S.  and Wood,  C.M.,  1981.  Toxicity  of Environmental  Acids  to the
Rainbow Trout:  Interactions of  Water Hardness, Acid  Type, and  Exercise.
Canadian Journal  of  Zoology, 59: 1518.

Haines, T.A., 1981.  Acid Precipitation  and  its Consequences  for  Aquatic
Ecosystems:  A Review.  Transactions  of the  American Fisheries Society,  110:669.

Haranath,  V.B., et  al.,  1978.  Effect of Exposure  to  Altered  pH Media on Tissue
Proteolysis   and   Nitrogenous   End   Products  in   a   Freshwater   Fish  Tilapia
mossambica (Peters). Indian Journal  of Experimental Biology,  16:  1088.

Hillaby, B.A., and  Randall,  D.J.,  1979.  Acute  Ammonia  Toxicity and Ammonia
Excretion   in  Rainbow Trout   (Sal mo  gairdneri).  Journal   of  the  Fisheries
Research Board of Canada  36:621.

Kinka_de M.L.,  and  Erdman, H.E.,  1975. The  Influence  of Hardness  Components
(Ca    and  Mg  )  in Water on  the  Uptake  and  Concentration  of  Cadmium  in  a
Simulated  Freshwater Ecosystem. Environmental Research,  10:  308.

Lloyd,  R.,  1965. Factors that  Affect the Tolerance  of  Fish  to Heavy  Metal
Poisoning,  In:   Biological  Problems  in  Water  Pollution^   3rd  Seminar,  U.S.
Department of Health Education and Welfare, pp.  181-187.

Maetz, J.  and Bornancin M., 1975, referenced in Calamari,  et  al.,  1980.

Mount, D.I.,1973. Chronic Effect  of  Low pH on Fathead Minnow Survival,  Growth,
and Reproduction. Water Research, 7:  987.

Pagenkopf, G.K.,  et  al.,  1974.  Effect of Complexation on  Toxicity of Copper  to
Fish. Journal of  the Fisheries Research Board of Canada, 31:  462-465.

Peterson,  R.H., et  al.,1980.  Inhibition of Atlantic  Salmon Hatching  at  Low  pH.
Canadian Journal  of  Fisheries and Aquatic Sciences, 37:370.

Reid,  G.K.,  1961.   Ecology  of  Inland  Waters  and Estuaries,  D.   Van  Nostrand
Company, New York.

Sawyer, C.N. and McCarty, P.L., 1978. Chemistry for Environmental Engineering,
McGraw-Hill  Book  Company, New York.

Shaw,  T.L.  and  Brown,  V.M.,  1974.  The  Toxicity of Some Forms  of Copper  to
Rainbow Trout. Water Research,  8:  377-392.

Stiff,  M.J.,  1971.  Copper/Bicarbonate Equilibria in Solutions  of Bicarbonate
Ions  at Concentrations  Similar to those Found in  Natural Waters.   Water
Research,  5: 171-176.

Thurston,  R.V., et  al.,  1974,  referenced in U.S. EPA, 1976.

U.S. EPA,  1976. Quality  Criteria  for Water, U.S. EPA, Washington, D.C.

Warren, C.E. 1971. Biology and Water Pollution  Control, W.B. Saunders  Company,
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania.
                                    VI-10

-------
CHAPTER IV-1:  HABITAT  SUITABILITY  INDICES

Inskip, P.O.,  1982. Habitat Suitability Index Models:  Northern pike,  U.S.  Fish
and Wildlife Service,  Ft.  Collins, CO,  FWS/OBS-82/10.17.

McMahon,  I.E.  and J.W.  Terrell, 1982.  Habitat  Suitability  Index Models:
Channel   Catfish.   U.S.   Fish   and   Wildlife   Service,   Ft.   Collins,   CO,
FWS/OBS-82/10.2.

Terrell,  J.W.,  et  al.,  1982.  Habitat Suitability  Index  Models: Appendix  A.
Guidelines  for  Riverine and Lacustrine Applications  of  Fish HSI Models  With
the  Habitat  Evaluation  Procedures,   U.S.   Fish   and  Wildlife  Service,   Ft.
Collins, CO, FWS/OBS-82/10.A.


CHAPTER IV-2:  DIVERSITY  INDICES  AND MEASURES  OF COMMUNITY STRUCTURE

Beak,  T.W.,  1964.  Biotic  Index of  Polluted  Streams  and Its  Relationship  to
Fisheries. Second  International  Conference on Water Pollution Research,  Tokyo,
Japan.

Beck, W.M.  Jr.,  1955. Suggested Method for  Reporting  Biotic  Data. Sewage  Ind.
Wastes, 27:1193.

Bloom, S.A., et al., 1972. Animal-Sediment Relations and Community Analysis  of
a Florida Estuary.  Marine  Biology, 13:43.

Boesch,  D.F.,   1957.  Application  of   Numerical  Classification  in  Ecological
Investigations  of Water  Pollution. EPA-600/3-77-033, U.S. EPA, Corvallis.

Bray,  J.R. and Curtis,  J.T.,  1957.  An Ordination of  the  Upland  Forest
Communities of  Southern  Wisconsin. Ecological Monographs, 27:325.

Brillouin,  L.,  1960.  Science  and Information  Theory.  2nd ed.  Academic Press
Inc. NY.

Brock,  D.A.,  1977. Comparison  of  Community  Similarity  Indexes.  Journal Water
Pollution Control Federation, 49:2488.

Buikema, A.L.  Jr.,  1980. Pollution Assessment:  A Training Manual. UNESCO,  U.S.
MAB Handbook No. 1. Washington,  D.C.

Cairns, J.  Jr.,  et al.,  1968.   The Sequential  Comparison  Index  - A  Simplified
Method  for Non-Biologists  to  Estimate  Relative  Differences   in  Biological
Diversity in Stream Pollution Studies.  Jour.  Water  Poll. Control Fed., 40:1607.

Cairns, J.R.,  Jr.  and  K.L. Dickson,  1969.  Cluster Analysis  of  Potomac River
Survey  Stations Based  on Protozoan  Presence-Absence  Data.  Hydrobiologia,
34:3-4, 414-432.

Cairns, J. Jr., et  al.,  1970.  Occurrence and Distribution of Diatoms and Other
Algae   in   the  Upper  Potomac  River.   Notulae  Naturae  Acad.   Nat.   Sci.
Philadelphia,  436:1.

                                    VI-11

-------
Cairns, J.  Jr.  and  K.L.  Dickson,  1971.  A  Simple Method  for the  Biological
Assessment  of  the  Effects  of  Waste  Discharges  on  Aquatic  Bottom-Dwelling
Organisms. Jour. Water  Poll.  Control Fed., 43:755.

Cairns, J., Jr. and  R.L.  Kaesler,  1971.  Cluster  Analysis of  Fish  in  a  Portion
of the Upper Potomac  River. Trans. American Fishery Society,  100:750.

Cairns,  J.  Jr.,   et  al.,   1973.  Rapid  Biological   Monitoring   Systems   for
Determining Aquatic  Community  Structure in Receiving  Systems. In  Biological
Methods for the Assessment of Water Quality,  (J.  Cairns,  Jr.  and  K.L. Dickson,
editors) American  Society  for Testing and Materials, STP 528,  p. 148.

Cairns,  J.R., Jr.,  1977. Quantification  of  Biological  Integrity.  In The
Integrity  of  Water   (R.K.  Ballentine  and  L.J.  Guarraia,  editors)   U.S.
Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.

Chutter,  F.M.,  1972. An  Empirical  Biotic  Index  of  the Quality  of Water  in
South African Streams and  Rivers. Water Resources, 6:19.

Clifford,  H.T.   and   W.   Stephenson,   1975.  An   Introduction  to   Numerical
Classification.  Academic Press, New York.

Czekanowski,  J.,   1913.   Zarys   Metod  Statystycznych.  Die  Grundzuge   der
Statischen Metoden, Warsaw.

Dixon, W.J. and F.J. Massey, Jr.,  1969.  Introduction to  Statistical  Analysis,
3rd ed. McGraw-Hill,  NY.

Duncan, D.B., 1955. Multiple  Range  and Multiple F Tests, Biometrics,  11:1.

Fager, E.W., 1972. Diversity: A Sampling Study. Amer. Natur.,  106:293.

Foerster, J.W.,  et  al.,   1974.  Thermal  Effects  on the Connecticut River:
Phycology and Chemistry. Journal Water Pollution Control Federation,  46:2138.

Gammon, J.R.,  1976.  The  Fish Populations of the  Middle  340  km of  the Wabash
River.  Technical  Report   No.  86,   Purdue  University  Water Resources  Research
Center, West Lafayette, IN, pp. 1-48.

Gammon, J.R.  and  J.M.  Reidy, 1981. The Role of  Tributaries  During  an  Episode
of  Low Dissolved  Oxygen  in  the Wabash  River,   IN.  In  AFS  Warmwater  Streams
Symposium. American Fish Society, Bethesda, MD.

Gammon, J.R., et  al.,  1981.  Role  of  Electrofishing  in  Assessing  Environmental
Quality of  the Wabash  River. In Ecological  Assessments  of  Effluent  Impacts on
Communities  of  Indigenous  Aquatic  Organisms   (J.M.  Bates   and  C.I   Weber,
editors) Am. Soc.  Testing  and Materials, STP 730, Philadelphia, PA.

Gaufin, A.R.,  1973.  Use  of  Aquatic  Invertebrates  in  the Assessment of  Water
Quality.  In Biological   Methods  for the  Assessment  of Water  Quality,  (J.
Cairns, Jr. and K.L.  Dickson, editors) Am. Soc.  for Testing and Materials, STP
528, Philadelphia, PA.


                                     VI-12

-------
Gleason, H.A.,  1922.  On  the  Relation Between Species and Area. Ecology, 3:158.

Godfrey,  P.O.,  1928.  Diversity  as  a  Measure  of Benthic  Macroinvertebrate
Community Response to Water  Pollution. Hydrobiologia, 57:111.

Hartigan, J.A.,  1975. Clustering Algorithms. Wiley-Interscience, NY.

Heck,  K.L.  Jr.,  1976.  Community  Structure  and the Effects  of  Pollution  in
Sea-Grass Meadows  and Adjacent Habitats. Marine Biology, 35:345.

Herricks, E.E.  and  J.  Cairns  Jr.,   1982.  Biological   Monitoring.  Part  III:
Receiving System  Methodology Based  on Community  Structure.   Water  Research,
16:141.

Hilsenhoff,  W.L.,  1977. Use of Arthropods  to Evaluate Water Quality  of
Streams. WI  Dept.  Nat. Resour. Tech. Bull. No. 100.

 	, 1982.  Using  a Biotic Index to Evaluate  Water  Quality  in
Streams. WI  Dept.  Nat. Resour. Tech. Bull No. 132.

Horn,  H.S.,  1966.  Measurement  of  "Overlap" in  Compaative  Ecological  Studies.
American Naturalist,  100:419.

Howmiller, R.P.  and M.A. Scott,  1977.  An Environmental  Index Based on Relative
Abundance of  Oligochaete Species.  Jour. Water Poll. Control  Fed. 49:809.

Hughes, B.D., 1978. The Influence  of  Factors  Other than Pollution on the Value
of Shannon's Diversity Index, for  Benthic Macroinvertebrates in Streams,  Water
Res., 92:359.

Hurlbert, S.H.,  1971.  The  Nonconcept  of  Species  Diversity:  A  Critique  and
Alternative Parameters.  Ecology, 52:577.

Hutcheson, K.,  1970. A Test  for  Comparing  Diversities  Based on the Shannon
Formula. Jour. Theoret.  Biol.  29:151.

Jaccard,  P., 1912. The  Distribution  of Flora in an Alpine Zone.  New Phytol.,
11:37.

Johnson, M.G. and R.O. Brinkhurst, 1971.  Associations  and Species Diversity  in
Benthic Macroinvrtebrates  of Bay of  Quninte and Lake Ontario.  Jour.  Fish. Res.
Bd. Canada,  28:1683.

Kaesler,   R.L.,    et   al.,   1971.    Cluster   Analysis    of    Non-Insect
Macro-Invertebrates of the Upper Potomac River. Hydrobiologia, 37:173.

             	,  1978.  Use of  Indices  of Diversity  and Hierarchical
Diversity in Stream Surveys. In  Biological  Data in  Water Pollution Assessment;
Quantitative and  Statistical  Analyses  (K.L.  Dickson,  et  al.,  editors).  Am.
Soc. Testing  and Materials,  STP  652, Philadelphia, PA.

Kaesler, R.L.  and  J.  Cairns,  Jr.,  1972.  Cluster Analysis  of  Data  from
Limnological  Surveys  of  the  Upper  Potomac River. Am. Midland Naturalist,  88:56.

                                    VI-13

-------
Keuls, M.,  1952. The  Use of  the  "Studentized Range"  in Connection  with  an
Analysis of Variance.  Euphytica,  1:112.

Keup,  L.E.,  1966.  Stream  Biology  for  Assessing  Sewage  Treatment  Plant
Efficiency. Water and  Sewage  Works,  113:411.

Kohn, A.J., 1968. Microhabitats,  Abundance and Food of Conus on Atoll Reefs in
the Maldive and Chagos Islands. Ecology,  49:1046.

Livingston,  R.J.,   1975.  Impact   of  Kraft  Pulp-Mill  Effluents  on  Estuarine
Coastal Fishes in Apalachee Bay,  FL. Marine Biology,  32:19.

Lloyd,  M.J.,  et  al.,  1968.  On the  Calculation  of  Information-Theoretical
Measures of Diversity. Amer.  Midland Natur., 79:257.

Lloyd, M., and R.J. Ghelardi, 1964. A Table for Calculating the "Equitability"
Component of Species Diversity. Jour.  Anim. Ecol.,  33:217.

MacAuthur, R.H.,  1957.  On the Relative  Abundance  of Bird Species. Proc. Nat.
Acad. Sci. Washington, D.C. 43:293.

	, 1960. On the Relative Abundance of Species. Am. Natur., 94:25.
Margalef, R., 1951. Diversidad de Especies en las Communidades Naturales. Pub.
Inst. Biol. Apl. (Barcelona)  9:5.

    	, 1956. Information of Diversidad Especifica en las Communidades
de Organismos. Invest.  Pesq.,  3:99.

              ,  1958. Information on Theory in Ecology. English translation by
W. Hall in Yearbook  of the Society  for  General Systems Research, 3:36.

Mclntosh, R.P.,  1967. An  Index of Diversity  and  the Relation of  Certain
Concepts to Diversity. Ecology,  48:392.

Menhinick,  E.F.,  1964.  A  Comparison  of  Some  Species-Individuals  Diversity
Indices Applied to Samples of  Field  Insects. Ecology, 45:859.

Morisita,  M.,   1959.  Measuring  of  Interspecific  Association  and  Similarity
Between Communities. Memoirs Faculty  Sci.,  Kyushu Univ. Sen. E. Biol.,  3:65.

Newman,  D.,  1939.   The  Distribution  of  Range   in  Samples  from  a  Normal
Population,  Expressed  in  Terms  of  an  Independent  Estimate  of   Standard
Deviation. Biometrika, 31, 20.

Ochiai, A., 1957. Zoogeographical Studies on the Soleoid Fishes Found  in Japan
and its Neighboring  Regions -  II. Bull. Japan. Soc. Sci. Fisheries, 22:526.

Odum,  E.P.,  1959.   Fundamentals  of  Ecology,   2nd  ed.  W.B.  Sanders  Co.,
Philadelphia,  PA.

Osborne,  L.L.,  et al., 1980.  Use  of Hierarchical Diversity  Indices  in Lotic
Community Analysis.  Jour.  Appl.  Ecol.,  17:567.

                                     VI-14

-------
Pantle, R.,  and H. Buck,  1955.  Die Biologische  Uberwachund der Gewasser und
die Darstellung der Ergebnisse.  Gas und Wasserfach,  96:604.

Patten, B.C.,  1962. Species  Diversity in  Net  Phytoplankton  of  Raritan Bay.
Jour. Mar. Res., 20:57.

Peet, R.K., 1975. Relative Diversity Indices.  Ecology,  56:496.

Perkins, J.D.,  1983. Bioassay Evaluation of Diversity and Community Comparison
Indexes. Jour. Water Poll. Con.  Fed.,  55:522.

Peters,   J.A.,   1968.   A   Computer   Program   for  Calculating   Degree  of
Biogeographical Resemblence Between Areas.  Systematic Zoology,  17:64.

Pielou,    E.C.,    1969.    An    Introduction   to    Mathematical    Ecology.
Wiley-Interscience, NY, 286.

	, 1975. Ecological  Diversity. Wiley-Interscience, NY,  165.
Pinkham, C.F.A.  and  J.G.  Pearson, 1976. Applications  of  a New Coefficient of
Similarity to Pollution Surveys.  Jour.  Water Poll.  Con.  Fed.,  48:717.

Sanders, H.L.  1960.  Benthic  Studies  in Buzzards Bay III. The Structure of the
Soft-Bottom Community,  Limnology  and  Oceanography  5:138.

Shannon, C.E., and W.  Weaver,  1963.  The Mathematical Theory  of Communication.
University of Illinois  Press, Urbana, IL.

Sneath, P.M.A.  and  R.R. Sokal,  1973.  Numerical Taxonomy.  The  Principles and
Practice of Numerical Classification. Freeman, San  Francisco.

Simpson, E.H., 1949.   Measurement  of  Diversity.  Nature,  163:68.

Sokal, R.R.,  1961.  Distance  as a Measure  of Taxonomic Similarity. Systematic
Zoology, 10:70.

Sokal,  R.R.,  and C.D.  Michener,  1958.  A  Statistical  Method  for Evaluating
Systematic Relationships.  Univ. Kansas  Sci.  Bull.,  38:1409.

Sokal, R.R.  and  F.J. Rohlf,  1962.  The Comparison  of  Dendograms  by Objective
Methods. Taxon, 11:33.

Whittaker, R.H.,  1952. A  Study  of  Summer  Foliage  Insect  Communities  in the
Great Smoky Mountains.  Ecological  Monographs,  22:  6.

                   , 1964. Dominance and  Diversity in Land Plant Communities.
Science, 147:250.

Whittaker, R.H.  and  C.W.  Fairbanks,  1958.  A  Study  of Plankton  and Copepod
Communities in the Columbia Basin,  Southeastern  Washington. Ecology,  39:46.

Wiener, N., 1948. Cybernetics.  John Wiley  & Sons,  Inc.,  NY, 194 p.


                                     VI-15

-------
Wilhm, J.L., 1967. Comparison of Some Diversity Indices Applied to Populations
of  Benthic  Macroinvertebrates  in  a  Stream  Receiving  Organic Wastes.  Jour.
Water Poll.  Control.  Fed.,  39:1673.

	, 1968. Use of Biomass Units  in Shannon's Formula. Ecology, 49:153.
               ,  1970.  Range of Diversity  Index  in  Benthic Macroinvertebrate
Populations. Jour.  Water Poll.  Con. Fed.,  42:R221.

            , 1972. Graphic and Mathematical Analyses of Biotic Communities in
Polluted Streams.  Ann.  Rev.  Entomology,  17:223.

Wilhm,  J.L.  and T.C.  Dorris,  1968.  Biological  Parameters  for  Water  Quality
Criteria. Bioscience,  18:477.

Williams, W.T.,  1971.  Principles  of Clustering. Ann. Rev. Ecol. Syst., 2:303.

Winget,  R.N.  and  F.A.  Mangum,   1979.   Biotic  Condition  Index:  Integrated
Biological,  Physical,   and  Chemical  Stream Parameters  for Management.  U.S.
Forest Service Intermountain Reg.,  p. 1-51.

Zar,  J.H.»  1974.   Biostatistical  Analysis,  Prentice-Hall,  Inc.,  Englewood
Cliffs, NJ, 620 p.


CHAPTER IV-3: RECOVERY  INDEX

Cairns,  J.  Jr., 1975.  Biological  Integrity-A Quantitative  Determination.  In
U.S. EPA, The Integrity of Water (R.K.  Ballentine and L.J. Guarraia, editors).
U.S. Government  Printing Office,  Washington, D.C., 055-001-01068-1.


CHAPTER IV-4: INTOLERANT SPECIES  ANALYSIS

Ball,  J.,  1982.  Stream  Classification  Guidelines  for  Wisconsin.  Technical
Bulletin  (Draft),  Wisconsin Department  of  Natural Resources, Madison.

Brett,  J.R.,  1956. Some Principles  in the  Thermal  Requirements  of  Fishes.
Quarterly Review of Biology 31:75.

Carlander,  K.D., 1969  and  1977.  Handbook  of Freshwater Fishery Biology, Vols.
I and II, Iowa State University Press,  Ames,  Iowa.

Haines, T.A., 1981. Acidic Precipitation and Its Consequences for Aquatic Eco-
systems: A Review. Trans. Amer. Fish. Soc.,  110:  669.

Hutchinson,  G.E.,   1957.   Concluding  Remarks  in  Population  Studies:  Animal
Ecology  and Demography, Cold  Spring Harbor  Symposia  on Quantitative Biology,
22:415.

Johnson,  W.W.,  and Finley, M.T., 1980.  Handbook of Acute Toxicity of Chemicals
to  Fish  and  Aquatic  Invertebrates.  U.S. FWS,  Washington,  D.C., Resource
Publication 137.

                                     VI-16

-------
Karr,  J.R.,   1981.  Assessment   of  Biotic  Integrity   Using  Fish  Communities.
Fisheries 6:21.

Kendigh,  S.C., 1974.  Ecology  with  Special  Reference  to  Animals  and Man.
Prentice-Hall, Inc.,  Englewood Cliffs, NJ.

Lee,  D.S.,  et  al.,  1980. Atlas  of  North  American  Freshwater  Fishes. N.C.,
State Mus. Nat.  Hist,,  Raleigh,  NC.

Morrow,  J.E.,  1980.  The  Freshwater   Fishes   of  Alaska.   Alaska   Northwest
Publishing Co.,  Anchorage, AK.

Moyle,  P.B.,  1976.  Inland  Fishes  of  California.   University  of California
Press, Berkeley, CA.

Muncy,  R.J., et  al.,  1979. Effects  of Suspended  Solids  and  Sediment on
Reproduction   and   Early  Life   of  Warmwater   Fishes:  A  Review.  U.S.  EPA,
Corvallis, OR, EPA-600/3-79-042.

Pflieger,  W.L.,   1975.  The  Fishes  of  Missouri.  Missouri   Dept.   Conserv.,
Jefferson City,  MO.

Robins, C.R., et  al.,  1980.  A  List of  Common  and  Scientific Names   of  Fishes
from  the United  States  and Canada,   4th  ed., AFS Special  Publ.  No.  12,
Bethesda, MD.

Scott, W.B.,   and Grossman, E.J., 1973.  Freshwater Fishes of  Canada.  Fisheries
Research Board of  Canada,  Bull.  184.

Shelford, V.E.,  1911. Ecological Succession. Biol. Bull.  21:  127-151,  22:1.

Smith,  P.M.,  1979.  The Fishes  of  Illinois.  University  of  Illinois  Press,
Urbana, IL.

Timbol, A.S.,  and  Maciolek,  J.A.,  1978.  Stream  Channel Modification in Hawaii.
Part A: Statewide  Inventory  of  Streams,  Habitat  Factors,  and  Associated  Biota.
U.S. FWS, Columbia, MO,  FWS/OBS-78/16.

Trautman,  M.B.,  1957. The  Fishes of  Ohio.  Ohio  State  University  Press,
Columbus, OH.

U.S. EPA, 1980. Ambient Water Quality  Criteria  for Aldrin/Dieldrin, Chlordane,
DDT,  Endosulfan,   Endrin,  Heptachlor,   Lindane,  PCBs,  Toxaphene,   Cyanide,
Arsenic, Cadmium,  Chromium,  Copper,  Lead,  Mercury,  Nickel,   Selenium, Silver,
and Zinc. U.S. EPA, Washington,  D.C.,  EPA 440/5-80-

Vannote, R.L.,  et  al., 1980.  The  River Continuum Concept.  Can.  Jour. Fish.
Aquat. Sci.,  37:130.

Wallen, E.I.,  1951.  The  Direct  Effect  of Turbidity  on  Fishes. Oklahoma  A&M
College, Stillwater,  OK, Biol. Series  No. 2, 48:1.

Warren, C.E.,  1971.  Biology  and Water  Pollution Control. W.B.  Saunders Co.,
Philadelphia,  PA.
                                    VI-17

-------
CHAPTER IV-5:  OMNIVORE-CARNIVORE ANALYSIS

Cairns,  J.,  Jr.,  1977.  Quantification  of  Biological   Integrity.   In  the
Integrity  of  Water  (R.K.  Ballentine  and  L.J.   Guarraia,   editors).   U.S.
Government  Printing  Office, Washington, O.C., 055-001-01068-1.

Carlander,  K.D.,  1969.  Handbook  of Freshwater  Fishery  Biology,  Vol.  I.  Iowa
State University Press,  Ames,  IA.

 	, 1977, Handbook  of Freshwater Fishery  Biology,  Vol.  II. Iowa
State University Press,  Ames,  IA.

Cross, F.B. and J.T.  Collins, 1975. Fishes  in  Kansas  (R.F.  Johnson,  editor).
University  of  Kansas Publ., Museum  of Nat. Hist., Lawrence, KS.

Cummins,  K.W.,  1974.  Structure and Function of  Stream  Ecosystems.  BioScience
24:631.

 	,  1975.  The Ecology of  Running  Waters:  Theory  and Practice. In
Proc.  Sandusky  River  Basin Symp.   (D.B. Baker,   et  al.  editors).  International
Joint com.  on the Great  Lakes, Heidelburg College, Tiffin, OH.

Darnell,  R.M.   1961.  Trophic   Spectrum  of   an  Estuarine  Community,  Based  on
Studies of  Lake Ponchartrain,  Louisiana.  Ecology  42: 553.

Fausch,  K.D.,  et al.,  1982. Regional  Application of  an  Index  of Biotic
Integrity Based  on  Stream Fish Communities, Submission to Trans. Amer.  Fish.
Soc.

Karr,  J.R.,  1981.  Assesment of  Biotic Integrity  Using Fish  Communities.
Fisheries 6:21.

Karr,  J.R.,  et  al.,  1983. Habitat  Preservation  for  Midwest Stream  Fishes:
Principles  and Guidelines, U.S. EPA, Corvallis,  OR, EPA-600/3-83-006.

Karr,  J.R.  and  D.R. Dudley, 1978.  Biological Integrity of a Headwater Streams:
Evidence of  Degradation, Prospects for  Recovery.  In Environmental  Impact of
Land   Use   on   Water   Quality:   Final  Report   on   the  Black  Creek  Project
 (Supplemental    Comments)   (J.  Morrison,   editor),   U.S.   EPA,   Chicago,  IL,
EPA-905/9-77-007-D,  pp. 3-25.

Kendeigh,  S.C.,  1974.  Ecology with  Special  Reference  to  Animals and Man.
Prentice-Hall,  Inc., Englewood Cliffs,  NO.

Kuehne,  R.A.,   1962.   A  Classification  of  Streams,   Illustrated  by  Fish
Distribution in an Eastern Kentucky Creek. Ecology  43: 608.

Larimore, W.R.,  and P.M.  Smith, 1963. The Fishes of Champaign County,  Illinois
as Affected by  60 Years of Stream Changes.  111.  Nat. Hist. Sur. Bull. 28:299.

Lee,  D.S., et  al.,  1980.  Atlas of  North  American Freshwater Fishes. N.C. State
Mus.  Nat. Hist., Raleigh, NC.

Lindeman, R.L.,  1942. The Trophic-Dynamic Aspect  of Ecology. Ecology 23.
                                     VI-18

-------
Menzel, B.W.,  and  H.L.  Fierstine,  1976.  A  Study  of  the Effects  of Stream
Channelization and Bank Stabilization on Warmwater  Sport  Fish in Iowa. No. 5:
Effects of  Long-Reach  Stream Channelization  on  Distribution  and Abundance of
Fishes, U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service,  Columbia, MO, FWS/OBS-76-15.

Morita, C.M., 1953. Freshwater Fishing in Hawaii. Div. of Fish and Game, Dept.
Land Nat.  Res.,  Honolulu,  HI.

Morrow,  J.E.,  1980.  The  Freshwater  Fishes  of  Alaska.  Alaska  Northwest
Publishing Co.,  Anchorage,  AK.

Moyle,  P.B.,  1976.  Inland  Fishes  of  California.  University  of  California
Press, Berkeley.

Odum,  H.T.,  1957.  Trophic Structure  and  Productivity  of  Silver Springs,  FL,
Ecol. Monogr. 27:55.

Pflieger,   W.L.,  1975. The   Fishes   of  Missouri.  Missouri  Dept.  Conserv.,
Jefferson  City,  MO.

Reid,  G.K.,  and R.D.  Wood, 1976.  Ecology  of  Inland Waters and Estuaries,  2nd
Ed., D. Van Nostrand Co.,  NY.

Richardson, J.L.,  1977. Dimensions  in Ecology.  Williams  & Wilkins, Baltimore,
MD.

Robins, C.R., et  al.,  1980.   A  List  of  Common and  Scientific  Names  of Fishes
from  the  United States and  Canada,   4th ed.,  Special  Pub!.  No.  12,  American
Fisheries  Soc.,  Bethesda,  MD.

Schlosser,  I.J,  1981.  Effects  of  Perturbations by  Agricultural Land  Use on
Structure  and Function of Stream Ecosystems.  Ph.D. dissertation, University of
Illinois,  Champaign - Urbana,  IL.

          	,  1982a.  Trophic  Structure,  Reproductive Success,  and Growth
Rate  o?  Fishes  Tn  a  Natural  and  Modified  Headwater Stream.  Can.  Jour.  Fish
Aquat. Sci. 39:968.

               , 1982b. Fish  Community Structure  and Function Along Two Habitat
Gradients in aHeadwater Stream.  Ecol.  Monog.  52:  395.

Scott, W.B.,  and  E.J.  Grossman,  1973. Freshwater  Fishes  of Canada. Fisheries
Research Board of  Canada,  Bull.  184.

Shelford, V.E., 1911.  Ecological  Succession. Biol.  Bull. 21:127,  22:1.

Smith,  P.W.,   1979.  The  Fishes  of  Illinois. University  of  Illinois  Press,
Urbana, IL.

Timbol, A.S.  and  J.A.  Maciolek,  1978. Stream Channel  Modification in Hawaii.
Part A: Statewide  Inventory  of Streams,  Habitat  Factors,  and Asociated Biota.
U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service, Columbia,  MO,  FWS/OBS-78/16.


                                     VI-19

-------
Trautman,  M.B.,  1957. The  Fishes  of  Ohio.  Ohio State  University  Press,
Columbus,  OH.

U.S.  EPA,  1980.  Ambient  Water  Quality  Criteria   (several  volumes)  for
Aldrin/Dieldrin,   Chlordane,  DDT,  Encosulfan,  Endrin,  Heptachlor,  Lindane,
PCBs, Toxaphene,  Cyanide,  Arsenic,  Cadmium,  Chromium,  Copper, Lead, Mercury,
Nickel,  Selenium,  Silver,  and Zinc. U.S. EPA, Washington,  D.C., EPA  440/5-80.

Wallen,  E.I.,  1951.  The  Direct  Effect  of Turbidity on  Fishes.  Oklahoma A&M
College, Stillwater,  OK, Biol. Series No. 2, 48:1.

Warren,  C.E.,  1971. Biology  and Water  Pollution Control. W.B.  Saunders,
Philadelphia,  PA.


CHAPTER  IV-6:  REFERENCE  REACH COMPARISON

Bailey,  R.G.,  1976.  Ecoregions of the United  States. U.S.D.A.-Forest Service.
Intermtn.  Reg. Ogden, UT.

Barbour, C.D. and J.H. Brown, 1974.  Fish  Species  Diversity in Lakes. Am. Nat.
108:473.

Federal  Register, 1982. Proposed Water  Quality Standards and  Public  Meetings.
47(210):49234.

Gilbert,  C.R.,   1980.   Zoogeographic   Factors  in  Relation  to  Biological
Monitoring of  Fish.  In Biological  Monitoring  of Fish  (C.H.  Hocutt  and J.R.
Stauffer,  Jr., editors). D.C. Hath Co., Lexington, MA,  p.  309-355.

Green,  R.H.,  1979.  Sampling  Design  and  Sampling  Methods  for Environmental
Biologists.  John Wiley  and Sons,  NY.

Hall,  J.D.,  et   al.,  1978. An  Improved Design  for  Assessing   Impacts  of
Watershed Practices  on  Small Streams. Verh. Interna. Verein. Limnol.  20:1359.

Hughes,  R.M.,  Effects of Mining  Wastes  on  Two  Stream Ecosystems: Demonstration
of an Approach for Estimating Ecological Integrity and Attainable Uses.

Hughes,  R.M.,  et  al.,  1982.  An  Approach  for  Determining Biological  Integrity
in  Flowing  Waters.   In  Place Resource  Inventories:  Principles  and  Practices
(T .8. Brann,  L.O.  House   IV,  and H.G. Lund,  editors).  Soc.  Am.   Foresters,
Bethesda,  MD.

Hughes,  R.M.  and  J.M. Qmernik,   1981a.  Use  and Misuse  of the Terms  Watershed
and  Stream Order. In The  Warmwater Streams  (L.A,  Krumholz, editor).  Symposium
Am. Fish.  Soc., Bethesda,  MD.

	,  1981b. A Proposed  Approach to Determine
Regional  Patterns  i"n  Aquatic  Ecosystems.  In  Acquisition  and Utilization  of
Aquatic  Habitat   Inventory  Information  (N.B.   Armantrout,  editor).  Am.  Fish.
Soc., Bethesda, MD.


                                     VI-20

-------
 	, 1983. An Alternative for  Characterizing Stream
Size.In  Dynamics of  Lotic Ecosystems  (T.D.  Fontain  III  and  S.M. Bartell,
editors).  Ann Arbor Science, Ann Arbor, MI.

Karr,  J.R.,   1981.  Assesment  of  Biotic  Integrity Using  Fish  Communties.
Fisheries  6:21.

Lotspeich,   F.B.   and   W.S.   Platts,   1982.   An   Integrated   Land-Aquatic
Classification System.  N. Amer. J. Fish. Mgmt. 2:138.

MacArthur, R.H.  and  E.O.  Wilson,  1967.  The Theory of  Island  Biogeography,
Princeton  Univ.  Press.,  Princeton, NJ.

Marsh,  P.C.  and  J.E.  Luey,  1982.  Oases  for  Aquatic Life in Agricultural
Watersheds. Fisheries 7:16.

Omernik,  J.M.  and  R.M. Hughes, 1983.  An  Approach for  Defining  Regional
Patterns of Aquatic  Ecosystems and Attainable Stream Quality in Ohio. Progress
Report. U.S.  EPA,  Corvallis, OR.

Pfleiger,  W.L.,  M.A.  Schene, Jr.,  and P.S. Haverland. 1981.  Techniques for the
Classification  of Stream  Habitats  With  Examples of Their  Application in
Defining the  Stream  Habitats  of  Missouri.  In  Acquisition  and  Utilization of
Aquatic Habitat  Inventory   Information  (N.B. Armantrout, editor).  Am.  Fish.
Soc., Bethesda,  MD.

Strahler,  A.N.,  1957. Quantitative Analysis of  Watershed  Geomorphology. Trans.
Am. Geophys.  Union 38:913.

Trautman,  M.G.,  1981. The Fishes of Ohio. Ohio State Univ. Press.

U.S.D.I.-Geological  Survey,  1970.  The National  Atlas of  the United States of
America. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.

Vannote, R.L., et  al.s  1980. The  River Continuum  Concept.  Can. J. Fish. Aquat.
Sci. 37:130.

Warren,  C.E.,  1979.  Toward  Classification  and   Rationale  for   Watershed
Management and Stream Protection. EPA-600/3-79-059. NTIS Springfield,  VA.
                                    VI-21

-------
         " APPENDIX A-l:

SAMPLE HABITAT SUITABILITY INDEX
        (Channel  Catfish)

-------
Biological Services Program
FWS/OBS-82/10.2
FEBRUARY 1982
HABITAT SUITABILITY INDEX MODELS:
CHANNEL CATFISH
Fish and Wildlife Service
U.S. Department of the Interior

-------
                                                 FWS/OBS-82/10.2
                                                 February 1982
HABITAT SUITABILITY INDEX MODELS:  CHANNEL CATFISH
                        by
                 Thomas E.  McMahon
                        and
                 James W.  Terrell
        Habitat Evaluation Procedures Group
         Western Energy and Land Use Team
          U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service
           Drake Creekside Building One
                 2625 Redwing Road
           Fort Collins, Colorado  80526
          Western Energy and Land Use Team
            Office of Biological Services
              Fish and Wildlife Service
           U.S.  Department of the Interior
               Washington, D.C.  20240

-------
                                    PREFACE
     The habitat use  information  and  Habitat Suitability Index (HSI)  models
presented in this document  are  an aid  for  impact  assessment and habitat  man-
agement activities.   Literature  concerning  a  species'  habitat  requirements  and
preferences is reviewed and then synthesized  into  HSI  models,  which are scaled
to produce an  index  between  0  (unsuitable  habitat) and  1 (optimal  habitat).
Assumptions used to transform habitat use information  into these mathematical
models are noted, and guidelines  for model application  are described.   Any
models found in the literature which may also be used  to calculate an HSI are
cited, and simplified HSI models,  based on  what the authors  believe to be the
most important habitat characteristics for this species,  are presented.

     Use of  the  models presented  in this  publication for  impact  assessment
requires the setting of clear study objectives and may require modification of
the models  to  meet  those objectives.  Methods for reducing model  complexity
and recommended  measurement  techniques  for model  variables are presented  in
Appendix A.

     The HSI models presented herein are complex hypotheses of species-habitat
relationships,  not   statements  of  proven  cause  and  effect  relationships.
Results  of  model performance tests, when  available,  are referenced;  however,
models  tnat  have demonstrated reliability  in  specific  situations may prove
unreliable  in others.   For  this  reason, the  FWS  encourages  model  users to
convey  comments  and suggestions that may  help  us increase the  utility  and
effectiveness  of this habitat-based approach to  fish and  wildlife planning.
Please send comments to:
      Habitat Evaluation Procedures Group
      Western Energy and Land Use Team
      U.S.  Fish and Wildlife Service
      2625  Redwing Road
      Ft. Collins, CO  80526

-------
                                   CONTENTS

                                                                           Page

PREFACE 	:	     iii
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS 	      vi

HABITAT USE INFORMATION	        I
      General 	        1
      Age, Growth, and Food  	        1
      Reproduction 	        1
      Specific Habitat Requirements  	        1
HABITAT SUITABILITY INDEX (HSI) MODELS  	        4
      Model Applicability 	   •     4
      Model Description - Riverine  	        5
      Model Description - Lacustrine  	        8
      Suitability  Index (SI) Graphs  for
        Model Variables  	,	        9
      Riverine Model  	       15
      Lacustrine Model  	       17
      Interpreting Model  Outputs  	       22
ADDITIONAL HABITAT MODELS 	       24
      Model  1	       24
      Model  2  	       25
      Model  3  	       25

 REFERENCES CITED 	       25

-------
                     CHANNEL CATFISH (Ictalurus punctatus)


HABITAT USE INFORMATION

General

     The native range of  channel  catfish (lc^J_u_rus punctatus) extends  from
the  southern  portions of  the  Canadian  prairie provinces south to  the  Gulf
states, west  to the  Rocky Mountains,  and east to  the  Appalachian  Mountains
(Trautman  1957; Miller 1966; Scott and Crossman 1973).   They have  been widely
introcuced outside this  range and occur in essentially  all  of the  Pacific and
Atlantic drainages in the 48 contiguous states (Moore 1968;  Scott  and Crossman
1973). The greatest abundance of channel catfish generally occurs  in the open
(unleveed) floodplains of the Mississippi and Missouri  River drainages (Walden
1964).

Age, Growth,  and Food

     Age at  maturity in  channel catfish  is  variable.   Catfish  from southern
areas  with longer  growing seasons mature earlier  and  at smaller  sizes than
those  from northern  areas (Davis and Posey  1958;  Scott and Crossman 1973).
Southern catfish  mature  at age V or  less (Scott and Crossman 1973; Pflieger
1975)  while  northern  catfish mature at age VI  or greater for males and at age
VIII or greater for females (Starostka and Nelson 1974).

      Young-of-the-year  (age 0)  catfish  feed  predominantly  on  plankton  and
aquatic  insects (Bailey and  Harrison  1948;  Walburg 1975).   Adults are oppor-
tunistic  feeders  with an extremely  varied  diet,  including  terrestrial  and
aquatic  insects, detrital  and  plant  material, crayfish, and molluscs (Bailey
and Harrison 1948; Miller  1966;  Starostka and Nelson  1974).  Fish may form a
major part of the diet of catfish  > 50 cm in length  (Starostka and Nelson
1974).   Channel  catfish  diets  in rivers  and  reservoirs do  not appear to be
significantly different  (see Bailey  and  Harrison  1948; Starostka  and Nelson
1974).   Feeding is done by both vision and chemosenses  (Davis 1959)  and occurs
primarily  at night (Pflieger 1975).   Bottom  feeding  is  more characteristic but
food 's also taken   throughout the  water column (Scott and Crossman  1973).
Additional information on the composition  of adult  and  juvenile diets is
provided in  Leidy and Jenkins (1977).

 Reproduction

      Channel catfish spawn in late  spring and early summer  (generally late May
 through mid-July)  when  temperatures  reach about  21° C  (Clemens  and Sneed 1957;
Marzolf 1957;  Pflieger  1975).  Spawning  requirements  appear to be  a  major
 factor in determining habitat  suitability  for channel  catfish (Clemens and
 Sneed 1957).  Spawning  is greatly  inhibited if  suitable  nesting cover is
 unavailable (Marzolf 1957).

 Specific Habitat  Requirements

      Channel catfish populations occur  over a broad  range  of  environmental
 conditions (Sigler and  Miller 1963;  Scott and Crossman 1973). Optimum riverine

-------
habitat is characterized  by warm temperatures (Clemens and Sneed 1957; Andrews
et al.  1972;  Biesinger  et al.  1979). and a diversity of velocities, depths,  and
structural features that provide cover and  food  (Bailey and Harrison 1948).
Optimum lacustrine habitat  is  characterized  by large surface  area, warm temper-
atures, high  productivity,  low to moderate  turbidity,  and  abundant  cover
(Davis 1959;  Pflieger 1975).

     Fry,  juvenile, and  adult channel catfish  concentrate   in  the  warmest
sections of rivers and  reservoirs  (Ziebell 1973;  Stauffer et  al . 1975; McCall
1977).   They strongly  seek cover,  but  quantitative data  on cover requirements
of channel catfish in  rivers  and reservoirs  are not available.  Debris,  logs,
cavities,  boulders, and  cutbanks  in  lakes and  in low velocity  (< 15 cm/sec)
areas of deep pools and  backwaters of rivers will  provide  cover for channel
catfish (Bailey and Harrison  1948).   Cover  consisting of boulders and debris
in deep water is important as overwintering  habitat (Miller  1966; Jester 1971;
Cross  and Collins 1975).  Deep pools  and  littoral  areas (£ 5- m deep)  with
> 40%  suitable  cover are assumed  to  be  optimum.   Turbidities > 25 ppm  but
< 100  ppm may somewhat  moderate the need for  fixed cover (Bryan et al. 1975).

     Riffle  and run areas  with rubble substrate and pools  (<  15 cm/sec) and
areas  with debris and aquatic vegetation  are conditions associated with high
production  of aquatic  insects  (Hynes  1970) consumed by channel catfish ir,
rivers (Bailey and Harrison 1948).  Channel  catfish are  most abundant  in river
sections  with a diversity of velocities and  structural  features. Therefore, it
is  assumed  that a riverine habitat with 40-60%  pools would be optimum  for
providing riffle  habitat for food production and feeding and pool  habitat for
spawning  and resting  cover (Bailey and Harrison 1948).  It  also  is  assumed
that  at least 20% of lake or reservoir surface  area should consist  of littoral
areas  (<  5  m deep) to  provide adequate area for  spawning,  fry and juvenile
rearing,  and feeding habitat  for channel catfish.

      High standing crops  of  warmwater  fishes  are  associated  with total
dissolved solids  (TDS) levels  of  100  to  350 ppm for reservoirs in which the
concentrations  of  carbonate-bicarbonate  exceed those  of  sulfate-chloride
(Jenkins  1976).   It is assumed that high standing crops  of channel  catfish  in
 lakes  or  reservoirs will, on  the average,  correspond to this TDS level.

      Turbidity  in rivers and -reservoirs and reservoir  size  are other factors
 that   may  influence  habitat  suitability  for  channel   catfish  populations.
Channel catfish are abundant  in  rivers and reservoirs  with  varying levels  of
 turbidity and siltation (Cross and Collins  1975).  However,  low  to  moderate
 turbidities (< 100 ppm) are  probably optimal  for both survival  and growth
 (Finnell  and Jenkins  1954;  Buck  1956;  Marzolf  1957).  Larger  reservoirs
 (>  200 ha)  are probably more  suitable reservoir habitat  for channel  catfish
 populations because  survival  and  growth are better than in  smaller reservoirs
 (Finnell  and Jenkins  1954;  Marzolf  1957).  Other  factors   that may  affect
 reservoir habitat suitability  for  channel  catfish are mean  depth,  storage
 ratio  (SR), and  length  of  agricultural  growing  season. Jenkins (1974)  found
 that high mean  depths  were negatively correlated with standing  crop of  channel
 catfish.  Mean depths  are an  inverse correlate of shoreline  development  (Ryder
 et  al. 1974),  thus higher  mean  depths  may  mean less littoral  area  would  be
 available.   Jenkins (1976)  also  reported   that  standing  crops of  catfishes
 (Ictaluridae) peaked  at  an SR of  0.75.  Standing crops  of channel catfish  were

-------
postively correlated to growing  season  length (Jenkins 1970).  However,  harvest
of channel catfish  reported  in  reservoirs  was  not  correlated with  growing
season length (Jenkins and Morais 1971-).

     Dissolved oxygen  (DO)  levels of  5  mg/1  are adequate  for growth  and
survival  of channel  catfish,  but D.O.  levels  of >  7  mg/1  are optimum (Andrews
et al, 1973;  Carlson et  al.  1974).   Dissolved  oxygen levels < 3 mg/1  retard
growth (Simco and Cross 1966),  and feeding  is reduced at  D.O.  levels <  5 mg/1
(Randolph and Clemens 1976).

     Adjjj_t.  Adults  in  rivers are found in  large,  deep pools  with cover.  They
move to riffles and runs at night to  feed (McCammon  1956;  Davis 1959;  Pflieger
1971; 1975).  Adults  in  reservoirs and  lakes  favor  reefs  and deep,  protected
areas with rocky substrates or  other  cover.   They  often move to the  shoreline
or tributaries at  night  to feed (Davis 1959; Jester 1971; Scott and Grossman
1973).

     The  optimal temperature range for growth  of adult  channel catfish is
26-29c C  (Shrable et  al.  1969;  Chen  1976j.  Growth  is poor at temperatures
< 21° C  (McCammon  and LaFaunce  1961;  Mack!in  and  Soule 1964; Andrews and
Stickrey  1972) and  ceases at < 18° C (Starostka  and  Nelson 1974).   An upper
lethal temperature  of  33.5°  C  has been  reported  for catfish  acclimated at
25°  C (Carlander 1969).

      Adult  channel  catfish were  most  abundant  in  habitats with salinities
< 1.7 ppt in  Louisiana, although  they occurred in areas with salinities up to
11.4 ppt  (Perry  1973).  Salinities < 8 ppt are tolerated with little  or no
effect,  but  growth slows above  this level and does not  occur at salinities
> 11 ppt  (Perry and Avault 1968).

      Embryo.  Dark and secluded areas are required for nesting (Marzolf 1957).
Males build  and  guard  nests  in  cavities, burrows,  under  rocks, and in other
protected sites  (Davis  1959;  Pflieger  1975).   Nests  in large impoundments
generally occur  among  rubble and  boulders along protected shorelines at  depths
of  about  2-4 m (Jester  1971).  Catfish in large rivers are likely to move into
shallow,  flooded areas  to spawn  (Bryan et  al.  1975).  Lawler (1960) reported
that spawning in Utah Lake, Utah, was  concentrated in sections of the lake
with abundant spawning  sites of  rocky outcrops, trees, and  crevices.  The male
catfish  fans embryos for water  exchange  and  guards the  nest  from  predators
 (Miller  1966; Minckley 1973).  Embryos can develop  in the temperature range of
 15.5 to   29.5° C, with the optimum about 27° C (Brown 1942;  Clemens and  Sneed
 1957).  They do  not  develop  at  temperatures  < 15.5° C (Brown  1942).   Embryos
 hatch in  6-7 days at 27°  C (Clemens and Sneed  1957).

      Laboratory  studies  indicate that embryos three days old and  older can
 tolerate  salinities up to 16 ppt until hatching,  when  tolerance drops  to 8 ppt
 (Alien  and  Avault  1970).  However,  2 ppt salinity is  the  highest  level  in
which successful spawning in ponds  has  been observed (Perry  1973).   Embryo
 survival  and production  in reservoirs  will probably be high in areas  that are
 not subject  to disturbance by heavy wave action or rapid water drawdown.

      F_ry.  The optimal  temperature range  for growth of channel catfish  fry is
 29-30°  C (West  1966).  Some growth  does  occur  down to temperatures of 18°  C
 (Starcstka and Nelson 1974), but growth  generally is poor in cool waters with
 average   summer  temperatures < 21° C '(McCammon and  LaFaunce 1961;  MaclOin and

-------
Soule 1964;  Andrews et al.  1972)  and  in  areas  with  short  agricultural  growing
seasons (Starostka and Nelson 1974).  Upper  incipient  lethal levels for  fry
are about 35-38° C, depending  on  acclimation  temperature  (Moss and Scott  1961;
Allen  and  Strawn  1968).  Optimum  salinities  for  fry  range  from  0-5  ppt;
salinities £ 10  ppt  are  marginal as  growth  is greatly  reduced  (Allen  and
Avault 1970).

     Fry habitat  suitability  in  reservoirs  is  related to  flushing  rate  of
reservoirs in midsummer.  Walburg (1971)  found abundance  and  survival  of  fry
greatly decreased at  flushing rates  <  6 days in July and  August.

     Channel catfish  fry have strong shelter-seeking tendencies (Brown et al.
1970), and cover availability  will  be important in determining  habitat suit-
ability. Newly hatched fry  remain in  the nest for  7-8 days (Marzolf 1957)  and
then disperse to shallow water areas  with cover (Cross  and Collins 1975).   Fry
are  commonly found aggregated near cover in protected,  slow-flowing (velocity
<  15 cm/sec) areas of rocky  riffles, debris-covered gravel,  or  sand  bars in
clear  streams  (Davis  1959; Cross  and  Collins  1975),  and  in very  shallow
(< 0.5 m) mud or sand  substrate edges of flowing channels along turbid rivers
and  bayous  (Bryan  et al.  1975).   Dense aquatic vegetation generally does not
provide optimum  cover  because predation on fry by  centrarchids  is high under
these  conditions,  especially  in  clear water (Marzolf 1957; Cross and  Collins
1975).   Fry  overwinter under  boulders in riffles  (Miller  1966)  or  move  to
cover  in deeper water (Cross and Collins 1975).

     Juvenile.  Optimal habitat for juveniles is assumed  to be similar to that
for  fry.  The temperature range most suitable for juvenile growth 1s reported
to be  28-30° C  (Andrews et al. 1972; Andrews and Stickney 1972).  Upper lethal
temperatures are assumed to be similar to those for  fry.


HABITAT SUITABILITY  INDEX (HSI) MODELS

Model  Applicability

      Geographic area.  The model is  applicable throughout the 48  conterminous
States.   The  standard of  comparison for each  individual  variable suitability
index  is  the  optimum value of the  variable that occurs anywhere within the  48
conterminous  States.  Therefore, the model will never provide  an HSI of  1.0
when applied  to water bodies  in  the  Northern  States  where temperature-related
variables  do not  reach the optimum  values  for channel catfish  found  in  the
Southern States.

      Season.  The model provides  a  rating  for  a  water body based on its ability
 to support  a self-sustaining  population of channel  catfish  through all seasons
 of the year.

      Cover  types.  The model  is applicable  in  riverine, lacustrine, palustrine,
 and estuarine habitats, as described by  Cowardin et al.  (1979).

      Minimum habitat area.   Minimum habitat  area  is defined as  the  minimum
 area of contiguous suitable  habitat  that is  required for  a  species to succes-
 fully live and  reproduce.  No attempt  has  been made to establish a minimum

-------
habitat size for channel catfish,  although  this  species is most abundant  in
larger water bodies.

     V.e_ni.t!c/tJ'°.lJ_eye-!-   The acceptable output of  these  models is an  index
between 0 and  1  which  the authors believe  has a  positive  relationship to
carrying capacity.  In order  to  verify  that the  model  output  was acceptable,
sample data  sets were developed for calculating  HSI's from the models..

                                                            verification are
                                                                " s.
     The sample data  sets  and  their relationship to model  verif
discussed in greater detail following the presentation of the model

Model Description

     It is assumed that channel catfish habitat quality is based primarily on
their food,  cover, water  quality,  and reproduction requirements.  Variables
that have been shown  to have an impact on the growth,  survival,  distribution,
abundance, or other measure of well-being of channel  catfish are placed in the
appropriate  component  and a  component  rating derived  from the  individual
variable suitability  he important for rating

the food  component because if  cover is  available,  fish would be more  likely  to
occupy  an area and utilize the  food  resources.   Substrate (V*)  is  included

because stream production potential  of  aquatic  insects  (consumed directly by
both cnannel catfish  and  their prey species)  is'related  to  amount and type of
 substrate.

      Cover component.   Percent pools (Vj)  is included  because  channel  catfish

 utilize pools as  cover.   Percent  cover (V2) is  an  Index of  all types  of

 objects,  Including logs and debris, used for cover in  rivers.  Average  current
 velocity in cover areas  (Vi,) is  important because the  usable  habitat  near  a

 cover object decreases  if cover objects are  surrounded by high velocities.

      Water quality component.   The  water   quality  component  is   limited  to
 temperature, oxygen,  turbidity, and  salinity measurements. These parameters
 have been  shown  to effect growth  or  survival,  or  have  been  correlated with
 changes  in  standing  crop.  Variables  related  to temperature,  oxygen, and
 salinity are  assumed  to  be limiting when they approach lethal levels.   Toxic
 substances are not considered.

-------
Habitat Variables
% cover (V2)
Substrate type (V\)
                                                Life  Requisites
                                                Food  (CF),
% pools
% cover (V2)
Average current velocity (Vlt)
                                                Cover  (Cc).
Temperature (adult) (Vs)
Temperature (fry) (V12)
Temperature (juvenile)
Dissolved oxygen (V,)
Turbidity (V7)
Salinity (adult) (V9)
Salinity (fry, juvenile)
                                         /
Length of agricultural growing season (Vt)
                                                Water quality
% pools
% cover (Va)
Dissolved oxygen (V,)
Temperature (embryo) (V10)
Salinity (embryo) (V
                                                Reproduction (CR)'
     Figure  1.  Tree diagram illustrating relationship of habitat variables
     and  life requisites in the riverine model for the channel catfish.
     Dashed  lines indicate optional variables in the model.

-------
Habitat Variables
                                         Life Requisites
% cover (V2)
% littoral area (V3) -
Total dissolved solids (Vj6)
                                               Food (CF),
% cover (Va)
  littoral area (V,)
                                               Cover (Cc),
Temperature (adult) (Vs)
Temperature (fry) (V12)
Temperature (juvenile) (Vifc)
Dissolved oxygen (Vt)
Turbidity (V,)
Salinity (adult) (V,)
Salinity (fry, juvenile) (V13)
Length  of agricultural growing season (Vt)
                                               Water  quality  (CWQ)
% cover (V,)

Dissolved oxygen (V,)	
Temperature (embryo) (Vi0)
Salinity (embryo)
                                                Reproduction (CR)'
Storage ratio (V1S)
Flushing rate (Vi7)
                                                Other  (CQT)
     Figure 2.  Tree diagram illustrating relationship of habitat variables
     and  life requisites in the lacustrine model for the channel catfish.
     Dashed lines indicate optional variables in the model.

-------
     Reproduction  component.  Percent pools (Vj) is in the reproductive compo-
nent because channel catfish spawn  in  low  velocity areas  in  rivers.   Percent
cover (V2)  is  in  this  component  since channel catfish  require  cover  for
spawning.   If minimum dissolved oxygen  (DO) levels within pools and backwaters
during midsummer (V,) are adequate,  they should be adequate  during  spawning,
which occurs earlier  in the year.   Db levels  measured during spawning  and
embryo development  could  be substituted for V,.  Two  additional  variables,
average water  temperatures  within pools and backwaters during  spawning and
embryo development  (V10)  and maximum  salinity  during  spawning  and embryo
development (VM) are included' because these water quality  conditions affect
embryo survival and  development.
Mode_1_ Description - Lacustrine
      Food component.  Percent cover (V2) is included  since it is assumed that
if  cover is available, channel  catfish would  be more  likely  to utilize an area
for feeding.   Percent littoral area  (Vj)  is  included because  littoral  areas
generally produce the greatest  amount of food and  feeding  habitat for catfish.
Total  dissolved  solids  (TDS) (Vn) is included because adult channel catfish
eat fish, and fish production in lakes and reservoirs is correlated with TDS.
      Cover  component.   Percent cover  (V2)  is  included  since channel  catfish
strongly  seek  structural  features of  logs, debris, brush,  and other objects
for shelter.   Percent  littoral  area (V3)  is included  because  all life  stage
predominantly  utilize cover found  in littoral  areas of a lake.
      Water  quality  component.  Refer to riverine model description.
      Reproduction  component.  Percent  cover  (V2) is  included  since catfish
build nests in dark and secluded areas; spawning  is  not observed if suitable
cover is unavailable.   Percent  littoral area (V,) is  included since catfish
 spawning  is concentrated  along  the shoreline.  DO (V,), temperature  (Vxo)  and
 salinity  (Vn) are included because  these  water quality  parameters affect
 embryo survival and development.
      Other component.   For  reservoirs,  storage ratio (V1S) and maximum flushing
 rate when fry  are present  (V17) are  included in this component  because  storage
 ratio may affect  standing  crop  and the flushing of fry from  a  reservoir outlet
 can reduce  the abundance of fry.

-------
Suitability Index (SI) Graphs for Model  Variables
     This  section  contains suitability  index  graphs for  the  18 variables
described above,  and equations for combining selected variables into a species
HS! using the component approach.   Variables pertain  to a riverine (R) habitat,
lacustrine (L)  habitat, or both (R, L).
Habitat   Variable

   R        (VJ
Percent pools during
average summer flow.
                                    Suitability Graph
  R,L       (V2)      Percent cover (logs,
                      boulders, cavities,
                      brush, debris, or
                      standing timber) during
                      summer within pools,
                      backwater areas, and
                      littoral areas.
                          X
                          01
                                               00
                             0.4-

                             0.2-
                                                   0.0
                                                           10   20   30   40   50

-------
(V3)      Percent littoral  area
          during summer.
                                      1.0
                                      0.0
                                                 25     50     75    100
(V,,)      Food production potential
          in river by substrate type
          present during average
          summer flow.

          A)  Rubble dominant in
              riffle-runs with some
              gravel and/or boulders
              present;  fines (silt
              and sand) not common
              aquatic vegetation
              abundant (> 30%) in
              pool areas.
          B)  Rubble, gravel,
              boulders, and fines
              occur in nearly equal
              amounts in riffle-run
              areas; aquatic vegeta-
              tion is 10-30% in
              pool areas.
          C)  Some rubble and gravel
              present,  but fines or
              boulders are dominant;
              aquatic vegetation is
              scarce (< 10%) in pool
              areas.
          D)  Fines or bedrock are
              the dominant bottom
              material.  Little or
              no aquatic vegetation
              or rubble present.
                                       1.0
                                    X
                                    OJ
                                    TD
                                    C
                                    00
0.8 -

0.6 .
                                       0.4  -
                                       0.2  -

                                       0.0
                                                    B      C
                                                      Class
                           10

-------
R,L       (V,)      Average midsummer water
                    temperature within
                    pools, backwaters, or
                    littoral areas (Adult).
   1.0


I  0.8


$ 0.6
                                              
                                              •r—
                                              3
                                                 0.2 -

                                                 0.0
                                                     10
               20      30

                   °C
40
 R,L        (Vt)       Length  of  agricultural
                     growing season   (frost-
                     free days).

                     Note:   This  variable
                     is optional.
   1.0

I 0.8
»—i

£ 0.6
                                               •u
                                               3
    0.4

    0.2


    0.0
                                                                 125
                                                                 Days
                               250
 R,L       (V7)      Maximum monthly average
                     turbidity during summer.
                                                  0.0
                                                      100
                                       11

-------
R,L
(V.)
R,L
(V.)
Average minimum dissolved
oxygen levels within
pools, backwaters, or
littoral  areas during
midsummer.
                            1.0
Maximum salinity
during summer
(Adult).
                                            00
                                                0.8 -
                                                0.6 -
                                             3  0.2 J
                                                0.0
                             1.0
                                             I   0.8 -J
                                             c
                                             $   0.6 .,
                                             •t~


                                             1   0.4
                                             •M
                                             •I™
                                             ^   0.2 „


                                                 0.0
                                                                 4     6
                                                                mg/1
                                                                     10
                                                                  ppt
 R,L        (V10)     Average water
                    temperatures within
                    pools, backwaters,
                    and  littoral areas
                    during spawning  and
                    embryo development
                    (Embryo).
                                              •o
                                       1.0

                                       0.8 .

                                       0.6 -

                                       0.4 4


                                       0.2 H

                                       0.0
                                                     10
                                                       20
                                                       °C
                                      12

-------
R,L
                   Maximum  salinity
                   auring spawning
                   and embryo development
                   (Embryo).
1.0
                                                0.0
                                                                10
                                                                ppt
                                                                            20
R,L       (Viz)     Average midsummer water
                    temperature within pools, x
                    backwaters, or littoral  ^  Q.8 -
                    areas (Fry).
                                             oo
                                                                            40
 R.,L
                    Maximum salinity
                    during summer
                    (Fry, Juvenile).
                                                     5    6    78    9    10
                                                                ppt
                                      13

-------
/Wf«j'ji: ifii'J-,umnn:r  w.jtL
temperature within
pools, backwaters, or
littoral areas
(Juvenile).
X
o>
•?  0.8J
>»
£ 0.6 -
•r-
3 0.4 -

" 0.2 _


   0.0
                                  10       20       30      40
                                                °C
Storage  ratio.
 Monthly average  IDS
 (total dissolved
 solids) during
 summer.
                                                          1000
                   14

-------
           (VJ7)     Maximum reservoir
                     flushing rate while
                     fry present (Fry).
           (V,,)
Riverine Model
Average current velocity
in cover areas during
average summer flow.
                                              X
                                              01
                                              T3
                                              C
1.0

0.8

0.6

0.4

0.2

0.0
                                 10     20     30    40
                                           cm/ sec
                                                                              50
     These equations utilize the life requisite approach and consist  of  four
components:  food, cover, water quality, and  reproduction.


     Food (Cp).
          CF =
               V2 + V.
                                       15

-------
Cover (Cc).

     Cc = (Vx x V2 x V,,)173


Water Qua! ity (C./n).
     CWQ
           2(V6 * V12 + Vlh)
           --  	3	 + V7  + 2(V.)  +  V,  *  V13
     If Vs, V12, V,,, V,, V,,  or VM  is < 0.4,  then  CWQ equals  the lowest
     of the following:  Vs,  V12, Vllt,  V,,  V,,  Vj,,  or the  above equation.

     Note:  If temperature data are  unavailable,  2(V6) (length of agricul-
     tural growing  season) may be substituted  for the term
          2(V5 + V12 + V.J
          	i	in the above equation
Reproduction (CR).

      CR = (V, x V,1 x V,2 x V1CJ x Vxl)1/8

      If V,, Vjo, or.Vu is < 0.4, then CR equals the lowest of the
      following:  Mt , V10, Vu, or the above equation.

HSI  determination .

                               21/6
HSI = (CF x Cc x CWQ2  x CR2)     ,  or
                       WQ

      If  Cwo  or  CR  is < 0.4, then the HSI equals the lowest of the
    , following:   CWQ,  CR,  or the above equation.
                                   16

-------
     Sources of data  and assumptions made  in developing the suitability  Indices
are presented in Table  1.

     Sample data sets using  riverine HSI model are listed  in Table  2.


Lacustrine Model

     This model utilizes the life  requisite approach and consists of five
components:  food,  cover,  water  quality, reproduction, and other.


     Food (CF).


               V, + V,  + V14

          CF = 	3	
     Cover (C-).



          Cc = (V, x V,)1/2
     Water Quality (CWQ).


          C   * same as in  Riverine HSI  Model
     Reproduction (CR).



          CR = (V x V, x V,2 x V102 x VM)1/8


          If V,, V,,, or V,, is < 0.4, then CR equals  the  lowest  of the

          following:  Vlt V,,, Vn, or the above equation.
     Other (CQT).
                      V17
                                       17

-------
Table 1.   Data sources and  assumptions  for  channel catfish suitability  indices.
   Variable and source
          Assumption
Vs    Bailey and Harrison 1948
      Bailey and Harrison 1948
      Marzolf 1957
      Cross and Collins 1975
      Bailey and Harrison 1948
      Marzolf 1957
      Cross and Collins 1975
 Vk     Bailey  and Harrison 1948
 Vj     Clemens  and  Sneed  1957
       West  1966
       Shrable  et al.  1969
       Starostka and Nelson  1974
       Biesinger et al.  1979

 V,     Jenkins  1970
 V7    Finnell  and Jenkins  1954
       Buck 1956
       Marzolf  1957

 V,    Moss and Scott 1961
       Andrews  et al.  1973
       Carlson  et al.  1974
       Randolph and Clemens 1976

 V,    Perry and Avault 1968
       Perry 1973
Optimum conditions for a diversity of
velocities, depths, and structural
features for channel catfish will be
found when there are approximately equal
amounts of pools and riffles.

The strong preference of all life stages
of channel catfish for cover indicates
that some cover must be present for
optimum conditions to occur.

Lakes with small littoral area will  pro-
vide less area for cover and food pro-
duction for channel catfish and are  there-
fore less  suitable.

The amount and type of substrate  or  the
amount  of  aquatic  vegetation associated
with high  production of aquatic  insects
(used  as  food by channel catfish  and
channel catfish prey species)  is  optimum.

Temperatures at the warmest  time  of  year
must reach  levels  that permit  growth in
order  for habitat  to be suitable.  Optimum
temperatures are  those when  maximum  growth
occurs.

Growing seasons that are correlated  with
 high  standing crops are optimum.

 High  turbidity  levels  are  associated with
 reduced standing  crops  and therefore are
 less  suitable.

 Lethal levels of  dissolved oxygen are
 unsuitable.   DO levels  that reduce feeding
 are suboptimal.
 Salinity levels where adults are most
 abundant are optimum.  Any salinity
 level at which adults have been
 reported has some suitabilty.
                                        18

-------
                             Table  1.   (concluded)
   Variable and source
                                           Assumption
Vlo   Brown 1942
      Clemens and Sneed 1957
      Perry and Avault 1968
      Perry 1973
 '12
 V,:
 v,,
  'It
McCammon and LaFaunce 1961
Moss and Scott 1961
Macklin and Soule 1964
West 1966
Allen and Strawn 1968
Andrews 1972
Starostka and Nelson 1974

Allen and Avault 1970
Andrews et al. 1972
Andrews and Stickney  1972
       Jenkins 1976
 V,,   Jenkins 1976
 V17   Walburg 1971
 Miller 1966
 Scott and Grossman 1973
 Cross and Collins 1975
Optimum temperatures are those which
result in optimum growth.  Temperatures
that result in death or no growth are
unsuitable.

Salinity levels at which spawning has
been observed are suitable.

Optimum temperatures for fry are those
when growth 1s best.  Temperatures that
result in no growth or death are unsuit-
able.
 Salinities  that do not  reduce  growth
 of  fry  and  juveniles  are  optimum.
 Salinities  that greatly reduce growth
 are unsuitable.

 Temperatures  at which growth of juveniles
 is  best are optimum.   Temperatures that
 result  in  no  growth or death are unsuit-
 able.

 Storage ratios correlated with maximum
 standing crops are  optimum; those cor-
 related with lower  standing crops are
 suboptimum.

 Total  dissolved solids (TDS) levels cor-
 related with high standing crops of warm-
 water fish are optimum; those correlated
 with lower standing crops are suboptimum.
 The data used to develop this graph are
 primarily from southeastern reservoirs.

 Flushing rates correlated with  reduced
 levels of  fry abundance are suboptimal.

 High velocities near cover  objects will
 decrease the  amount  of usable habitat
 around the objects and are  thus
 considered suboptimum.
                                        19

-------
Table 2.   Sample data sets using riverine  HSI model.
Variable
% pools Vt
% cover V2
Substrate for V,,
food production
Temperature-Adult
(° C) V,
Growing season V8
Turbidity (-ppm) V7
Dissolved oxygen
(mg/1) V,
Sal im'ty-adul t
(ppt) V,
Temperature- Embryos
(°C) VIQ
Sal inity- Embryo
(ppt) VM
Temperature-Fry
(° C) V12
Sal ini ty-Fry/
Juvenile (ppt) Vaj
Temperature-
Juvenile (° C) Vllt
Velocity Vlt
Data set 1 Data set 2
Data SI Data SI
60 1.0 90 0.6
50 1.0 10 0.4
silt- 0.7 silt- 0.5
gravel sand
28 - 1.0 32 0.4
180 0.8
50 1.0 210 0.5
4.5 0.6 4.0 0.5
< 1 1.0 < 1 1.0
25 0.8 21.5 0.5
< 1 1.0 < 1 1.0
26.5 0.8 32 0.7
< 1 1.0 < 1 1.0
29 1.0 32 0.7
15 1.0 5 1.0
Data
Data
15
5
sand

22
-
160
4.0
< 1
28.5
< 1
23
< 1
22
30
set 3
SI
0.5
0.2
0.2

0.5
-
0.8
0.5
1.0
0.5
1.0
0.5
1.0
0.5
0.3
                            20

-------
                             Table 2.   (concluded)                  -i
Variable
Component SI
CF =
CC =
CWQ =
CR =
HSI =
Data set 1
Data SI

0.85
1.00
0.87
0.86
0.88
Data set 2
Data SI

0.45
0.62
0.40*
0.58
0.40*
Data set 3
Data SI

0.20
0.31
0.69
0.47
0.43
*Note:   CWQ < 0.4; therefore, HSI = CWQ in Data Set 2.
                                        21

-------
     HSI  determination.


          HSI =  (CF  x Cc  x CWQ> x CR2 x CQT)1/7 , or


          If  CWQ or  CR  is <  0.4, then the HSI equals the lowest of the

          following:  CWQ, Cn, or the above equation.



     Sample data sets using  lacustrine HSI model are listed  in Table 3.


Interpreting  Model Outputs

     The proper  interpretation of the HSI  produced  by the models is  one of
comparison.  If  two  water bodies have large differences in HSI's, then the one
with the higher HSI  should  be  able to support more catfish than the  water body
with the  lower  HSI, given that the model assumptions  have not been  violated.
The actual differences in HSI  that  indicate  a true  difference  in  carrying
capacity are unknown .and  likely to be high.  We have aggregated a large  number
of variables into a  single  index  with  little  or  no  quantitative  information  on
how  the  variables interact to effect carrying capacity.  The  probability that
we have  made  an error  in our assumptions on  variable interactions  is  high.
However,  we  believe the  model  is a  reasonable hypothesis  of  how the selected
variables interact to determine carrying capacity.

     Before using the model, any available statistical models, such as  those
described  under model  3  in  the next  section,  should  be  examined to  determine
if they  better  meet the  goals of model  application.  Statistical models are
likely  to  be  more accurate  in predicting the value  of  a  dependent  variable,
such as  standing crop,  from habitat related variables  than  the HSI  models
described  above.  A statistical  model  is especially  useful when the  habitat
variables  in the data set used to derive the model  have values similar  to the
proposed  model  application  site.  The  HSI models described above may be most
useful  when  habitat conditions are  dissimilar to the statistical  model data
set  or  it is important  to  evaluate changes  in  variables  not included  in the
statistical model.

     The  sample data  sets  consist  of different  variable  values  (and  their
corresponding  SI score), which  although not actual   field measurements,  are
thought  to represent realistic conditions that could  occur in various channel
catfish  riverine or lacustrine habitats.  We believe the HSI's calculated from
the  data  reflect what carrying capacity  trends would  be in riverine or  lacus-
trine habitats  with the characteristics listed in the respective data sets.
                                       22

-------
           Table 3.  Sample data sets using lacustrine HSI model.
Variable
% cover V2
% littoral area V3
Temperature-Adult
(° C) V$
Growing season Vt
Turbidity V7
Dissolved oxygen V,
Salinity-Adult
(ppt) V,
Temperature-Embryo
(° C) V10
Salinity- Embryo
(ppt) VM
Temperature-Fry
(° C) Vlt
Salinity-Fry/
Juvenile (ppt) Vj,
Temperature-
Juvefiile (° C) V,»
Storage ratio VJS
TDS (ppm) V,.
Data
Data
50
40
26
180
175
4.5
< 1
25
< 1
26.5
< 1
29
1.5
200
set 1
SI
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.8
0.7
0.6
1.0
0.8
1.0
0.8
1.0
1.0
0.9
1.0
Data
Data
10
20
20
-
210
4.5
< 1
21.5
< 1
32
< 1
32
.3
300
set 2
SI
0.4
0.7
0.3
-
0.5
0.6
1.0
0.5
1.0
0.7
1.0
0.7
0.7
1.0
Data
Data
5
70
33
-
250
2.5
< 1
28
< 1
23
< 1
22
0.8
600
set 3
SI
0.2
0.6
0.2
-
0.3
0.2
1.0
0.5
1.0
0.5
1.0
0.5
1.0
0.6
Flushing rate
  while fry
  present (days)      V17     15         1.0      4        0.4    11         1.0
                                       23

-------
                            Table 3.  (concluded)
Variable
Component SI
CF '
CC '
cwq =
CR =
Cnr =
OT
HSI =
Data set 1
Data SI

1.00
1.00
0.82
0.83
0.95

0.89
Data set 2
Data SI

0.70 '
0.52
0.30*
0.56
0.55

0.30*
Data set 3
Data SI

0.47
0.33
0.20*
0.20
1.00

0.20*
*Note:   CWQ < 0.4;  therefore,  HS!  =  CWQ in  Data  Sets  2  and  3.
ADDITIONAL HABITAT MODELS

Model 1

     Optimal riverine  habitat  for channel  catfish  is characterized  by the
following conditions, assuming  water  quality is  adequate:  warm,  stable water
temperatures (summer temperatures of  25-31° C);  an approximate 40-60% area of
deep pools; and .abundant cover in the  form of logs, boulders, cavities,  and
debris (> 40% of pool area).

           number of above criteria  present
     Hoi = •—•
                                       24

-------
Model 2

     Optimal lacustrine habitat  for  channel  catfish is characterized  by  the
following conditions, assuming water quality is adequate:   warm,  stable water
temperatures (summer temperatures of 25-30° C); large surface area (> 500 ha);
moderate to  high  fertility  (IDS  100-350 ppm);  clear to moderate  turbidities
(< 100 JTU); and abundant cover (> 40?o in areas  < 5 m deep).

           number of above criteria present
         =               5
Model_J

     Use the  reservoir  standing crop regression equations for catfishes pre-
sented by Aggus and Morais  (1979)  to predict standing crop, then  divide the
predicted standing crop by the highest standing crop value used to develop the
regression equation,  in  order to obtain an HSI.
 REFERENCES CITED

 Aggus,  L.  R.,  and D.  I.  Morais.   1979.   Habitat  suitability  index equations
      for  reservoirs based  on  standing crop  of fish.   Nat!.  Reservoir Res.
      Program.  Rept. to U.S. Fish Wild!. Serv., Hab. Eval. Proj., Ft. Collins,
      CO.  120 pp.

 Allen,  K.  0.,  and J.  W.  Avault.   1970.   The  effect of salinity on growth of
      channel catfish.   Proc.  Southeastern Assoc.  Game and Fish  Commissioners
      23:319-331.

 Allen,  K.  0.,  and K.  Strawn.   1968.   Heat tolerance  of channel  catfish,
      Ictalurus   punctatus.    Proc.   Southeastern   Assoc.  Game   and   Fish
      Commissioners 21:399-411.

 Andrews,  J.  W.,  and R. R. Stickney.   1972.  Interactions  of feeding rates  and
      environmental temperature  on  g.rowth,  food conversion and  body composition
      of channel catfish.  Trans. Am.  Fish. Soc. 101(1):94-99.

 Andrews,  J.  W.,  L.  H.  Knight,  and T. Murai.   1972.  Temperature requirements
      for  high density  rearing  of  channel  catfish from fingerlings to  market
      size.  Prog.  Fish-Cult. 34:240-242.

 Andrews,  J.  W.,  T.  Murai,  and  G.  Gibbons.  1973.   The  influence of dissolved
      oxygen  on  the  growth of  channel  catfish.   Trans. Am.  Fish.   Soc.
      102(4):835-838.
                                        25

-------
Bailey, R. M.,  and  H.  M.  Harrison, Jr.  1948.  Food  habits  of the southern
     channel  catfish (Icta_lury_s lacustris p_u_nc:tartu_s) in the Des Moines River,
     Iowa. Trans. Am. Fish. Soc.'75:110-138.

Biesinger, K.  E., R.  B.  Brown, C. R.  Bernick,  G.  A.  Flittner, and  K.  E.  F.
     Hokanson.  1979.  A  national compendium  of  freshwater  fish  and water
     temperature data.  Vol.  I. U.S.  Environ.  Protection Agency Rep., Environ.
     Res.  Lab., Duluth, Minn.  207  pp.

Brown, B.  E.,  1.  Inman,  and  A.  Jearld, Jr.   1970.   Schooling and  shelter
     seeking tendencies in fingerling catfish behavior.  Trans. Am. Fish. Soc.
     99(3):540-S45.

Brown,  L.   1942.   Propagation  of the  spotted channel  catfish  (Ictalurus
     lacustris punctatus).  Trans.  Kansas Acad. Sci . 45:311-314.

Bryan, C.  F.,  F. M.  Truesdale, and D. S. Sabins.  1975.  A limnological  survey
     of  the  Atchafalaya Basin,  annual  report.  Louisiana  Coop.   Fish.  Res.
     Unit, Baton Rouge.  203  pp.

Buck,  H.  D.   1956.   Effects  of turbidity on  fish  and fishing.  Trans. N. Am.
     Wildl. Conf. 21:249-261.

Carlander, K.  C.  1969.  Channel catfish.  Pages 538-554 jjn Handbook of fresh-
     water fishes  of  the  United States  and Canada,  exclusive  of  the
      Perciformes. Iowa State Univ. Press, Ames.  752 pp.

Carlson,  A.  R.,  R.  E. Siefert, and  L.  J.  Herman.   1974.   Effects of lowered
      dissolved oxygen concentrations on channel catfish (Ictalurus punctatus)
      embryos  and larvae.  Trans. Am. Fish. Soc. 103(3):623-626.

Chen,  T.  H.   1976.  Cage culture of channel catfish in a heated effluent from
      a power  plant,  Thomas Hill reservoir.  Ph.D.  Dissertation, Univ.  Missouri,
      Columbia. 98 pp.

Clemens,  H.  P.,  and K.  E.  Sneed.   1957.  Spawning behavior of  channel catfish,
      Ictalurus punctatus.   U.S.  Fish Wildl.  Serv.  Spec.  Sci. Rep.-Fish. 219.
      11  PP-

Cowardin,,  L.  M.,  V.  Carter,  F. C.  Golet,  and  E. T.  LaRoe.   1979.   Classifica-
      tion of wetlands and deepwater  habitats of  the United States.  U.S.D.I.
      Fish and Wildlife Service. FWS/OBS-79/31.  103 pp.

Cross, F.  B., and J.  T.  Collins.   1975.  Fishes in  Kansas.  Univ.  Kansas Mus.
      Nat.  Hist. Publ. Educ. Ser. 3.  180 pp.

 Davis, J.  1959.   Management of channel catfish in Kansas.  Univ.  Kansas Mus.
      Nat.  Hist. Misc. Publ. 21. 56 pp.

 Davis, J. T.,  and  L.  E.  Posey,  Jr.   1958.   Length at  maturity  of  channel
      catfish  (Icta/lurys .la.c_u_s_tjris)  in Louisiana.  Proc.  Southeastern  Assoc.
      Game and Fish. Commissioners 21:72-74.
                                        26

-------
Flnnell, J.  C.,  and  R.  M.  Jenkins.  1954.  Growth  of channel  catfish in
     Oklahoma waters:   1954  revision.   Oklahoma Fish.  Res.  Lab.,  Rept. 41.
     37 pp.  (Cited in Miller 1966.)

Hynes, H.  B. N.   1970.   The  ecology  of  running  waters.  Univ. Toronto  Press,
     Canada.  555  pp.

Jenkins, R.  M.  1970.   The  influence of  engineering  deiiyn and  operation and
     other  environmental  factors on  reservoir  fis-her>  resources.    Water
     Resources Bull.  6(1):110-119.

Jenkins, R. M.  1974.  Reservoir  management  prognosis:  migraines or miracles.
     Proc. Southeastern Assoc. Game and Fish Commissioners 27:374-385.

Jenkins, R. M.  1976.  Prediction of  fish  production  in  Oklahoma  reservoirs on
     the basis of  environmental variables.  Ann.  Oklahoma Acad. Sci. 5:11-20.

Jenkins,  R.  M.,  and  D. I. Morais.  1971.  Reservoir  sport  fishing effort and
     harvest  in relation  to  environmental  variables.   Pages  371-384  in G. E.
     Hall,  ed.   Reservoir  fisheries  and limnology.   Am.  Fish.  Soc.Spec
     Publ.  8.

Jester, D.  B.  1971.  Effects  of commercial fishing, species introductions,
     and drawdown control on fish populations in Elephant Butte Reservoir, New
     Mexico.   Pages   265-285 jn   G. E. Hall,  ed.  Reservoir  fisheries  and
      limnology.  Am.  Fish. Soc. Spec. Publ. 8.

 Lawler, R.  E.  I960.  Investiqations of  the channel catfish of Utah Lake. Utah
      State  Dept. Fish Game.   Inform. Bull. 60-8.   69 pp.

 Leidy,  G.  R., and R.  M. Jenkins.  1977.   The development of  fishery  compart-
      ments  and population  rate  coefficients for use in reservoir ecosystem
      modeling.   Contract Report Y-77-1,  prepared  for Office,   Chief of
      Engineers, U.S. Army, Washington, D.C.  72 pp.

 Macklin,  R., and S.  Soule.   1964.   Feasibility of  establishing a warmwater
      fish  hatchery.   Calif. Fish .Game,  Inland Fish.  Admin. Rept.   64-14.
      13 pp.  (Cited in Miller 1966.)

 Marzolf,  R. C.   1957.  The  reproduction  of  channel catfish  in Missouri ponds.
      J. Wildl. Manage. 21(l):22-28.

 McCall, T.  C.  1977.  Movement  of channel  catfish,  Ictalurus punctatus.  in
      Cholla  Lake, Arizona,  as  determined  by  ultrasonic  tracking.   Western
      Assoc. Game  Fish. Comm. 57:359-366.

 McCammon, G. W.   1956.   A tagging experiment with channel catfish (Ictalurus
      punctatus)  in the  lower Colorado River. Calif. Fish Game 42(4):323-335.

 McCammon,  G. W., and D.  A.  LaFaunce.   1961.  Mortality rates and  movement in
      the channel  catfish population of  the Sacramento  Valley.   Calif. Fish
      Game 47(l):5-26.
                                        27

-------
Killer, E.  E.   1966.   Channel  catfish.   Pages  440-463 _1_n  A.  Calhoun,  ed.
     Inland fisheries  management.   Calif.  Fish Game Res.  Agency,  Sacramento.
     546 pp.

Minckley,  W. L.  1973.  Fishes  of  Arizona.  Arizona  Fish Game Publ.,  Phoenix.
     293 pp.

Moore, G.  A.  1968.   Vertebrates of the United States.  McGraw-Hill, New York.

Moss, D. D., and D.  C. Scott.  1961.   Dissolved oxygen  requirements  of  three
     species of fish.  Trans. Am. Fish.  Soc. 90(4):377-393.

Perry,  W.  G.   1973.   Notes on  the spawning  of  blue  and channel catfish  in
     brackish water  ponds.  Prog.  Fish-Cult.  35(3):164-166.

Perry, W.  G., and J. W. Avault.   1968.   Preliminary experiments  on  the culture
     of blue,  channel, and  white  catfish  in  brackish water  ponds.   Proc.
     Southeastern Assoc.  Game and Fish Commissioners 22:396-406.

Pflieger,  W.  L.   1971.  A distributional  study  of Missouri  fishes.  Univ.
      Kansas Mus. Nat.  Hist. Publ. 20(3) :225-570.

Pflieger,  W.  L.   1975.  Fishes  of  Missouri.  Missouri  Dept. Conserv. Publ.,
      Columbia.  343  pp.

Randolph,  K.  N., and H.   P. Clemens.   1976.  Some factors  influencing  the
      feeding  behavior of  channel  catfish in  culture ponds.  Trans. Am. Fish.
      Soc.  105(6):718-724.

Ryder,  R.  A.   1965.   A method for  estimating the potential fish production  of
      north-temperate  lakes.  Trans. Am.  Fish. Soc.  94(3):214-218.

Ryder,  R.  A.,  S. R. Kerr,  K. H. Loftus, and  H. A. Regier.  1974.  The morpho-
      edaphic  index, a fish yield estimator  -  review  and evaluation. J. Fish.
      Res.  Board Can. 31(5):663-688.

Scott,  W. B., and E.  J.  Crossman.   1973.   Freshwater fishes  of  Canada.  Fish.
      Res.  Board Can. Bull. 184.  966  pp.

 Shrable,  J. B., 0.  W.  Tiemeier,  and C.  W.  Deyoe.   1969.  Effects of  temperature
      on rate of digestion by channel  catfish.  Prog.  Fish-Cult.  31(3):131-138.

 Sigler, W. F., and  R. R.  Miller.-  1963.   Fishes of Utah.  Utah Fish Game,  Salt
      Lake City.  203  pp.

 Simco, D. A.,  and  F.  B.  Cross.  1966.   Factors affecting growth and  production
      of channel catfish,  Ictalurus  punctatus.  Univ.  Kansas Mus.  Nat.  Hist.
      Publ. 17(4):191-256.

 Starostka, V.  J.,  and W.  R.  Nelson.   1974.   Channel catfish  in  Lake  Dane.  U.S.
      Fish Wild!. Serrv. Tech. Pap.  81.  13  pp.
                                        28

-------
Stauffer,  J. R., Jr.,  K.  L.  Dickson,  J. Cairns, Jr., W.  F.  Calhoun, M. T.
     Masnik, and R.  H.  Myers.   1975.   Summer  distribution  of fish  species  in
     the  vicinity  of  a  thermal  discharge,  New River,  Virginia.  Arch.
     Hydrobiol.  76(3):287-301.

Trautman,  M. B.  1957.   Fishes of Ohio.   Ohio State Univ. Press.  683 pp.

Walburg, C.  H.  1971,  Loss of young  fish in  reservoir  discharge and year-class
     survival,  Lewis and  Clark  Lake,  Missouri  River.   Pages  441-448 HI  G.  E.
     Hall,  ed.   Reservoir fisheries and  limnology.   Am.  Fish.  Soc.  Spec.
     Publ. 8.

Walbirg,  C.  H.   1975.   Food of  young-of-year channel catfish  in  Lewis  and
     Clark Lake, a Missouri River reservoir.   Am. Midi. Nat. 93(1):218-221.

Walden, H. T.  1964.   Familiar  freshwater  fishes  of America.  Harper and  Row,
     New York.   324  pp.

West, B. W.  1966.  Growth, food conversion,  food consumption and survival  at
     various  temperatures  of   the  channel   catfish,   Ictalurus  punctaUjs
     (Raf inesque).  M.S.  Thesis.   Univ. Arkansas, Fayettevil le.   (Cited~ln
     Shrable et al.  1969.)

ZiebeVl,  C.  1973.   Ultrasonic transmitters  for tracking channel  catfish.
     Prog.  Fish-Cult.  35(l):28-32.

-------
APPENDIX B-l.  NATIONAL LIST OF OMNIVORE FISH SPECIES.
Common name

Gizzard shad
Threadfin shad
Central mudminnow
Eastern mudminnow
Mexican tetra
Longfin dace
Goldfish
Grass carp
Common carp
Si Tverjaw minnow
Alvord chub
Utah chub
Tui chub
Blue chub
Sonora chub
Yaqui chub
Speckled chub
Blotched chub
California roach
Virgin spinedace
Hardhead
Bluehead chub
Golden shiner
White shiner
Common shiner
Bigmouth shiner
Blacknose shiner
Spottail shiner
Swallowtail shiner
Sand shiner
Skygazer shiner
Mimic shiner
Black side dace
Northern redbelly dace
Southern redbelly dace
Bluntnose minnow
Fathead minnow
Blacknose dace
Speckled dace
Redside shiner
Creek chub
River carpsucker
Quill back
Highfin carpsucker
Utah sucker
Longnose sucker
Bluehead sucker
Owens sucker
Flannelmouth sucker
Largescale sucker
Sacramento sucker
Latin name

Dorosoma cepedianum
Dorosoma petenense
Umbra limi
Umbra pygmaea
Astyanax tetra
Agosia chrysogaster
Carassius auratus
Ctenopharyngodon idell a
Cyprinus carpio
Ericymba buccata
Gil a alvordensis
Gil a atravia
Gil a bicolor
Gil a coerulea
Gila ditaenia
Gil a purpurea
Hybopsis aestivalis
Hybops is ins ignis
Lavinia symmetricus
Lepidomeda mollispinis
Mylopharodon conocephalus
Nocomis leptocephalus
Notemigonus crysoleucas
Notropis albeolus
Notropis cornutus
Notropis dorsal is
Notropis heterolepis
Notropis hudsonius
Notropis procne
Notropis stramineus
Notropis uranoscopus
Notropis volucellus
Phoxinus cumberlandensis
Phoxinus eos
Phoxinus erythrogaster
Pimephales notatus
Pimephales promelas
Rhlnichthys atratulus
Rhinichthys osculus
Richardsonius balteatus
Semotilus atromaculatus
Carpi odes carpio
Carpiodes cyprinus
Carpiodes velifer
Catostomus ardens
Catostomus catostomus
Catostomus discobolus
Catostomus fumeiventris
Catostomus latipinnis
Catostomus macrocheilus
Catostomus occidental is

-------
Mountain sucker                        Catostomus platyrhyncus
Rio grande sucker                      Catostomus plebeius
Tahoe sucker                           Catostomus tahoensis
Blue sucker                            Cycleptus elongatus
Smallmouth buffalo                     Ictiobus bubalus
Black buffalo                          Ictiobus niger
Oriental weatherfish                   Misgurnus anguillicaudatus
Snail bullhead                         Ictalurus brunneus
Black bullhead                         Ictalurus melas
Yellow bullhead                        Ictalurus natalis
Flat bullhead                          Icalurus platycephalus
Channel  catfish                        Ictalurus punctatus
Walking catfish                        Clarias batrachus
Chinese catfish                        Clarias fuscus
Desert pupfish                         Cyprinodon macularius
Sheepshead minnow                      Cyprinodon variegatus
Plains killifish                       Fundulus zebrinus
Porthole livebearer                    Poeciliopsis gracilis
Gil a topminnow                         Poeciliopsis occidental is
Pinfish                                Lagodon rhomboides
Black acara                            Cichlasoma bimaculatum
Rio grande perch                       Cichlasoma cyanoguttatum
Firemouth                              Cichlasoma meeki
Jewel fish                              Hemichromis bimaculatus
Mozambique tilapia                     Tilapia mossambica
Redbelly tilapia                       Tilapia zilli
Shiner perch                           Cymatogaster aggregate

-------
APPENDIX B-2.  NATIONAL LIST OF TOP CARNIVORE FISH SPECIES.
Common name

Bull shark
Alligator gar
Spotted gar
Longnose gar
Florida gar
Shortnose gar
Bowfi n
Machete
Ladyfish
Tarpon
Skipjack herring
Hickory shad
Pink salmon
Chum salmon
Coho salmon
Sockeye salmon
Chinook salmon
Golden trout
Arizona trout
Cutthroat trout
Rainbow trout
Atlantic salmon
Brown trout
Arctic char
Bull trout
Brook trout
Dolly varden
Lake trout
Inconnu
Redfin pickerel
Grass pickerel
Northern pike
Muskellunge
Chain pickerel
Sacramento squawfish
Colorado squawfish
Northern squawfish
Umpqua squawfish
Flathead catfish
Burbot
Fat snook
Tarpon snook
Snook
White bass
Striped bass
Yellow bass
Rock bass
Roanoke bass
Redeye bass
Small mouth bass
Suwanee bass
Latin name

Carcharhinus leucas
Atractosteus spatula
Lepisosteus oculatus
Lepisosteus osseus
Lepisosteus platyrhincus
Lepisosteus platostomus
Ami a calva
Elops affinis
Elops saurus
Megalops atlanticus
Alosa chrysochloris
Alosa mediocris
Oncorhynchus gorbuscha
Oncorhynchus keta
Oncorhynchus kisutch
Oncorhynchus nerka
Oncorhynchus tshawytscha
Salmo aguabonita
Salmo apache
Salmo clarki
Salmo gairdneri
Salmo salar
Salmo trutta
Salvelinus alpinus
Salvelinus confluentus
Salvelinus fontinalis
Salvelinus malma
Salvelinus namaycush
Stenodus leucichthys
Esox americanus americanus
Esox americanus vermiculatus
Esox lucius
Esox masquinongy
Esox niger
Ptychocheilus grandis
Ptychocheilus lucius
Ptychocheilus oregonensis
Ptychocheilus umpquae
Pylodictis olivaris
Lota lota
Centropomus parallelus
Centropomus pectinatus
Centropomus undecimalis
Morone chrysops
Morone saxatilis
Morone mississippiensis
Ambloplites rupestris
Ambloplites cavifrons
Micropterus coosae
Micropterus dolomieui
Micropterus notius

-------
Spotted bass                           Micropterus punctulatus
Largemouth bass                        Micropterus salmoides
Guadalupe bass                         Micropterus treculi
White crappie                          Pomoxis  annularis
Black crappie                          Pomoxis  nigromaculatus
Yellow perch                           Perca flavescens
Sauger                                 Stizostedion canadense
Walleye                                Stizostedion vitreum
Gray snapper                           Lutjanus griseus
Freshwater drum                        Aplodinotus grunniens
Spotted seatrout                       Cynoscion nebulosus
Red drum                               Sciaenops ocellatus
Goldeye                                Hiodon alosoides
White catfish                          Ictalurus catus
Blue catfish                           Ictalurus furcatus
Tucunare                               Cichla ocellaris
Snakehead                              Channa striata

-------
APPENDIX C.  NATIONAL LIST OF INTOLERANT FISH SPECIES.
Common name

Cisco
Arctic cisco
Lake whitefish
Bloater
Kiyi
Bering cisco
Broad whitefish
Humpback whitefish
Shortnose cisco
Least cisco
Shortjaw cisco
Pink salmon
Chum salmon
Coho salmon
Sockeye salmon
Chinook salmon
Pygmy whitefish
Round whitefish
Mountain whitefish
Golden trout
Arizona trout
Cutthroat trout
Rainbow trout
Atlantic salmon
Brown trout
Arctic char
Bull trout
Brook trout
Dolly varden
Lake trout
Inconnu
Arctic grayling
Largescale stoneroller
Redside dace
Cut lips minnow
Bigeye chub
River chub
Pallid shiner
Pugnose shiner
Rosefin shiner
Bigeye shiner
Pugnose minnow
Whitetail shiner
Blackchin shiner
Blacknose shiner
Spottail shiner
Sailfin shiner
Tennessee shiner
Yellowfin shiner
Ozark minnow
Ozark shiner
Latin name

Coregonus artedii
Coregonus autumnal is
Coregonus clupeaformis
Coregonus hoyi
Coregonus kiyi
Coregonus laurettae
Coregonus nasus
Coregonus pidschian
Coregonus reighardi
Coregonus sardinella
Coregonus zenithicus
Oncorhynchus gorbuscha
Oncorhynchus keta
Oncorhynchus kisutch
Oncorhynchus nerka
Oncorhnchus tshawytscha
Prosopium coulteri
Prosopium cylindraceum
Prosopium williamsoni
Salmo aguabonita
Salmo apache
Salmo clarki
Salmo gairdneri
Salmo salar
Salmo trutta
Salvelinus alpinus
Salvelinus confluentus
Salvelinus fontinalis
Salvelinus malma
Salvelinus namaycush
Stenodus leucichthys
Thymallus arcticus
Campostoma oligolepis
Clinostomus elongatus
Exoglossum maxillingua
Hybobsis amblops
Nocomis micropogon
Notropis amnis
Notropis anogenus
Notropis ardens
Notropis boops
Noropis emiliae
Notropis galacturus
Notropis heterodon
Notropis heterolepis
Noropis hudsonius
Notropis hypselopterus
Notropis leuciodus
Notropis lutipinnis
Notropis nubilus
Notropis ozarcanus

-------
Silver shiner
Duskystripe shiner
Rosyface shiner
Safron shiner
Flagfin shiner
Telescope shiner
Topeka shiner
Mimic shiner
Steelcolor shiner
Coosa shiner
Bleeding shiner
Bandfin shiner
Blackside dace
Northern redbelly dace
Southern redbelly dace
Blacknose dace
Pearl dace
Alabama nog sucker
Northern hog sucker
Roanoke hog sucker
Spotted sucker
Silver redhorse
River redhorse
Black jumprock
Gray redhorse
Black redhorse
Rustyside sucker
Greater jumprock
Blacktail redhorse
Torrent sucker
Striped jumprock
Greater redhorse
Ozark madtom
Elegant madtom
Mountain madtom
Slender madtom
Stonecat
Black madtom
Least madtom
Margined madtom
Speckled madtom
Brindled madtom
Frecklebelly madtorn
Brown madtom
Roanoke bass
Ozark rock bass
Rock bass
Longear sunfish
Darters
Darters
Darters
Sculpts
O'opu alamoo  (goby)
O'opu nopili  (goby)
O'opu nakea   (goby)
Notropis photogenis
Notropis pilsbryi
Notropis rubellus
Notropis rubricroceus
Notropis signipinnis
Notropis telescopus
Notropis topeka
Notropis volucellus
Notropis whipplei
Notropis xaenocephalus
Notropis zonatus
Notropis zonistius
Phoxinus cumberlandensis
Phoxinus eos
Phoxinus erythrogaster
Rhinichthys atratulus
Semotilus margarita
Hypentelium etowanuni
Hypentelium nigricans
Hypentelium roanokense
Minytrema melanops
Moxostoma anisurum
Moxostoma carinatum
Moxostoma cervinum
Moxostoma congestum
Moxoatoma duquesnei
Moxostoma hamiltoni
Moxostoma lachneri
Moxostoma poecilurum
Moxostoma rhothoecum
Moxostoma rupiscartes
Moxostoma valenciennesi
Noturus albater
Noturus elegans
Noturus eleutherus
Noturus exilis
Noturus flavus
Noturus funebris
Noturus hildebrandi
Noturus insignis
Noturus leptacanthus
Noturus miurus
Noturus munitus
Noturus phaeus
Ambloplites cavifrons
Ambloplites constellatus
Ambloplites rupestris
Lepomis megalotis
Ammocrypta sp.
Etheostoma sp.
Percina sp.
Cottus sp.
Lentipes concolor
Sicydium stimpsoni
Awaous stamineus
              *U.b. GOV:,UNMENT PUINTING OFFTCL:
                                      !98j-0-<<27-65;t/271

-------